EMS Technologies Canada HSD-X eNfusion HSD-X Aeronautical Satcom Terminal User Manual MN 1110 10113
EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. eNfusion HSD-X Aeronautical Satcom Terminal MN 1110 10113
HSD-X User Manual
eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual This manual supercedes MN-1110-10023 and MN-1110-10057 and provides documentation for the equipment listed below. Model eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal PN 1110-A-0001 1110-A-0060 1110-A-0070 1110-A-0080 1110-A-0150 1110-A-0160 EMS SATCOM 400 Maple Grove Road Ottawa, Ontario K2V 1B8 CANADA MN-1110-10113 Revision E 18 September 2007 PROPRIETARY STATEMENT This document contains information which is proprietary and confidential to SATCOM (EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd.). Neither this document nor the information contained within may be used for any purpose other than the purpose for which it was prepared. Neither this document nor the information contained within may be disclosed or copied without the prior written permission of EMS SATCOM. © 2006 EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd. All Rights Reserved. eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Document Number: MN-1110-10113, Revision E Revision Table Revision ECR Description N/A First release 030758 Updated to include new installation modes 040711 Updated Service Bulletin Matrix 040673 Added AMBE copyright statement 050060 Updated middle plug connections on table and drawings 061189 Updated terminology 070552 Removed section cover pages Updated frequency bands, service bulletins, and added LED label section 070111 Updated address and telephone numbers Copyright © 2006, 2007 EMS SATCOM (EMS Technologies Canada, Ltd.) All rights reserved. Cabin Network Xcelerator® and CNX® are registered trademarks of EMS Technologies, Ltd. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other product, brand, service, and company names herein are the trademarks of their respective owners. The AMBE® voice compression technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice compression Technology is licensed solely for use within an Inmarsat satellite communications system. Our products are under continuous research and development. Any information may therefore be changed without prior notice. EMS SATCOM reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the product described in this manual at any time without notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, EMS SATCOM assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information contained herein. Printed in Canada. EMS SATCOM 400 Maple Grove Road, Ottawa, Ontario K2V 1B8, CANADA EMS SATCOM Reception: 613-591-9064 EMS SATCOM Product Support: 888-300-7415 (routed to a Mobile after regular business hours) EMS SATCOM Product Support fax: 613-591-0797 EMS SATCOM E-mail Help: hsd.help@emssatcom.com EMS SATCOM Web site: www.emssatcom.com EMS SATCOM Sales and Marketing: 800-600-9759 CUSTOMER RESPONSE FORM To help us improve the quality of our product documentation, EMS SATCOM would appreciate your comments and suggestions on this publication. Please complete the following customer survey and send to EMS SATCOM at: EMS SATCOM 400 Maple Grove Road Ottawa, ON K2V 1B8 E-mail: techdocs@emssatcom.com Fax: EMS SATCOM Product Support at 613-591-3086 Publication information: Publication number: MN-1110-10113 Publication title: eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual Latest issue date: 18 September 2007 Document revision: Customer information: Name: Company: Tel: Fax: Email: Comments and suggestions: Date: Comments: Blank Page SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal SERVICE BULLETIN LIST Service Bulletin Number Subject Manual Rev. Manual Rev. Number Date 1110-SB-0001 Channel card software upgrade A (C30) to accommodate Inmarsat system change 10-Feb-03 1110-SB-0002 Backplane modification to HPA wiring harness and power supply circuits of the control processor card 10-Feb-03 1110-SB-0003 Upgrade to HSD HPA software to A improve power management by the HSD to the SAT-906 SDU 08-Apr-03 1110-SB-0004 Upgrade hardware to include an A Data I/O Type 2 Card to support the Ethernet (10BASE-T) interface for data input and output 06-Aug-03 1110-SB-0005 Upgrade the hardware for Combined Mode operation 06-Aug-03 1110-SB-0006 Channel Card Software MPDS upgrade 05-Nov-03 1110-SB-0007 Software upgrade for Multi-Channel operation 20-Nov-03 1110-SB-0008 Not applicable N/A N/A 1110-SB-0009 Not applicable N/A N/A 1110-SB-0010 Hardware upgrade for dual channel 05-Aug-03 1110-SB-0011 HSD Software Upgrade 19-Nov-03 1110-SB-0012 HSD Software Enhancement 19-Nov-03 1110-SB-0013 Addition of Software Identification A Label 09-Dec-03 1110-SB-0014 Data I/O Type 2 Software Upgrade 12-Mar-04 1110-SB-0015 HSD Control Processor Software B Enhancement 15-Jun-04 1110-SB-0016 HSD Transceiver Upgrade to HSD-400 13-Oct-06 Page SBL–1 25 May 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Service Bulletin Number Subject Manual Rev. Manual Rev. Number Date 1110-SB-0017 HSD Transceiver Control Processor Software Enhancement 24-Feb-05 1110-SB-0018 HSD Transceiver Channel Card Hardware Modification 10-Aug-05 1110-SB-0020 HSD Transceiver HPA DC Software Upgrade 31-May-05 1110-SB-0021 2-Channel Cooperative Mode HSD Transceiver Control Processor Software Enhancement 01-Feb-06 1110-SB-0022 GPS Protection Software Upgrade 03-Jan-07 1110-SB-0023 HSD Transceiver Motherboard Hardware Replacement 25-Aug-06 1110-SB-0401 HSD-X Software Upgrade 19-Nov-03 1110-SB-0402 Addition of Software Identification A Label 09-Dec-03 Page SBL–2 25 May 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal RECORD OF REVISIONS When revisions are received, insert revised pages, record the date, and initial. Revision Number Issue Date Date Inserted Inserted Revision by Number (initial) Issue Date Date Inserted Inserted by (initial) Page RR–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Blank Page Page RR–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES * An asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current revision. F indicates a right foldout page with a blank back. Section Page Date Cover *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Front Matter *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Customer Comment Form *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 List of Effective Pages *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Record of Revisions *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Service Bulletin List *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Table of Contents *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Introduction *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 System Description *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 System Operation *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Installation *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Test and Fault Isolation *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Maintenance and Repair *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Appendix A *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Appendix B *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Appendix C *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Appendix D *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Appendix E *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Appendix F *ALL Nov. 3, 2006 Service Bulletin List *ALL May 25, 2007 List of Effective Pages *ALL May 25, 2007 System Description *ALL May 25, 2007 System Operation *ALL May 25, 2007 Page LEP–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Blank Page Page LEP–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table of Contents INTRODUCTION 1. General .................................................................................................... TC-1 2. Abbreviations and Acronyms................................................................. TC-2 3. Advisories ................................................................................................ TC-4 4. Illustration of Equipment Covered......................................................... TC-5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. Purpose of Equipment .............................................................................. 1-1 2. Equipment Covered.................................................................................... 1-3 A. Hardware Description ......................................................................................... 1-3 B. Software Description .......................................................................................... 1-5 (1) Software Specifications ................................................................................. 1-5 (2) Operational Software Part Numbers.............................................................. 1-6 (3) Operational Mode Software Requirements.................................................... 1-6 (4) Software Version Description ........................................................................ 1-8 3. Equipment Description ............................................................................ 1-14 A. Applicable Documents...................................................................................... 1-14 B. Reference Documents...................................................................................... 1-14 C. Equipment Specifications ................................................................................. 1-14 D. Mechanical Description .................................................................................... 1-19 (1) HSD Transceiver ........................................................................................ 1-19 (2) HSD-X Transceiver...................................................................................... 1-19 E. Electrical Description ........................................................................................ 1-20 (1) General ....................................................................................................... 1-20 (2) Pin and Connector Descriptions .................................................................. 1-21 F. System Interface Descriptions .......................................................................... 1-21 (1) HSD System Interfaces ............................................................................... 1-21 (2) HSD-X Multi-Channel System Interfaces .................................................... 1-24 G. User Interfaces ................................................................................................. 1-27 Page TC–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (1) Stand-Alone Mode User Interfaces.............................................................. 1-28 (2) Collins Cooperative Mode User Interfaces .................................................. 1-28 (3) Honeywell Combined Mode User Interfaces ............................................... 1-28 (4) Selective Mode User Interfaces................................................................... 1-28 (5) Multi-Channel Configurations ...................................................................... 1-28 (6) ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface ......................................................... 1-31 (7) RS-232 Interface ........................................................................................ 1-32 (8) Ethernet Data Interface ............................................................................... 1-33 (9) ISDN S/T Interface ...................................................................................... 1-33 (10) Maintenance Port Interface ....................................................................... 1-33 H. Initiated-Self-Test.............................................................................................. 1-34 I. Owner Requirements Table ............................................................................... 1-34 4. Inmarsat System Overview ...................................................................... 1-35 A. General............................................................................................................. 1-35 B. Satellite Network Overview............................................................................... 1-35 5. HSD Modes and Configuration Descriptions ......................................... 1-37 A. General............................................................................................................. 1-37 B. Overview........................................................................................................... 1-37 (1) Channel Card Configurations ...................................................................... 1-37 (2) Installation Modes and Configurations......................................................... 1-38 C. Functional System Theory................................................................................ 1-44 SYSTEM OPERATION 1. Introduction................................................................................................ 2-1 2. Activating HSD Transceivers..................................................................... 2-2 A. Obtaining Terminal Information........................................................................... 2-2 (1) Swift64 Service Categories............................................................................ 2-3 B. Selecting a Service Provider .............................................................................. 2-4 C. Registering and Activating the HSD and HSD-X Transceivers .......................... 2-4 3. Configuring HSD Systems ......................................................................... 2-5 A. Setting up Networks ........................................................................................... 2-5 (1) Network Types ............................................................................................... 2-5 (2) Networking Components ............................................................................... 2-6 (3) HSD Interface Options................................................................................... 2-6 B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN Services.......................................................... 2-7 Page TC–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (1) Overview........................................................................................................ 2-7 C. Configuring System Parameters using the Maintenance Port Utility................ 2-14 (1) Configuring System Parameters for Stand-Alone Mode ............................. 2-14 (2) Configuring System Parameters for Cooperative Mode ............................. 2-16 (3) Configuring System Parameters for Honeywell Combined Mode .............. 2-17 (4) Configuring System Parameters for Selective Mode .................................. 2-21 (5) Configuring System Parameters for Multi-Channel Configurations ............. 2-23 D. Configuring LES Access Codes (All Modes) .................................................... 2-24 (1) General Overview ....................................................................................... 2-24 E. Removing the LED Label ................................................................................. 2-30 F. Activating Configurations .................................................................................. 2-30 (1) Verifying Configurations............................................................................... 2-31 G. Configuring System Parameters using the HSD Owner Requirement Tool...... 2-31 (1) Creating an ORT using the HSD ORT Tool ................................................. 2-32 (2) Saving the ORT file ..................................................................................... 2-38 (3) Loading the ORT ......................................................................................... 2-38 (4) Loading ORT Files....................................................................................... 2-39 4. Using the HSD System............................................................................. 2-43 A. Placing Voice and Fax Calls ............................................................................. 2-43 (1) Dial Code Prefixes....................................................................................... 2-44 (2) Mobile-to-Mobile Communication ................................................................ 2-45 B. Using Data Connections................................................................................... 2-46 (1) Mobile ISDN versus MPDS ......................................................................... 2-46 (2) Connecting to Inmarsat Mobile ISDN Service ............................................. 2-46 (3) Connecting to Inmarsat MPDS ................................................................... 2-48 (4) Bonding Channel Cards in Two-Channel Card Systems............................. 2-50 INSTALLATION 1. Introduction................................................................................................ 3-1 2. Advisories ................................................................................................... 3-2 3. Pre-Installation Inspection......................................................................... 3-3 4. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment ..................................................... 3-4 5. Cabling and Connector Requirements ..................................................... 3-5 A. Power Requirements .......................................................................................... 3-5 B. Ground Requirements ........................................................................................ 3-5 Page TC–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal C. Cable Shielding and Termination........................................................................ 3-5 6. ARINC 600 Trays and Connectors............................................................. 3-7 A. Installation Kits ................................................................................................... 3-7 B. Cabling Notes ..................................................................................................... 3-8 (1) HSD Transceiver Cabling .............................................................................. 3-8 (2) HSD-X Transceiver Cabling........................................................................... 3-8 (3) HSD Transceiver Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations .................................. 3-8 7. Mechanical Installation .............................................................................. 3-9 A. General............................................................................................................... 3-9 B. Physical Placement ............................................................................................ 3-9 C. Environmental Requirements ........................................................................... 3-10 (1) Heating and Cooling .................................................................................... 3-10 D. Chassis Grounding........................................................................................... 3-11 8. Electrical Installation................................................................................ 3-12 A. Section I: Stand-Alone Mode Installation .......................................................... 3-12 (1) Stand-Alone Mode Installations Wiring Notes.............................................. 3-12 B. Section II: Combined (HCM)/Selective Mode Installation ................................. 3-28 (1) Combined Mode (HCM)/Selective Mode Installations Wiring Notes............ 3-28 C. Section III: Cooperative Mode Installation........................................................ 3-44 (1) Cooperative Mode Installations Wiring Notes.............................................. 3-44 D. Section IV: Multi-Channel Configuration Installation ........................................ 3-59 (1) Multi-Channel Configuration Installation Wiring Notes ................................ 3-59 9. Outline/Installation and Interconnection/Contact Assignment Diagrams.. 3-83 A. Outline/Installation Diagrams............................................................................ 3-83 B. Interconnection/Contact Assignment Drawings ................................................ 3-83 TEST AND FAULT ISOLATION 1. Introduction................................................................................................ 4-1 2. Operational and Diagnostic Testing ......................................................... 4-2 A. General............................................................................................................... 4-2 B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements ............................................. 4-2 C. HSD Maintenance Utility Program...................................................................... 4-3 Page TC–4 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (1) General Overview.......................................................................................... 4-3 (2) Connection Requirements ............................................................................. 4-4 (3) Accessing the Maintenance Utility Program .................................................. 4-7 (4) Using the HSD Maintenance Utility Program................................................. 4-8 (5) Menu Descriptions......................................................................................... 4-9 (6) Menu Item Descriptions............................................................................... 4-12 (7) Report Item Descriptions ............................................................................. 4-30 (8) Activating Maintenance Reports.................................................................. 4-33 D. Fault Definitions ............................................................................................... 4-36 (1) Cause Indication (Fault Codes) ................................................................... 4-36 (2) Inmarsat Cause Codes................................................................................ 4-36 E. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures ................................................... 4-48 (1) General........................................................................................................ 4-48 (2) Test Setup Procedure .................................................................................. 4-49 (3) Post Test...................................................................................................... 4-50 (4) Installation and Operational Verification Tests ............................................. 4-50 (5) Configuration Parameters Verification ......................................................... 4-52 (6) System Power-up Checks ........................................................................... 4-55 (7) System On-Air Checks ................................................................................ 4-56 (8) Antenna Tracking Checks............................................................................ 4-60 (9) Optional System Checks ............................................................................. 4-61 F. Operational Mode and Configuration System Checks ...................................... 4-62 (1) Verifying Cooperative Mode System Operation........................................... 4-62 (2) Verifying Honeywell Combined Mode System Operation ............................ 4-62 (3) Verifying Multi-Channel Configuration System Operation ........................... 4-67 G. Software Load Procedures ............................................................................... 4-70 (1) Loading Channel Card Software ................................................................. 4-71 (2) Loading Control Processor Software ........................................................... 4-73 (3) Forcing Channel Card Power Up Procedure ............................................... 4-76 (4) Loading HPA Software................................................................................. 4-76 (5) Verifying Software Loads ............................................................................. 4-78 (6) Disconnecting Load Equipment................................................................... 4-79 (7) Completing Record of Accomplishment ...................................................... 4-80 3. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation....................................................... 4-81 A. Troubleshooting Principles ............................................................................... 4-81 (1) Non-specific Complaints.............................................................................. 4-81 (2) Specific Complaints ..................................................................................... 4-81 B. Equipment Required......................................................................................... 4-81 Page TC–5 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal C. Troubleshooting Aids........................................................................................ 4-81 (1) Fault Isolation Screen Displays ................................................................... 4-81 (2) Troubleshooting Table ................................................................................. 4-93 D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic Procedures..................................................... 4-101 (1) Activating and Saving a Diagnostic ‘Reports’ File ..................................... 4-102 4. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures....................................................... 4-104 A. General........................................................................................................... 4-104 5. Modification History ............................................................................... 4-105 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR 1. General ....................................................................................................... 5-1 2. Maintenance ............................................................................................... 5-1 3. Repair ......................................................................................................... 5-1 A. Repair Tools and Supplies.................................................................................. 5-1 B. Repair Procedures.............................................................................................. 5-1 C. Removal Procedures.......................................................................................... 5-1 D. Repair Facility Approvals.................................................................................... 5-2 E. Return for Repair Information ............................................................................. 5-2 (1) Warranty Returns........................................................................................... 5-2 (2) Non-Warranty Returns................................................................................... 5-2 (3) Repackaging Requirements .......................................................................... 5-2 (4) Return Materials Authorization (RMA) Procedure ......................................... 5-3 4. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness, FAR 25.1529 ........................ 5-4 A. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness Procedures......................................... 5-4 APPENDIX A: INMARSAT SATELLITE BEAM COVERAGE.................................... A-1 APPENDIX B: TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST .................................................. B-1 APPENDIX C: RJ-45 CABLE TERMINATION DETAILS........................................... C-1 APPENDIX D: INSTALLATION CHECKLIST ............................................................ D-1 APPENDIX E: RECORD OF ACCOMPLISHMENT.................................................... E-1 APPENDIX F: RF SPLITTER ......................................................................................F-1 Page TC–6 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal List of Figures Figure TC–1. HSD-128 Terminal .............................................................................................. TC-5 Figure TC–2. HSD-X SATCOM High-Speed-Data Transceiver Extension ............................... TC-6 Figure 1–1. Forward ID Assignment (3-channel system) .......................................................... 1-25 Figure 1–2. Forward ID Assignment (4-channel system) .......................................................... 1-25 Figure 1–3. Maintenance Port Access ....................................................................................... 1-26 Figure 1–4. System Interface Block Diagram Single Channel System ...................................... 1-29 Figure 1–5. Reduced Functionality Single-Channel System ..................................................... 1-30 Figure 1–6. System Interface Block Diagram Dual-Channel System ........................................ 1-30 Figure 1–7. Reduced Functionality Dual-Channel System ........................................................ 1-31 Figure 1–8. ISDN Connection Options ...................................................................................... 1-32 Figure 1–9. Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System .................................... 1-36 Figure 1–10. Multi-Channel System Block Diagram .................................................................. 1-40 Figure 1–11. Stand-Alone Mode System Block Diagram .......................................................... 1-41 Figure 1–12. Cooperative Mode System Block Diagram ........................................................... 1-42 Figure 1–13. Combined/Selective Mode System Block Diagram ............................................. 1-43 Figure 1–14. HSD User Configurations ..................................................................................... 1-45 Figure 2–1. Network Configuration Types ................................................................................... 2-5 Figure 2–2. System Setup and Mapping for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile)............................ 2-9 Figure 2–3. Terminal Emulation Program, ASCII Setup ............................................................ 2-25 Figure 2–4. HSD Dialing-Sequence Components ..................................................................... 2-43 Figure 2–5. Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence ........................................................................ 2-46 Figure 3–1. HSD-X Physical Placement Requirements............................................................. 3-10 Figure 3–2. Fan Tray Plug Configuration................................................................................... 3-11 Figure 3–3. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion ................................................................... 3-15 Figure 3–4. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Stand-Alone ............................................................. 3-16 Figure 3–5. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Stand-Alone ..................................................... 3-17 Figure 3–6. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Stand-Alone .............................................. 3-18 Figure 3–7. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Stand-Alone................................................ 3-22 Figure 3–8. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Combined/Selective ............................... 3-31 Figure 3–9. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Combined/Selective ................................................. 3-32 Figure 3–10. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Combined/Selective ....................................... 3-33 Figure 3–11. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Combined/Selective ................................ 3-34 Figure 3–12. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Combined/Selective ................................. 3-38 Page TC–7 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–13. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Cooperative Mode................................ 3-47 Figure 3–14. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Cooperative Mode.......................................... 3-48 Figure 3–15. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Cooperative Mode................................... 3-50 Figure 3–16. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Cooperative Mode .................................... 3-53 Figure 3–17. HSD-X Coax Cable Loss ...................................................................................... 3-60 Figure 3–18. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Multi-Channel ....................................... 3-64 Figure 3–19. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Multi-Channel......................................................... 3-66 Figure 3–20. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Multi-Channel ................................................. 3-66 Figure 3–21. HSD-X Remote Status LED Driver Circuits – Multi-Channel ................................ 3-66 Figure 3–22. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Multi-Channel .......................................... 3-68 Figure 3–23. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Multi-Channel ........................................... 3-72 Figure 3–24. HSD-X Top Plug Connections (Illustrated) ........................................................... 3-79 Figure 3–25 (Sheet 1). HSD Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0001, Rev D............... 3-85 Figure 3–26 (Sheet 2). HSD Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0001, Rev D............... 3-87 Figure 3–27 (Sheet 1). HSD-X Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0401, Rev 1............ 3-89 Figure 3–28 (Sheet 2). HSD-X Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0401, Rev 1............ 3-91 Figure 3–29 (Sheet 1). Stand-Alone Mode HSD System Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0019, Rev F.................................................................................................. 3-93 Figure 3–30 (Sheet 2). Stand-Alone Mode HSD System Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0019, Rev F.................................................................................................. 3-95 Figure 3–31 (Sheet 1). HSD Selective/Combined Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0081, Rev D ................................................................................................. 3-97 Figure 3–32 (Sheet 2). HSD Selective/Combined Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0081, Rev D ................................................................................................. 3-99 Figure 3–33 (Sheet 1). HSD Cooperative Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0156, Rev 3 ................................................................................................ 3-101 Figure 3–34 (Sheet 2). HSD Cooperative Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0156, Rev 3 ................................................................................................ 3-103 Figure 3–35 (Sheet 1). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C ............................................................................................... 3-105 Figure 3–36. (Sheet 2). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C ............................................................................................... 3-107 Figure 3–37 (Sheet 3). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C ............................................................................................... 3-109 Figure 3–38 (Sheet 4). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C ............................................................................................... 3-111 Figure 4–1. Multi-Channel Maintenance Port Access.................................................................. 4-4 Figure 4–2. Remote Access, Maintenance Cable (HSD)............................................................. 4-6 Page TC–8 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 4–3. Front Panel Access, Maintenance Cable (HSD) ...................................................... 4-6 Figure 4–4. HSD-X Front-Panel, Maintenance Port Cable .......................................................... 4-7 Figure 4–5. Level 1 MENU Selections ......................................................................................... 4-9 Figure 4–6. Level 2: Menu 1 ...................................................................................................... 4-10 Figure 4–7. Level 2: Menu 2 ...................................................................................................... 4-10 Figure 4–8. Level 2: Menu 3 ...................................................................................................... 4-10 Figure 4–9. Level 2: Menu10 ..................................................................................................... 4-11 Figure 4–10. Level 2: Menu 13 .................................................................................................. 4-11 Figure 4–11. Level 2: Menu 14 .................................................................................................. 4-11 Figure 4–12. Level 2, Menu 15 .................................................................................................. 4-12 Figure 4–13. Level 2, Menu 18 .................................................................................................. 4-12 Figure 4–14. Menu 1 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-13 Figure 4–15. Menu 2 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-14 Figure 4–16. Menu 3 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-16 Figure 4–17. Menu 3 – L: EEPROM Listing (Version 4.5) ......................................................... 4-18 Figure 4–18. Menu 3 – Item M: Miscellaneous Parameters (Version 4.5)................................. 4-19 Figure 4–19. Menu 3 – Item M: Miscellaneous Parameters (Version 7.0)................................. 4-19 Figure 4–20. Menu 4 Screen Display ........................................................................................ 4-25 Figure 4–21. Menu 10 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-26 Figure 4–22. Menu 13 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-27 Figure 4–23. Menu 14 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-28 Figure 4–24. Menu 15 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-29 Figure 4–25. Menu 18 Screen Display ...................................................................................... 4-29 Figure 4–26. HSD Maintenance Utility Program: Report Items (Version 4.5)............................ 4-31 Figure 4–27. HSD Maintenance Utility Program: Report Items (Version 7.0)............................ 4-32 Figure 4–28. Example of Report Item 23 ................................................................................... 4-33 Figure 4–29. Maintenance Port, Report Items ........................................................................... 4-35 Figure 4–30. Sample EEPROM Listing (Control Processor Software, Version 4.5) .................. 4-53 Figure 4–31. HSD ORT Sample Display (software version 5.7 or later).................................... 4-55 Figure 4–32. HSD Power-up Display ......................................................................................... 4-56 Figure 4–33. Log-on Sample Initialization Display..................................................................... 4-58 Figure 4–34. HSD Call Sample Display ..................................................................................... 4-60 Figure 4–35. Stable Connection with one M4 (Swift64) call ...................................................... 4-64 Figure 4–36. Initial Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls....................................................... 4-64 Figure 4–37. Stable Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls ..................................................... 4-64 Page TC–9 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 4–38. Call Initialization (Aero H/H+ call) ......................................................................... 4-65 Figure 4–39. Stable Connection with one Aero H/H+ call.......................................................... 4-65 Figure 4–40. Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls ................................................................... 4-65 Figure 4–41. Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and one M4 (Swift64) call .......................... 4-65 Figure 4–42. Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls and one Aero H call................................ 4-65 Figure 4–43. Initial Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and two M4 (Swift64) calls ............... 4-66 Figure 4–44. Stable Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and two M4 (Swift64) calls ............. 4-66 Figure 4–45. Initial Call, Channel #1.......................................................................................... 4-69 Figure 4–46. Stable Call, Channel #1 ........................................................................................ 4-70 Figure 4–47. Confirmed Operation of Multi-Channel (4 calls up)............................................... 4-70 Figure 4–48. Successful Ocean Region Registration: Report 21 activated ............................... 4-82 Figure 4–49. No call: Report 23 activated.................................................................................. 4-82 Figure 4–50. In Call: Reports 21 and 23 activated..................................................................... 4-82 Figure 4–51. No IRS Data: Report 23 activated ........................................................................ 4-83 Figure 4–52. No Signal: Report 23 activated ............................................................................. 4-83 Figure 4–53. Failed Ocean Region Registration: Report 21 activated....................................... 4-83 Figure 4–54. Forward ID Not Strapped: No reports activated.................................................... 4-84 Figure 4–55. No Strap on SDI Lines (open): No reports activated ............................................ 4-86 Figure 4–56. Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND)........................................................... 4-87 Figure 4–57. Stand-Alone Mode Multi-Control Loopback (TP1A-3E & TP1B-3F) Not Wired: HSD Fault LED “ON” .......................................................................................................................... 4-88 Figure 4–58. Incorrect Dialing Format: Reports 21 and 52 Enabled.......................................... 4-88 Figure 4–59. Top/Port Antenna Status: Reports 18,19, and 20 activated ................................. 4-89 Figure 4–60. AMBE Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) MES Terminated: Report 21 activated ................... 4-89 Figure 4–61. AMBE Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated........... 4-89 Figure 4–62. 64 K Speech call (Mobile to Fixed) Terrestrial Termination: Reports 21 and 23 activated ...................................................................................................... 4-90 Figure 4–63. 64 K Speech Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Termination: Reports 21 and 23 activated ...................................................................................................... 4-91 Figure 4–64. Speech Call (Fixed-to-Mobile) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated......... 4-92 Figure 4–65. FAX Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated.............. 4-92 Figure 4–66. 64 K Speech and Data Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) MES Terminated: Report 21 activated.................................................................................................................... 4-93 Figure 5–1. HSD-X Order of Removal ......................................................................................... 5-2 Page TC–10 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal List of Tables Table 1–1. Supported Services Matrix for HSD-128, HSD-64, and HSD-X................................... 1 Table 1–2. HSD Transceiver Variants ........................................................................................... 3 Table 1–3. Equipment Covered ..................................................................................................... 4 Table 1–4. HSD Operational Software .......................................................................................... 6 Table 1–5. HSD-X Operational Software ....................................................................................... 6 Table 1–6. Stand-Alone Mode Minimum Software Requirements ................................................. 6 Table 1–7. Combined Mode Recommended Software Requirements .......................................... 7 Table 1–8. Cooperative Mode Recommended Software Requirements ....................................... 7 Table 1–9. Selective Mode Minimum Software Requirements ...................................................... 8 Table 1–10. Multi-Channel Configuration Recommended Software Requirements ...................... 8 Table 1–11. Description of Control Processor Software Changes ................................................ 9 Table 1–12. Service Bulletin Matrix ............................................................................................. 12 Table 1–13. HSD Equipment Characteristics and Specifications ................................................ 14 Table 1–14. HSD RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Characteristics.............................................. 16 Table 1–15. HSD-X Transceiver Specifications........................................................................... 17 Table 1–16. HSD-X RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Specifications............................................ 18 Table 1–17. HSD Installation Mode Drawing Reference Matrix .................................................. 19 Table 1–18. ARINC 429 IRS Navigational Requirements ........................................................... 22 Table 1–19. HSD LED Output Designations................................................................................ 23 Table 1–20. HSD-X Front Panel LEDs Output Designations....................................................... 27 Table 2–1. Swift64 Category and Service Matrix........................................................................... 3 Table 2–2. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #1.............................................................. 9 Table 2–3. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #2.............................................................. 9 Table 2–4. HSD Transceiver MSN Configuration Table .............................................................. 12 Table 2–5. System Assignments for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile) ....................................... 13 Table 2–6. Inmarsat Swift64 LES Status (As of January, 2004).................................................. 26 Table 2–7. DATA I/O Naming Convention for AC-Name ............................................................. 37 Table 2–8. Description of Select Contents Dialog Box Options................................................... 39 Table 2–9. Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection ............................................. 44 Table 2–10. Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides ................................................................ 45 Table 2–11. Satellite Ocean Region Codes................................................................................. 45 Table 3–1. Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications ......................................................... 5 Table 3–2. HSD and HSD-X Installation Kits ................................................................................. 7 Page TC–11 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–3. RF Parameters Definition........................................................................................... 13 Table 3–4. WOW Pin Wiring Table .............................................................................................. 14 Table 3–5. RJ45 Wiring Details – Stand-Alone............................................................................ 18 Table 3–6. Configuration Pin Summary – Stand-Alone ............................................................... 19 Table 3–7. Stand-Alone System Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-Alone.......................................... 20 Table 3–8. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-Alone ............................................................. 21 Table 3–9. Stand-Alone Mode HSD to BSU Interconnects.......................................................... 22 Table 3–10. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details ................................. 23 Table 3–11. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details ............................. 26 Table 3–12. Stand-Alone ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details ...................................... 28 Table 3–13. RF Parameters Definition – Combined/Selective..................................................... 29 Table 3–14. WOW Pin Wiring Table – Combined/Selective ........................................................ 30 Table 3–15. RJ45 Wiring Details – Combined/Selective ............................................................ 34 Table 3–16. Configuration Pin Summary – Combined/Selective ................................................. 35 Table 3–17. Combined Mode System Mode Pin Strapping ......................................................... 35 Table 3–18. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Combined/Selective ............................................... 37 Table 3–19. Receive Path Parts Requirements – Combined/Selective....................................... 39 Table 3–20. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details ..................... 39 Table 3–21. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details................. 42 Table 3–22. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details ................ 43 Table 3–23. RF Parameters Definition – Cooperative Mode ....................................................... 45 Table 3–24. RJ-45 Wiring Details – Cooperative Mode............................................................... 49 Table 3–25. Configuration Pin Summary – Cooperative Mode.................................................... 50 Table 3–26. System Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative Mode ................................................... 51 Table 3–27. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative Mode.................................................. 52 Table 3–28. Receive Path Parts Requirements – Cooperative Mode ......................................... 54 Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details.................................. 54 Table 3–30. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details ............................. 57 Table 3–31. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details............................. 59 Table 3–32. Coax Cable Losses – Multi-Channel........................................................................ 60 Table 3–33. RF Parameters Definition – Multi-Channel .............................................................. 62 Table 3–34. WOW Pin Wiring Table – Multi-Channel.................................................................. 63 Table 3–35. RJ-45 Wiring Details – Multi-Channel ...................................................................... 68 Table 3–36. Configuration Pin Summary – Multi-Channel........................................................... 69 Table 3–37. System Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-Channel .......................................................... 69 Page TC–12 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–38. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-Channel......................................................... 71 Table 3–39. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Top Plug Connections ............. 73 Table 3–40. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration, ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connections........ 75 Table 3–41. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connections........ 77 Table 3–42. HSD-X Top Plug Connections ................................................................................. 78 Table 3–43. HSD-X Middle Plug Connections– Multi-Channel.................................................... 80 Table 3–44. HSD-X Bottom Plug – Multi-Channel ....................................................................... 81 Table 3–45. HSD-X I/O Data Strapping– Multi-Channel.............................................................. 81 Table 3–46. Inter-LRU RF Connection Considerations for Attenuators– Multi-Channel.............. 82 Table 4–1. List of Required Test Equipment ................................................................................. 2 Table 4–2. List of Optional Test Equipment................................................................................... 3 Table 4–3. Remote Maintenance Port Access Cabling (HSD) ...................................................... 4 Table 4–4. Front-Panel Maintenance Port Access Cabling (HSD) ................................................ 5 Table 4–5. HSD-X Maintenance Port Pin Descriptions ................................................................. 5 Table 4–6. Terminal Connection Settings...................................................................................... 7 Table 4–7. Menu 1 Item Descriptions .......................................................................................... 13 Table 4–8. Menu 2 Item Descriptions .......................................................................................... 14 Table 4–9. Menu 3 Item Descriptions .......................................................................................... 16 Table 4–10. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 4.5).......................... 20 Table 4–11. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 7.0).......................... 22 Table 4–12. Menu 4 Item Descriptions ........................................................................................ 25 Table 4–13. Menu 10 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 26 Table 4–14. Menu 13 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 28 Table 4–15. Menu 14 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 28 Table 4–16. Menu 15 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 29 Table 4–17. Menu 15 Item Descriptions ...................................................................................... 30 Table 4–18. Report 23 Item Descriptions .................................................................................... 34 Table 4–19. Report information ................................................................................................... 35 Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions ............................................................................................. 37 Table 4–21. Test Setup Procedure .............................................................................................. 49 Table 4–22. HSD Mechanical Verification ................................................................................... 50 Table 4–23. HSD Electrical Verification ....................................................................................... 51 Table 4–24. HSD Electrical Verification ....................................................................................... 51 Table 4–25. Honeywell Combined Mode Basic Fault Checks ..................................................... 66 Table 4–26. Multi-Channel Basic Fault Checks ........................................................................... 70 Page TC–13 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation......................................................................... 94 Table 4–28. Modification History................................................................................................ 105 Page TC–14 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal INTRODUCTION 1. General This manual provides all the specifications, principles of operation, and information necessary to install an HSD High-Speed-Data SATCOM Transceiver made by EMS Technologies in all supported operational modes and configurations. The information needed to install HSD-X High-Speed-Data SATCOM Transceiver Extensions in Multi-Channel configurations with Stand-Alone HSD-128 units is also provided in this document. The information provided is presented in the following sections: "System Description" on page 1-1, "System Operation" on page 2-1, "Installation" on page 3-1, "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and "Maintenance and Repair" on page 5-1. The Appendices provide additional reference information. An Illustrated Parts List is not included with this manual. Only qualified avionics personnel, knowledgeable in the technical and safety issues related to the installation of aircraft communications equipment, should perform the installation procedures provided in this manual. This manual includes general installation guidelines only; it is not intended to provide specific procedures for every type of installation. If necessary, the information in this manual may be revised. Before attempting the installation procedures presented in this manual, verify that you have a complete and up-to-date release of this document. Depending on the version of software and configuration mode of installation of the HSD transceiver, the “actual” or “live” system messages such as dialog boxes and screen displays, may differ slightly from the example illustrations presented and described in this manual. Page TC–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. Abbreviations and Acronyms ACSE Access Control and Signalling Equipment ACU Antenna Control Unit (also known as BSU or Driver) AERO Aeronautical AMBE® Advanced Multiband Excited Coding AWG American Wire Gauge BRI Basic Rate ISDN b/s Bits per second BSU Beam Steering Unit (also known as ACU or Driver) CCW Counter Clockwise CMT Commissioning Maintenance Terminal (Honeywell) CW Clockwise DLNA Diplexer/Low-Noise Amplifier EMI Electromagnetic Interference GND Ground HGA High Gain Antenna HPA High Power Amplifier HSD High-speed Data Terminal HSD-X High-Speed-Data SATCOM Transceiver Extension Hz Hertz ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization ICD Interconnect Drawing INS Inertial Navigational System I/O Input/Output IRS Inertial Reference System ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network kbps Kilobits per Second LES Land Earth Station LRU Line Replaceable Unit LSV Low Speed Voice Mbps Megabit per second MCDU Multifunction Control Display Unit MCU Modular Concept Unit MES Mobile Earth Station MPDS Mobile Packet Data Services Page TC–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal ms Millisecond MSN Multiple Subscriber Number NAT Network Address Translation OCXO Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer O&I Outline and Installation Drawing PC Personal Computer (or Laptop) PN Part Number PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet REA Responsible Engineering Authority RF Radio Frequency RFI Radio Frequency Interference RFU Radio Frequency Unit rms root mean square Rtn Return Rx Receive satcom Satellite Communications SCPC Single Channel per Carrier SDI Source/Destination Identification SDU Satellite Data Unit SPID Service Profile Identifier (ISDN) STBD Starboard STE Secure Terminal Equipment STU Secure Telephone Unit T/A Terminal Adapter Tx Transmit WOW Weight on Wheels Page TC–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Advisories WARNING: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST OBEY STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, SUCH AS WEARING SAFETY GLASSES, TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY WHILE INSTALLING OR PERFORMING SERVICE ON THIS UNIT. WARNING: ASSOCIATED SATCOM EQUIPMENT RADIATES HIGH FREQUENCY RADIATION AND POSES A RADIATION HAZARD OF 1.6 GHZ. SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST EXERCISE CARE TO KEEP CLEAR OF THE ANTENNA’S BEAM WHILE PERFORMING OPERATIONAL TESTS OR INSTALLATION VERIFICATION PROCEDURES. DO NOT APPROACH WITHIN 8 FEET (2.5 METRES) OF THE ANTENNA DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION). DURING ANTENNA OPERATION (TRANSMISSION), ENSURE MINIMUM EXPOSURE OF ANY REFLECTED, SCATTERED, OR DIRECT BEAMS TO ALL PERSONNEL. WARNING: TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING ANY UNIT FROM WIRING. DISCONNECTING THE UNIT WITHOUT TURNING POWER OFF MAY CAUSE VOLTAGE TRANSIENTS THAT CAN DAMAGE THE UNIT. CAUTION: THIS EQUIPMENT INCLUDES ITEMS THAT ARE ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE (ESDS) DEVICES. ESDS DEVICES ARE SUBJECT TO DAMAGE BY EXCESSIVE LEVELS OF VOLTAGE AND/OR CURRENT. THE LOW-ENERGY SOURCE THAT MOST COMMONLY DESTROYS ESDS DEVICES IS THE HUMAN BODY WHICH, IN CONJUNCTION WITH NONCONDUCTIVE GARMENTS AND FLOOR COVERINGS, GENERATES AND RETAINS STATIC ELECTRICITY. TO ADEQUATELY PROTECT ESDS DEVICES, THE DEVICE AND EVERYTHING THAT CONTACTS IT MUST BE BROUGHT TO GROUND POTENTIAL BY PROVIDING A CONDUCTIVE SURFACE AND DISCHARGE PATHS. USE STANDARD INDUSTRY PRECAUTIONS TO KEEP RISK OF DAMAGE TO A MINIMUM WHEN TOUCHING, REMOVING, OR SERVICING THE EQUIPMENT. Page TC–4 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. Illustration of Equipment Covered Figure TC–1. HSD-128 Terminal Page TC–5 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure TC–2. HSD-X SATCOM High-Speed-Data Transceiver Extension Page TC–6 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. Purpose of Equipment The HSD is a scalable, high-speed-data, satellite communications terminal, which interfaces with an ARINC 741-compatible antenna subsystem to provide a high-speed data communication link with the Inmarsat satellite communication network. HSD transceivers are available in single and dual channel models which can be installed in the following modes of operation: Stand-Alone Mode, Combined/Selective Mode, and Cooperative Mode. In Stand-Alone Mode HSD installations, the addition of HSD-X extension transceivers expands the channel capacity by providing one additional voice or 64 kbps data channel—per HSD-X to provide a Multi-Channel, high-speed data communication link with the Inmarsat satellite communication network. Table 1–1 shows the services that are supported by each HSD terminal. Table 1–1. Supported Services Matrix for HSD-128, HSD-64, and HSD-X Supported Services and Functionality HSD-128 (Stand-Alone, Multi-Channel) HSD-64/HSD-128 (Combined/Selective, Cooperative) Inmarsat Swift64 ISDN YES (64 kbps UDI, 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz audio) YES MPDS HSD-X (Multi-Channel HSD) YES Over RS-232 YES (with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006) YES (with service YES bulletin 1110-SB-0006) Over Ethernet YES (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006, 1110-SB-0004) YES YES (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006, 1110-SB-0004) AMBE® Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps) YES NO YES STU III (Encryption) YES (Full ISDN) YES (Full ISDN) YES (Full ISDN) AMBE® STU YES (with channel NO (Selective – YES) card software version 6.0 (C41) or later) YES (with channel card software version 6.0 (C41) or later) Page 1–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–1. Supported Services Matrix for HSD-128, HSD-64, and HSD-X Supported Services and Functionality HSD-128 (Stand-Alone, Multi-Channel) HSD-64/HSD-128 (Combined/Selective, Cooperative) Ethernet Interface (1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface) YES (with service YES (with service bulletin 1110-SB-0006 bulletin 1110-SB-0006 and and 1110-SB-0004) 1110-SB-0004) Bonding Functionality YES Page 1–2 18 September 2007 HSD-X (Multi-Channel HSD) YES NO - Not supported in NO - Not supported single-channel units in single-channel and Cooperative Mode units SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. Equipment Covered A. Hardware Description Table 1–2 provides a comparison of the Hardware variants of HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Table 1–3 lists and describes all models of HSD transceivers covered in this manual. Table 1–2. HSD Transceiver Variants Model Assembly Channel PN Card(s) HSD-128 1110-A-0001 2 HSD-128 1110-A-0060 2 HSD-128 1110-A-0001 2 Operational Modes/ Configurations Interconnection Voltage Diagram (nominal) Stand-Alone 1110-B-0019 Multi-Channel Configuration (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0012 accomplished) 1110-B-0419 Stand-Alone 1110-B-0019 Multi-Channel Configuration (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0012 accomplished) 1110-B-0419 Selective/Honeywell 1110-B-0081 Combined (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0005 accomplished) 28 V dc Power (nom/ max) 275/370 W 115 V ac/ 275/385 W 400 Hz 28 V dc 325/370 W Collins Co-operative 1110-B-0156 HSD-128 1110-A-0060 2 Selective/Honeywell 1110-B-0081 Combined (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0005 accomplished) 115 V ac/ 325/385 W 400 Hz Collins Co-operative 1110-B-0156 HSD-128 1110-A-0150 2 Stand-Alone 1110-B-0019 Collins Co-operative 1110-B-0156 115 V ac/ 325/385 W 400 Hz Selective/Honeywell 1110-B-0081 Combined Multi-Channel Configuration 1110-B-0419 Page 1–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–2. HSD Transceiver Variants Assembly Channel PN Card(s) Model HSD-128 1110-A-0160 2 Operational Modes/ Configurations Stand Alone Interconnection Voltage Diagram (nominal) 1110-B-0081 Power (nom/ max) 28 V dc 275/370 W 28 V dc 275/370 W Collins Co-operative 1110-B-0156 Selective/Honeywell 1110-B-0081 Combined Multi-Channel Configuration HSD-64 1110-A-0080 1 1110-B-0419 Selective/Honeywell 1110-B-0081 Combined (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0005 accomplished) Collins Co-operative 1110-B-0156 HSD-64 1110-A-0070 1 Selective/Honeywell 1110-B-0081 Combined (with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0005 accomplished) 115 V ac/ 275/385 W 400 Hz Collins Co-operative 1110-B-0156 HSD-X 1110-A-0401 1 Multi-Channel Extension Configuration with HSD-128 Transceiver 1110-B-0419 115 V ac/ 30/40 W 400 Hz Table 1–3. Equipment Covered Model HSD-128 Description PN 1110-A-0001 HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing two channel cards, a control processor, a high power amplifier, and a +28 V dc power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network. HSD-128 PN 1110-A-0060 HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing two channel cards, a control processor, a high power amplifier, and a 115 V ac, 400 hertz (Hz) power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network. Page 1–4 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–3. Equipment Covered Model HSD-128 Description PN 1110-A-0150 HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing two channel cards, a control processor, a Data I/O Type 2 card, a high power amplifier, and a 115 V ac, 400 hertz (Hz) power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network. Supports Ethernet connections. HSD-128 PN 1110-A-0160 HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing two channel cards, a control processor, a Data I/O Type 2 card, a high power amplifier, and a a +28 V dc power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network. Supports Ethernet connections. HSD-64 PN 1110-A-0070 HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing one channel card, a control processor, a high power amplifier, and a 115 V ac, 400 hertz (Hz) power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network. HSD-64 PN 1110-A-0080 HSD High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver: High-speed data terminal containing one channel card, a control processor, a high power amplifier, and a +28 V dc power supply. Operates with an Aero H/H+ (ARINC 741 compatible) antenna subsystem to provide circuit (Swift64 Mobile ISDN), packet-switched HSD (Swift64 MPDS), and Mini-M AMBE services over the Inmarsat satellite communications network. HSD-X PN 1110-A-0401 The HSD-X High-speed Data SATCOM Transceiver Extension contains a single channel card, a High Stability Reference, an Output Amplifier, a Data Processor module, and a 115 V ac 400 hertz (Hz) power supply. It operates in conjunction with an HSD-128 transceiver to provide Inmarsat Swift64 services and Mini-M AMBE voice services. This transceiver supports Multi-Channel HSD configurations by adding additional channels to HSD-128 systems. B. Software Description This section describes the software specifications and operational software components of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. It also describes the software requirements and compatibility issues for each mode of operation. (1) Software Specifications The operating software of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers meets with RTCA/DO-178B Level E requirements. Page 1–5 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (2) Operational Software Part Numbers Table 1–4 provides a list of software part numbers for the HSD transceiver. Table 1– 5 provides a list of software part numbers for the HSD-X transceiver. Table 1–4. HSD Operational Software EMS SATCOM Part Number Description LI-1110-10136 HSD-64/128 Software Configuration 1110-A-0082 Aero Channel Card Software 1110-A-0048 Assembly Firmware Control Processor 1110-A-0109 Firmware HPA 28 V dc 1110-A-0110 Firmware HPA 115 V ac 1110-A-0129 Firmware HPA 28 V dc Revised Board 1110-A 0141 Firmware HPA 115 V ac Revised Board 1110-A-0100 HSD Data I/O Firmware Assembly (Only applies to units with Data I/O Card Type 2 installed) Table 1–5. HSD-X Operational Software EMS SATCOM Part Number Description LI-1110-10181 HSD-X Software Configuration 1110-A-0082 Aero Channel Card Software 1110-A-0420 Assembly Firmware Control Processor 1110-A-0115 HSD-X Data I/O Firmware 1110-A-0085 M4 Combined Pic and Bootloader (3) Operational Mode Software Requirements This section describes the software requirements and compatibility issues for each mode of operation, including Multi-Channel configurations. (a) Stand-Alone Mode For Stand-Alone Mode installations, the minimum and recommended requirements for software are shown in Table 1–6. Table 1–6. Stand-Alone Mode Minimum Software Requirements Unit Part Number Software PN Software Type Minimum Recommended Software Software Req’t HSD-128 1110-A-0001 1110-A-0048 Control 4.1 Processor 1110-A-0060 1110-A-0150 1110-A-0082 Channel Card 1110-A-0160 Page 1–6 18 September 2007 C24 7.5 (or later) C41 (or later) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (b) Combined Mode For Combined Mode installations, the minimum requirement for HSD Control-Processor software is version 5.4 (or later) to use ARINC 429 data from the Honeywell SDU. Version 5.4, Control-Card software is available via HSD Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0012. The minimum requirements and recommendations for software are shown in Table 1–7. Table 1–7. Combined Mode Recommended Software Requirements Unit Part Number Software PN Minimum Software Recommended Software Type Software Req’t HSD-128 1110-A-0001 1110-A-0048 Control 5.7 Processor 1110-A-0060 1110-A-0150 1110-A-0082 Channel Card 1110-A-0160 (c) C35 7.5 (or later) C41 (or later) Cooperative Mode For Cooperative Mode installations, the minimum requirements and recommendations for software are shown in Table 1–8. Table 1–8. Cooperative Mode Recommended Software Requirements Unit Part Number Software PN Minimum Software Recommended Software Type Software Req’t HSD-128 1110-A-0001 1110-A-0048 Control 5.7 Processor 1110-A-0060 1110-A-0150 1110-A-0082 Channel Card 1110-A-0160 C35 7.5 (or later) C41 (or later) (d) Selective Mode Selective Mode is a non-standard installation and it is not a recommended mode of operation. Selective Mode has been superseded by Combined Mode operation for MCS series SATCOM and with Cooperative Mode operation for SAT-906 series SATCOM. It is recommended that all systems operating in Selective Mode are upgraded to support Combined or Cooperative Mode as applicable. For Selective Mode installations, the minimum requirements and recommendations for software are shown in Table 1–9. Page 1–7 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–9. Selective Mode Minimum Software Requirements Unit Part Number Software PN Minimum Software Recommended Software Type Software Req’t HSD-128 1110-A-0001 1110-A-0048 Control 5.7 Processor 1110-A-0060 1110-A-0150 1110-A-0082 Channel Card 1110-A-0160 C35 7.5 (or later) C41 (or later) (e) Multi-Channel Configurations In a Multi-Channel configuration, the minimum requirement for HSD-128 Control Processor software is version 7.0. Version 7.0, Control Processor software is available via HSD Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0012. HSD-X Transceiver Extensions require Control Processor software version 6.0. In Multi-Channel configurations, both the HSD-128 and the HSD-X units must have the same Channel Card and Data I/O software versions installed. When upgrading software in either the HSD-128 or HSD-X, verify that the software version is compatible for operation in Multi-Channel systems as indicated in the applicable service bulletin. The minimum requirements and recommendations for software are shown in Table 1–10. Table 1–10. Multi-Channel Configuration Recommended Software Requirements Unit Part Number Software PN Minimum Software Recommended Software Type Software Req’t 7.0 HSD-128 1110-A-0001 1110-A-0048 Control Processor 1110-A-0060 1110-A-0150 1110-A-0082 Channel Card 1110-A-0160 HSD-X 6.0 (C41) 1110-A-0401 1110-A-0420 Control 6.0 Processor 7.5 (or later) 6.0 (C41) (or later) 6.0 (or later) 1110-A-0082 Channel Card 6.0 (C41) 6.0 (C41) (or later) 1110-A-0240 Data I/O Software 115 Superceded by 1110-A-0115 1110-A-0115 Data I/O HSD-X 117 117 (4) Software Version Description This section provides a brief description of the deltas between versions of operational software. Table 1–11 provides a matrix of software versions, applicable service bulletins, compliance requirements, and a brief description of the software deltas. Page 1–8 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–12 provides a service bulletin matrix to list the applicability of all service bulletins released against the HSD and HSD-X units as of the release date of this manual. Table 1–11. Description of Control Processor Software Changes Control Processor Software Version Applicable Service Bulletin Compliance Requirements Description of Change 4.4 1110-SB-0001 Control card release with mandatory channel card change from C24 to C30 Ensures channel card is powered down for 5 seconds after a fatal error. Channel card software change from C24 to C30 4.5 1110-SB-0003 Mandatory for all units operating in Cooperative Mode installs with Collins SAT-906 systems. Resolves the problem occurring during the power up sequence, the SAT-906 system reports error 0100, 1000, and 0800, which results in the deactivation of the HSD channel cards. 4.6 N/A N/A Adds menu command to specify manual satellite longitude. Ensures that manually specified ocean regions are maintained. This version does not support Cooperative Mode (with SAT-906). 5.4 1110-SB-0005 Mandatory for units installed in Combined Mode with Honeywell Aero H Satcom systems. Optional for all other units. Upgrades the hardware for Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM) to include a RF detector and a variable attenuator on the Aero H path of the pre-HPA combiner and allows the reading and control of this attenuator through a serial connection to the combiner. This version does not support Cooperative Mode (with SAT-906). Page 1–9 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–11. Description of Control Processor Software Changes Control Processor Software Version Applicable Service Bulletin Compliance Requirements Description of Change 5.7 1110-SB-0011 Recommended for all units operating in Cooperative Mode with Collins Sat-906 systems, optional for all other units. Upgrades the Channel Card software to version C35 to fix Cooperative Mode bug in Channel Card software version C30. Upgrades software to recognize Cooperative Mode System Config hardware strapping. 6.5 1110-SB-0007 Generic release suitable for all modes of HSD operation Upgrades the HSD-128 Control Processor software to version 6.5. This version adds the Multi-Channel capability to the HSD-128 software to support HSD-128 units integration with external HSD-X channels (PN 1110-A-0401). Compatible with HSD-X version 6.0 firmware. Page 1–10 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–11. Description of Control Processor Software Changes Control Processor Software Version 7.0 Applicable Service Bulletin Compliance Requirements 1110-SB-0012 Recommended for units operating in multi-channel configurations with HSD transceivers. Optional for all other units and system modes. Description of Change Upgrades the channel card software to version C41 (6.0) which supports enhanced HSD functionality in all modes of operation, (including Multi-Channel configurations and AMBE STU capability). In Cooperative Mode systems, MPDS is not supported with this version of software. Upgrades the control processor software to version 7.0, which enhances all modes of operation. Selective Mode units operating Category A Inmarsat terminals may experience GPS faults when operating this version of software. Contact EMS SATCOM Product Support for details. 7.5 1110-SB-0015 Highly recommended for units operation in Cooperative Mode with Rockwell Collins SAT-906 systems. Optional for Stand-Alone units and all other operational modes. HSD Control Processor software version 7.5 includes fixes specific to Cooperative Mode operation problems and enhances unit operation. Page 1–11 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal PN 1110-A-0401 PN 1110-A-0160 PN 1110-A-0150 PN 1110-A-0080 PN 1110-A-0070 PN 1110-A-0060 Service Bulletin PN 1110-A-0001 Table 1–12. Service Bulletin Matrix Description 1110-SB-0001 X Software upgrade to accommodate Inmarsat system changes 1110-SB-0002 X HPA Mute and ARINC 429 Driver Modifications 1110-SB-0003 1110-SB-0004 X Data I/O Type 2 upgrade option 1110-SB-0005 X Hardware modification and software upgrade for Combined Mode operation 1110-SB-0006 X Software upgrade to support MPDS service (Version C35) 1110-SB-0007 X Upgrade to HPA software and Control Processor software to fix Cooperative Mode SAT-906 system reporting errors (Version 4.5) Software upgrade for Multi-Channel (Version 6.5) 1110-SB-0008 N/A 1110-SB-0009 N/A 1110-SB-0010 Optional hardware upgrade to dual channel transceiver and support for STU III and Mini-M Voice (Version C41) 1110-SB-0011 X Software upgrade for Cooperative Mode 1110-SB-0012 X Software upgrade to add AMBE STU support and enhances performance of all modes of operation (Version 7.0) 1110-SB-0013 X Page 1–12 18 September 2007 Addition of a software identification label to all units SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal PN 1110-A-0160 PN 1110-A-0401 PN 1110-A-0150 PN 1110-A-0080 PN 1110-A-0070 PN 1110-A-0060 1110-SB-0014 X Upgrades Data I/O Type 2 software to fix susceptibility to certain malformed traffic, which caused PPPoE sessions to “hang-up” leaving the call connected 1110-SB-0015 X Upgrades control processor software to enhance Cooperative Mode operation (Version 7.5) Service Bulletin PN 1110-A-0001 Table 1–12. Service Bulletin Matrix Description 1110-SB-0401 Software upgrade to add AMBE STU capability, enhance system operation, including with MPDS 1110-SB-0402 Addition of a software identification label to all units 1110-SB-0403 Upgrades Data I/O Type software to fix susceptibility to certain malformed traffic, which caused PPPoE sessions to “hang-up” leaving the call connected Page 1–13 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Equipment Description This section describes the physical and environmental specifications of the equipment. A. Applicable Documents • High speed data terminal Setup Guide, EMS SATCOM PN MN-1110-10048 • ARINC 741. ARINC Report 413A – Guidance for Aircraft Electrical Power Utilization and Transient Protection, Attachment 3-2, Wire Shielding and Grounding Requirements and Appendix 7 B. Reference Documents • HSD-64/128 Software Control Document, EMS SATCOM PN LI-1110-10136 • HSD-X Software Control Document, EMS SATCOM PN LI-1110-10181 C. Equipment Specifications This section provides the equipment specifications for the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Table 1–13 lists the physical and equipment specifications for the HSD transceiver. Table 1–14 lists the RTCA/DO-160D environmental characteristics and specifications for the HSD transceiver. Table 1–15 lists the physical and equipment specifications for the HSD-X transceiver. Table 1–16 lists the RTCA/DO-160D environmental characteristics and specifications for the HSD-X transceiver. Table 1–13. HSD Equipment Characteristics and Specifications CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION Certification/related documents ARINC characteristics 600-12, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces, December 12, 1998 Appendix 10 of the ARINC 704-7 RTCA documents RTCA/DO-160D, Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment, July 29, 1997 HSD Software RTCA/DO-178B Level E Physical Size Height 19.93 cm (7.85 in) Width 25.91 cm (10.20 in) Length 36.45 cm (14.58 in) Weight 13 Kg (28.7 lbs) Mounting information 8 MCU Tray (per ARINC 600, 8 MCU LRU) Maintenance requirements No scheduled maintenance is required Electrical specifications Page 1–14 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–13. HSD Equipment Characteristics and Specifications CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION HSD-128 dc input power 1110-A-0001, 1110-A-0160 Voltage Minimum: 22 V dc Typical: 27.5 V dc Maximum: 30.3 V dc Power dissipation (Stand-Alone) Minimum: 275 W Maximum: 370 W Power dissipation Minimum: 325 W (Selective, Combined, and Maximum: 370 W Cooperative) HSD-128 ac input power 1110-A-0060, 1110-A-0150 Voltage Minimum: 100 V rms Typical: 115 V rms Maximum: 122 V rms Power dissipation (Stand-Alone) Minimum: 275 W Maximum: 385 W Power dissipation Minimum: 325 W (Selective, Combined, and Maximum: 385 W Cooperative) Frequency Minimum: 360 Hz (Typical: 400 Hz) Maximum: 440 Hz HSD-64 dc input power 1110-A-0080 Voltage Minimum 22 V dc (Typical 27.5 V dc) Maximum 30.3 V dc Power dissipation Minimum: 275 W Maximum: 370 W HSD-64 ac input power 1110-A-0070 Voltage Minimum 100 V rms (Typical 115 V rms) Maximum 122 V rms Power dissipation Minimum: 275 W Maximum: 385 W Frequency Minimum: 360 Hz (Typical: 400 Hz) Maximum: 440 Hz Frequency band Tx: 1626.5 to 1660.5 MHz Rx: 1525.0 to 1559.0 MHz Power requirements HSD PN 1110-A-0001, 1110-A-0080, 1110-A-0160 + 28 V dc nominal @ 13.5A Page 1–15 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–13. HSD Equipment Characteristics and Specifications CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION PN 1110-A-0060, 1110-A-0070, 1110-A-0150 115 V ac, 400 Hz (nominal) @5A Wire gage dc power: 12 American Wire Gauge (AWG) ac power: 20 AWG (hot lead), 12 AWG (cold lead) Signals: Unless otherwise specified, use 22 AWG for all signal wires Ground requirements ARINC 741 Heating and cooling requirements Cooling air ARINC 600 Flow rate 175 lbs/hr Pressure drop 0.05”, ± 0.025” H2O Output frequency range (Transmit) Minimum: 1626.5 MHz Maximum: 1660.5 MHz Input frequency range (Receive) Minimum: 1530 MHz Maximum: 1559 MHz Receive input impedance 50 ohms Transmit output impedance 50 ohms VSWR 2:1 maximum Maximum Output Power 18 dBW Table 1–14. HSD RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Characteristics CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION Environmental Temp and altitude In-flight loss of cooling 115 V ac units: Category A1, F2 V 28 V dc units: Category A1 F2 W Temperature variation Category B (± 5°C/minimum) Humidity Category A (95%, 48 hours) Shock Category B (6g/20g, 11ms) Vibration Category SB (1.48grms) Explosion proofness Category E Waterproofness Category X (not applicable) Fluids susceptibility Category X (not applicable) Sand and dust Category X (not applicable) Fungus resistance Category F Salt spray Category X (not applicable) Magnetic effect 115 V ac units: Category Z (< 1.0m) 28 V dc units: Category A (<1.0m) Power input Categoriy A Page 1–16 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–14. HSD RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Characteristics CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION Voltage spike 115 V ac units: Category A 28 V dc units: Category A Audio frequency susceptibility 115 V ac units: Category A 28 V dc units: not tested Induced signal susceptibility 115 V ac units: Category Z 28 V dc units: not tested RF susceptibility 115 V ac units: Category RR 28 V dc units: not tested Emission of RF Energy 115 V ac units: Category B 28 V dc units: Category B Lightning Direct Effects Category X (not applicable) Icing Category X (not applicable) Table 1–15. HSD-X Transceiver Specifications CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION Certification/related documents ARINC characteristics 600-12, Air Transport Avionics Equipment Interfaces, December 12, 1998 Appendix 10 of the ARINC 704-7 RTCA documents RTCA/DO-160D, Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment, July 29, 1997 HSD-X Software RTCA/DO-178B Level E Physical Size 2 MCU ARINC 600-10 Form Factor Weight 8.8 lbs maximum Cooling air Unit capable of continuous duty cycle operation, with or without forced air-cooling provided, as per ARINC 600 specifications. Refer to 1110-E-0401. (See "Installation" on page 3-1.) Mounting Information As per ARINC 600 specifications. Refer to 1110-E-0401. (See "Installation" on page 3-1.) Maintenance Requirements No maintenance requirements Electrical Power Dissipation 34 Watts Input Power 115 V ac, 400 Hz, 75 va Input frequency range 1530.0 to 1559.0 MHz Output frequency range 1626.5 to 1660.5 MHz Receiver input impedance 50 ohms Page 1–17 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–15. HSD-X Transceiver Specifications CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION Transceiver output impedance 50 ohms VSWR 2:1 maximum Input level operational Input level no damage -107 dBm to -47 dBm +10 dBm External (Digital) Interfaces Crosstalk Bus ARINC 429 high-speed (100 kbps) data bus Maintenance Port RS-232 Data loader Front and Rear Connector RS-232 serial bus supporting 57.6 kbps data load capacity ISDN User Interface 64 kbps ISDN Euro input and output Table 1–16. HSD-X RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Specifications CHARACTERISTIC Temperature and Altitude SPECIFICATION Categories: A4 (without cooling air)/ C4 (with cooling air) Low operating temperature -40 °C (A4), -40 °C (C4) High operating temperature +55 °C (A4), +70 °C (C4) Altitude Maximum operating altitude: 15,000 ft (A4)/55,000 ft (C4) Loss of cooling Category Y Temperature Variation Category B Humidity Category A Shock Category B Vibration Category SB Explosion Proofness Category E Waterproofness Category X Fluids Susceptibility Category X Sand and Dust Category X Fungus Resistance Category F Salt Spray Category X Magnetic Effect Category Z Power Input Category A Voltage Spike Category A Audio Frequency Category A Induced Signal Category C RF Susceptibility Category RR Page 1–18 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 1–16. HSD-X RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Specifications CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION Emission of RF Energy Category M Lightning Induced Transient Susceptibility Category A3E3 Lightning Direct Effects Category X Icing Category X Electrostatic Discharge Category A D. Mechanical Description This section describes the mechanical characteristics of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. (1) HSD Transceiver The HSD transceiver is an 8-MCU sized unit with mounting requirements according to the ARINC 600 specification. The front panel has one, socket D-Type size B (25 contacts) maintenance port connector (under protective cover) for data loading and monitoring of the unit. Two front-panel LEDs indicate unit status. The rear connector complies with ARINC 600, shell size 2 and has three inserts: upper, middle, and bottom. The upper and middle inserts each have one #1 coax contact and seventy, 22-gauge signal contacts. The bottom insert connector has contact with only positions 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, and 12. The rear panel has three polarization points. For detailed wiring information, refer to the interconnection diagrams and contact assignments for each installation mode presented in "Installation" on page 3-1 as noted below: Table 1–17. HSD Installation Mode Drawing Reference Matrix Installation Mode Stand-Alone Combined/Selective Cooperative Stand-Alone HSD in Multi-Channel Configuration Installation Section Figure Figure Description Figure 3–29 System Interconnect Figure 3–30 Contact Assignments Figure 3–31 System Interconnect Figure 3–32 Contact Assignments Figure 3–33 System Interconnect Figure 3–34 Contact Assignments Figure 3–35 and Figure 3–36 System Interconnect Figure 3–37 and Figure 3–38 Contact Assignments (2) HSD-X Transceiver The HSD-X is a 2-MCU sized unit with mounting requirements according to the ARINC 600 specification. The front panel has one, female, micro-D type connector for data loading and monitoring of the unit. Three front panel LEDs illuminate to indicate unit functionality as described in detail in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. Page 1–19 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The rear connector complies with ARINC 600, shell size 1. The connector top and middle cavities have 60 number 22 interconnects, while the bottom cavity has two number 16 interconnects, one number 12 interconnect, and two RF interconnects. E. Electrical Description This section describes the external electrical interfaces of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. General system block diagrams of the avionics and antenna subsystem are presented in Figure 1–10, Figure 1–11, Figure 1–12, and Figure 1–13. "Installation" on page 3-1 describes all ARNC 600 connector contact assignments and physical details, including part numbers, insert descriptions, and polarization keying. The loading/gradient specifications for all HSD installation modes, including Stand-Alone Mode, Multi-Channel configurations with HSD-X transceivers, are provided in table format in "Installation" on page 3-1. These tables list all of the ARINC Top, Middle, and Bottom Plug pin designations as well as provide installation connection details. (1) General The HSD contains a communications switch (SW) that supports Inmarsat Swift64 Mobile ISDN and MPDS service within an 8-MCU assembly built in accordance to ARINC 600 specifications. The HSD-X contains a communications switch (SW) that supports Inmarsat Swift64 Mobile ISDN and MPDS service within a 2-MCU assembly built in accordance to ARINC 600 specifications. (a) Stand-Alone Mode The HSD L-Band Rx/Tx input and outputs interface directly with the DLNA. The HSD uses the ARINC 429 multi-control bus to interface with the ACU/BSU to control the RF antenna and obtain antenna-subsystem status information. The HSD receives the required navigational data, provided by the aircraft Inertial Navigational System (INS), from the ARINC 429 IRS bus. The aircraft supplies either 28 V dc or 115 V 400 Hz power to the HSD. (b) Non-Stand-Alone Modes (Cooperative, Combined, Selective) The HSD L-band Rx/Tx interface combiners are shared with those of the SATCOM H/H+ system via splitters after the DLNA and before the high power amplifier (HPA). The Aero H/H+ system, that the HSD is installed with, controls the antenna subsystem and the RF transmit signal attenuation in the High-Gain Antenna HPA of the HSD through the SDU multi-control ARINC 429 bus. The aircraft supplies either 28 V dc or 115 V 400 Hz power to the HSD. (c) Multi-Channel Configurations with HSD-X Transceivers The HSD Multi-Channel configuration combines a dual-channel, Stand-Alone Mode, HSD-128 Transceiver with one or more single-channel HSD-X Transceivers to add additional channels to the system. Each channel provides an ISDN 64 kbps connection that can be used for voice or data services. The two channels in the HSD-128 can be internally bonded to provide a 128 kbps ISDN data connection. Externally, all four channels shown in Multi-Channel System Block Diagram on page 40 can be combined to provide a single 256 kbps capability with the help of a router, Ethernet hub, or Terminal Adapter. Page 1–20 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The HSD-128 is the master of the system; it controls the overall operation of the Multi-Channel HSD configuration. It keeps track of time and allocated power and may command the HSD-X units to terminate calls under certain conditions, such as an ocean region change. The HSD-X units are wired to the HSD-128 HPA and therefore compete equally for HPA power allocation. The transmit signal of each channel is fed through combiners/attenuators combinations to the HPA located in the HSD and ultimately to the antenna. Conversely, the receive signal from the antenna goes through a series of splitters on its way to each channel. On power-up, HSD-X channels go through an initialization process that identifies and communicates the number of HSD-X channels and their position in the system chain back to the HSD-128 master. The block diagram in Figure 1–10 illustrates the system function of the HSD-128, two HSD-Xs, and the antenna system. (2) Pin and Connector Descriptions Detailed pin and connector descriptions for both HSD and HSD-X transceivers are provided for all installation modes and configurations in "Installation" on page 3-1. F. System Interface Descriptions This section briefly describes the external HSD and HSD-X system interfaces. The system interfaces are those required to control, monitor, maintain, and supplement the unit’s functionality. "Installation" on page 3-1 provides a detailed description of interface connections. (1) HSD System Interfaces This section describes the system interfaces of HSD transceivers. Detailed information on the splitter and combiner specifications and losses, as well as cabling notes and system interconnections for all operational modes for HSD transceivers are provided in "Installation" on page 3-1. (a) HSD Source Destination Identification (SDI) 1. Stand-Alone Mode and Multi-Channel Configuration Source/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided to the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications. 2. Non-Stand-Alone Mode Source/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided to the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications. (b) HSD Forward and Return Address IDs The HSD uses two 24-bit IDs called “Forward Link Pairs” (FRLPs): a Forward ID (Fwd ID) and a Return (Rtn) ID per pair. The HSD reads the Fwd ID and performs a look-up for the Rtn ID. For security reasons, each assembly contains an encrypted look-up table with the whole addressing space assigned to the product by Inmarsat. To minimize the risk of unauthorized use of its contents, the table is not accessible to the user. Page 1–21 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The 24-bit Fwd ID strap pins, available on the ARINC 600 connector, form part of the Inmarsat serial number (ISN). The ISN consists of the type approval number and the Fwd ID address. Each FRLP is associated with Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMN), which are the numbers that a user dials from the ground to reach the terminal on an aircraft. There is a unique IMN for each of the service types (e.g. data, voice, Fax). (c) HSD WOW Pin Wiring Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) discretes indicate when an aircraft is on the ground and are used for flight data-logging purposes. Note 40 of ARINC 741 defines the WOW pins. (d) HSD IRS ARINC 429 Interface Table 1–18 shows the IRS ARINC 429 bus labels and associated data types. For more details on characteristics, refer to Appendix 10 of the ARINC 704-7, Inertial Reference System document. Table 1–18. ARINC 429 IRS Navigational Requirements Label (octal) Interval Rate (ms) Name Min. Max. 310 Latitude 100 200 311 Longitude 100 200 312 Ground Speed 25 50 313 True Track 25 50 314 True Heading 25 50 324 Pitch Angle 10 20 325 Roll Angle 10 20 1. Stand-Alone Mode and Multi-Channel Configuration In Stand-Alone Mode installations, the HSD requires high-speed ARINC 429, IRS Navigational information (as shown in 17) to compute the azimuth, elevation, and Doppler correction information required for antenna pointing. 2. Non-Stand-Alone Modes In Combined and Selective Mode installations, the HSD uses aircraft IRS information to determine which satellite to use, as selected by the Aero H/H+ SDU. In Cooperative Mode installations, the HSD uses aircraft IRS information received from the ARINC 741 SATCOM SDU via the SDU crosstalk ARINC 429 bus. Page 1–22 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (e) HSD Antenna Interface 1. Stand-Alone Mode and Multi-Channel Configuration In Stand-Alone installations, the HSD interfaces to any mechanically steered, conformal-array, or phased array, ARINC 741-compatible, antenna subsystems. The antenna-pointing commands and status messages are communicated between the HSD and antenna subsystem over ARINC 429, Multi-Control, Top/Port and/or Starboard BITE and HPA mute busses, as defined in ARINC 741 Part 1. 2. Non-Stand-Alone Modes In Non-Stand-Alone installations (Combined, Cooperative, and Selective Modes), the ARINC 741 SATCOM SDU controls the satellite selection and antenna pointing. The HSD monitors traffic on the Multi-Control, BSU, and HPA mute busses to determine which satellite is used for the HSD’s channel card(s) communication links. In Cooperative Mode, the HPA command and status messages are communicated over the crosstalk lines. (f) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface In all installation modes, several external system RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain) are delimited to ensure that the HSD performance requirements are met. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a definition of these parameters and their expected values. (g) RF Splitter: Non-Stand-Alone Mode Installations In Non-Stand-Alone installations, an RF splitter must be installed to split the RF Receive signal from the antenna subsystem’s DLNA between the Aero H Radio Frequency Unit (RFU) and the HSD. (Refer the applicable section of "Installation" on page 3-1 for specifications.) (h) HSD Remote Status Panel (Optional) The outputs to the optional “Remote Status Panel” provide a visual indication of the operational status of the HSD; they “mirror” the LRU’s front panel LEDs labeled as Power (LED1) and Fault (LED2) as defined in Table 1–19. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed installation and circuit requirements. Table 1–19. HSD LED Output Designations LED Signal Label LED Color Indication Description LED1 Power Green Power On: HSD supply voltage is active. Flashes at 1 Hz when the HPA is transmitting LED2 Fault Red Fault: Fault condition as described in "HSD Fault Conditions" on page 1-23 (i) HSD Fault Conditions A failure in the HSD may be due to a number of fault conditions. Upon detection of a fault condition, the HSD activates its red, Fault LED. The potential fault conditions are: • Channel Card fault Page 1–23 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (j) • HPA fault • External Reference Fault • Internal ROM Fault • Internal RAM Fault • Over Temperature Fault HSD Remote Reset The remote reset output provides an external reset function for the complete HSD system. Pressing the momentary “normally open” (N.O.) switch resets the system’s processor-card circuitry. The remote reset has the same functionality as pressing the “test” button on the front panel of the LRU. CAUTION: Cooperative and Combined/Selective Mode installations and HSD-X transceivers DO NOT support the use of the reset function. If the HSD transceiver is reset in Cooperative or Combined Mode installations, the communications between the HSD HPA and the SDU of the Aero H/H+ system can be disrupted—potentially causing the SATCOM system faults that may require the complete reset of both systems. (2) HSD-X Multi-Channel System Interfaces This section describes the external interfaces unique to Stand-Alone Mode, HSD-128 Transceivers installed in a Multi-Channel configuration with HSD-X transceivers. The following additional wiring is required for the installation of Multi-Channel HSD systems. • Splitter for the Rx path (See "Installation" on page 3-1) • Combiner for the Tx path (See "Installation" on page 3-1) • TPC1 must be installed on any HSD-128 ARINC 600 Trays that do not have TPC1 installed • Forward ID Address as per HSD wiring Detailed information on the splitter and combiner specifications and losses, as well as cabling notes and system interconnections for Multi-Channel Configurations of HSD and HSD-X transceivers are provided in "Installation" on page 3-1. (a) Multi-Channel HSD-X Antenna Interface Refer to "HSD Antenna Interface" on page 1-23. (b) Weight-on-Wheels (WOW) (Optional) Refer to "HSD WOW Pin Wiring" on page 1-22. (c) HSD-X Forward ID Like the HSD transceivers, the HSD-X units use Forward IDs (Fwd ID) to identify the terminal to the Inmarsat communication network. Page 1–24 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The 24-bit Forward ID strap pins, available on the ARINC 600 connector, form part of the Inmarsat serial number (ISN). The ISN consists of the type approval number and the Fwd ID address. Each Forward ID is associated with Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMN), which are the numbers that a user would dial from the ground to reach the terminal on an aircraft. There is a unique IMN for each of the service types (e.g. Swift64 ISDN 64 kbps data). When strapping the Forward ID on the HSD-128, the first number in the Forward ID pair is used. The HSD-128 internally identifies the second Forward ID by looking up a table in its memory. It is important to strap the first number; otherwise, the HSD-128 will not be able to correctly look up the second number. For strapping the Forward ID on the HSD-X in a four-channel configuration, although each HSD-X can use either number in the second pair, typically the first number of the second pair is assigned to the first HSD-X and the second number of the second pair to the second HSD-X. Figure 1–1 illustrates the assignment of Forward IDs in a 3-channel system. Figure 1–2 illustrates the assignment of Forward IDs in a 4-channel system. Note: The placeholder for the Forward ID in the following illustrations uses “xxxxxx” to represent the six-digit hex number of a valid Forward ID. Uppercase “X’s” indicate a strapped Forward ID address. First Forward ID pair (one for each channel card) XXXXXX xxxxxx Second Forward ID pair (Second Forward ID of pair is not used) XXXXXX xxxxxx HSD-128 HSD-X 1 Figure 1–1. Forward ID Assignment (3-channel system) First Forward ID pair (one for each channel card) XXXXXX xxxxxx HSD-128 Second Forward ID pair (one for each HSD-X) XXXXXX XXXXXX HSD-X 1 HSD-X 2 Figure 1–2. Forward ID Assignment (4-channel system) Page 1–25 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (d) RS-232 Maintenance Port Like the HSD-128, HSD-X units have an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for system monitoring and testing purposes. Access to the maintenance port and the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is possible using an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal). For testing and monitoring of all components of the Multi-Channel HSD configuration, access to all units in the system is achieved using a single terminal (PC or Laptop) connected to the Maintenance Port of the HSD-128 Transceiver. Communication with any installed HSD-Xs installed in the system is possible by either passing through the HSD’s Maintenance Facility when operating in “console-mode” or through a direct connection to individual HSD-X units. Figure 1–3 illustrates the Maintenance Port Facility in a Multi-Channel configuration. Note: For information on the operation of the HSD Maintenance Utility Program in “Console-Mode” refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. Although system monitoring is possible using the “console-mode” feature, software updates, if required, must be loaded directly to the HSD-128 and each HSD-X via their respective maintenance port. Direct connection to the front-panel of the HSD-X maintenance port requires an HSD-X maintenance port cable. The front connector, maintenance port supports trace and data load functions and is a female, micro-D-type, M83513/04-B11N, or equivalent. As well, a permanent connector wired to the rear, middle-plug, maintenance port connector can be installed for remote access. A detailed description of the HSD-X maintenance port pins is provided in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. The RS-232 connection settings for the HSD-X maintenance port are the same as for the HSD-128 as listed below: • Baud rate – 19.2 kbps • Data bits – 8 • Stop bits – 1 • Parity – none • Flow control – none HSD-128 Maintenance Facility out Passthrough in HSD-X Maintenance Facility out RS232 RS232 ARINC 429 Slave Chain Figure 1–3. Maintenance Port Access Page 1–26 18 September 2007 in SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (e) HSD-X Remote Status Panel (Optional) The outputs to the optional “Remote Status Panel” provide a visual indication of the operational status of the HSD-X. They “mirror” the unit’s front panel LEDs labeled as Power (LED1), Fault (LED2), and Channel Available (LED3). Table 1–20 defines the interpretation for each LED. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed installation and circuit requirements. Table 1–20. HSD-X Front Panel LEDs Output Designations LED Name LED Color Indication Description Top (LED1) Power GREEN Power (ac); Flashes at 1 Hz rate while “in call” Middle (LED2) HSD-X Fail RED Fault (Illuminates upon HSD-X failure) Bottom (LED3) Channel Available GREEN Channel Available (f) HSD-X Fault Conditions A failure in the HSD-X may be because of a number of fault conditions. Upon detection of a fault condition, the HSD-X activates its red, Fault LED. The potential fault conditions are: • HSD/HSD-X communications link fault • Channel Card fault • Data I/O fault • Internal ROM fault • Internal RAM fault • Over Temperature fault G. User Interfaces The HSD can support multiple voice and data communication configurations depending on the number of channel cards the unit contains and the mode of installation. The most likely user configurations include a networking device (such as a router or a file server) that allows multiple users to share the channel capability offered by the HSD (single, dual, or multiple channels depending on model, mode, and configuration of the HSD or HSD-X transceivers installed). The selected networking device must have the capability to decide which combination of services is required at any particular moment and activate it accordingly. Therefore, simultaneous RS-232 and BRI S/T connections are required. A different way to achieve this functionality is to use the 10BASE-T port to carry a PPP over Ethernet virtual connection between the networking device (typically a file server) and the HSD. Support for PPP over Ethernet is also required on the user’s side. Note: HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 have Data I/O Type 2 Cards installed and support the Ethernet interface. All other HSD transceivers must have service bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished to support the Ethernet interface. All HSD-X transceivers support an Ethernet interface. Page 1–27 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 1–4 and Figure 1–5 illustrate the user interfaces for single-channel HSD transceiversFigure 1–6 and Figure 1–7 illustrate the user interfaces for dual-channel HSD transceivers. For clarity, these figures only display Data Services. Voice devices are supported by direct connection to the HSD using EURO ISDN telephones or by indirect connection to a router or terminal adapter using two-wire telephone handsets. (1) Stand-Alone Mode User Interfaces Dual-channel HSD transceivers support a maximum of two simultaneous instances of Swift64 Mobile ISDN and/or Mobile Packet Data Services (MPDS) services. (2) Collins Cooperative Mode User Interfaces In Cooperative Mode installations, the HSD system provides one channel of Swift64 data service and Aero H/H+ call capability. Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are simultaneously possible providing the following system conditions are met: • If a Swift64 call is in process and an Aero H/H+ call is attempted, either incoming or outgoing, the Aero H/H+ call is allowed to proceed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process all calls. • If any Aero H/H+ calls are in process, a Swift64 call is allowed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process both the Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls. (3) Honeywell Combined Mode User Interfaces In single-channel transceivers in Combined Mode installations, the HSD system provides one channel of Swift64 data service and Aero H/H+ call capability. In dual-channel transceivers in Combined Mode installations, the HSD system provides two channels of Swift64 data service and Aero H/H+ call capability. Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are simultaneously possible providing the following system conditions are met: • If a Swift64 call is in process and an Aero H/H+ call is attempted, either incoming or outgoing, the Aero H/H+ call is allowed to proceed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process all calls. • If any Aero H/H+ calls are in process, a Swift64 call is allowed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process both the Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls. • If both call types are in process, and system resources become limited due to dropping antenna gain, then Aero H/H+ calls will maintain priority. (4) Selective Mode User Interfaces In Selective Mode operation, dual-channel HSD transceivers support a maximum of two simultaneous instances of Swift64 Mobile ISDN and/or MPDS services. (5) Multi-Channel Configurations The HSD Multi-Channel configuration combines a dual-channel, Stand-Alone Mode HSD-128 Transceiver with one or more single-channel HSD-X Transceivers to add additional channels to the system. MPDS connections demand more power and may reduce channel availability. AMBE connections demand less power and may increase channel availability. Page 1–28 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Each channel provides an ISDN 64 kbps connection that can be used for voice or data services. The two channels in the HSD can be internally bonded to provide a 128 kbps ISDN data connection. Externally, all four channels shown in Figure 1–10 can be combined to provide a single 256 kbps capability with the help of a router, Ethernet hub, or Terminal Adapter. Although the Multi-Channel HSD configuration is designed to accommodate one HSD-128 and multiple HSD-Xs, the number of channels that can be active at one time is dependent on the number of channels available at the Land Earth Station (LES), the available HPA power, and the available antenna gain—which can vary over the course of a flight. RS-232 10BT ISDN S/T RS-232 ARINC Connector ISDN S/T Data I/O Processor Channel Card At the time of printing, Multi-Channel HSD systems support four, simultaneous, high-speed data connections—with software automated, staggered initiation of calls (approximately 20 seconds apart). Laptop computer File Server HSD Transceiver 10BT NOTE: Only HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or HSD transceivers with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished and HSD-X transceiver extensions support the Ethernet (10BaseT) interface. 10Base-T ISDN S/T Router RS-232 Laptop computer Figure 1–4. System Interface Block Diagram Single Channel System Page 1–29 18 September 2007 RS-232 10BT ISDN S/T RS-232 ARINC Connector ISDN S/T Data I/O Processor Channel Card SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal ISDN S/T Terminal Adapter Serial or USB Laptop computer HSD Transceiver Figure 1–5. Reduced Functionality Single-Channel System ISDN S/T RS-232 Channel Card ISDN S/T RS-232 ARINC Connector Channel Card Data I/O Processor 10BT RS-232 Laptop computer ISDN S/T HSD Transceiver NOTE: Only HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or HSD transceivers with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished and HSD-X transceiver extensions support the Ethernet (10BaseT) interface. 10Base-T/ USB 10BT 10BT ISDN S/T Hub (10BT, USB) RS-232 File Server Laptop computer Figure 1–6. System Interface Block Diagram Dual-Channel System Page 1–30 18 September 2007 ISDN S/T RS-232 Channel Card 10BT ISDN S/T RS-232 ARINC Connector RS-232 Channel Card Data I/O Processor SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal ISDN S/T Terminal Adapter Serial or USB ISDN S/T HSD Transceiver Laptop computer Figure 1–7. Reduced Functionality Dual-Channel System (6) ISDN Circuit-Switched Data Interface HSD and HSD-X transceivers connect to a variety of interface options. The physical interface for ISDN service is EURO S/T, which supports several types of connections to user equipment. HSD and HSD-X transceivers provide either one or two ISDN S/T bus interfaces (depending on the number of channel cards and mode of installation of the unit). Each bus is capable of hosting up to eight, EURO ISDN physical devices—which means a one-channel system supports up to eight physical connections to EURO ISDN devices; a two-channel system supports up to sixteen physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. Each channel card supports communications with one, 64 kbps, ISDN B channel on an ISDN U interface bus. If the channel(s) is “busy” or “in-call", the request for service is denied (the system is busy). For ISDN data devices that support bonding with a two-channel card HSD transceiver, the device uses both ISDN B channels to increase data throughput as long as no other devices are “in call.” For incoming calls, each channel card (ISDN BUS) is assigned a Forward ID. The Forward ID is assigned Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs) for each service type. Each service type has an associated Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN). The MSNs are configured in the ISDN devices to direct incoming calls of different service types to the appropriate device. For a two-channel HSD transceiver, two IMNs are assigned for each service type. "System Operation" on page 2-1 provides examples and a detailed description of the routing assignments for the HSD transceiver. Several ISDN interface options are shown in Figure 1–8. The physical interface is EURO S/T, which can support up to eight simultaneous connections to user equipment. In the illustrated example, the ISDN port is only used for circuit-switched services (Swift64 Mobile ISDN). Page 1–31 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Note: Activating MPDS on a particular channel card temporarily, disables the ISDN port on that channel card while MPDS service is in-use. For connection to Inmarsat Mobile ISDN services, install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area. "Installation" on page 3-1 describes the RJ45 connector and cable termination. FAX (ISDN) HSD Transceiver PHONE (ISDN) PCMCIA CARD (ISDN) 64K ISDN BRI S/T PHONE (TIP/RING) LAPTOP (PC) FAX (TIP/RING) SPEECH (MSN 40) RJ-11 One ISDN S/T Bus per HSD Transceiver Channel Card 3.1K AUDIO (MSN 20) RJ-11 Modem EURO T/A (ISDN) EXT. MODEM (ANALOG) COM COM 64K UDI DATA (MSN 10, 11, 12) RS232 Note: Although several ISDN DTE devices may be connected to an ISDN S/T Bus, the HSD only supports one ISDN call at one time per channel card. Figure 1–8. ISDN Connection Options (7) RS-232 Interface The simplest configuration, using the RS-232 interface, allows users to connect directly to the HSD without any kind of networking device (i.e. router or file server). The port identified as DTE-MPDS, on the Interconnect Drawings (refer to "Installation" on page 3-1), is a serial data port capable of operating up to 115 kbps line speed with a maximum throughput of 64 kbps. This RS-232 port only supports Mobile Packet Data Service (MPDS). Install a 9-pin, socket D-Sub interface connector in the cabin area for connection to this service. Configure the connection as: • Bits per second – 115200 • Data bits – 8 Page 1–32 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • Parity – none • Stop bits – 1 • Flow control – Hardware Refer to the applicable Interconnect Diagrams provided in "Installation" on page 3-1 for complete pinout designations. (8) Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other HSD transceivers require the accomplishment of service bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 to upgrade to a Data I/O Card Type 2 that supports the Ethernet interface. The Ethernet port provides a 10 Mb/s access, with a 10BASE-T physical interface. The HSD Data I/O Controller takes the PPP data stream and directs it to the required port on the channel card, depending on the type of service selected by the user. PPP over Ethernet protocol (PPPoE) is required on the user equipment to allow the establishment of virtual connections to either service. Use the Ethernet port for either Swift64 Mobile ISDN or MPDS service. (9) ISDN S/T Interface Transceivers with a Data I/O Type 1 card installed support eight simultaneous connections to user equipment in single-channel card system and sixteen simultaneous connections in two-channel systems. HSD models 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 and HSD Transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished have a Data I/O Type 2 card installed. Data I/O Type 2 cards support seven simultaneous connections to user equipment in single-channel card system and fifteen simultaneous connections in two-channel systems. Note: An HSD transceiver with a Data I/O Card Type 2 uses one S/T Bus “device connection” for system use. Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area to facilitate connection to the Ethernet interface. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for a description of the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. (10)Maintenance Port Interface The HSD is equipped with a maintenance port, located on the front panel of the HSD transceiver with remote access also available through the rear ARINC 600 connector. The maintenance port provides the physical connection to a password-protected, HSD maintenance utility program that provides a system interface for users or service personnel who need to upgrade, monitor, or troubleshoot the system. The user connects to the Maintenance Port either through the Maintenance 25-pin socket D-Sub (DB25S) connector on the front panel of the HSD, or through a remote 9-pin socket D-Sub (DB9S) connector via the ARINC 600 connector, as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. Page 1–33 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal A standard VT100 compatible terminal or computer (PC/laptop) running an emulator program such as HyperTerminal©, ProComm (PCPLUS)©, or another serial communication package provides the user interface to the HSD maintenance utility program. Configure the connection as follows: • Bits per second – 19200 • Data bits – 8 • Parity – none • Stop bits – 1 • Flow control – none The HSD supports two different end user access levels within the Maintenance Port architecture: End User or Field Representative. (a) End User Access: Level 1 Password: menu This limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product. It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of product support personnel. (b) Field Representative Access: Level 2 Password: maint This level is for trained original equipment manufacturer (O.E.M.) installers and product support personnel. This access level supports “read’” and limited “write” capabilities. Users are able to disable/mask/clear faults, change satellite or LES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and perform other maintenance or upgrade functions. "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 provides a detailed description of the two levels of user access and of the menus, report selections, functionality, and system diagnostic procedures of the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. H. Initiated-Self-Test The Initiated-Self-Test occurs during the power up sequence or when the “TEST” button (located on the front panel of the unit) is depressed and held down for three seconds or more. It provides the same functionality as the remote reset switch. I. Owner Requirements Table An Owner Requirements Table Tool (ORT Tool) is a Windows-based program that is used to create and change system configuration disks for HSD transceivers. The configuration data files created using the ORT Tool are loaded into the HSD transceiver via the RS-232 Maintenance Port interface. Detailed information on how to use the ORT Tool is provided in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. Page 1–34 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. Inmarsat System Overview A. General This section provides an overview of the Inmarsat satellite communications system and networks. B. Satellite Network Overview The satellite communication system (SATCOM) comprises global satellite networks, Land Earth Stations (LES), and Mobile Earth Stations (MES). Satellite communication systems provide users with long-range voice and data communication by accessing global satellite and ground communications networks. Inmarsat is an international organization that operates and maintains the satellites and satellite networks. Inmarsat operates multiple geostationary satellites. Each satellite is located over an oceanic region; the current ocean region names are: • Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E) • Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W) • Indian Ocean Region (IOR) • Pacific Ocean Region (POR) These satellites provide worldwide telecommunication services for aviation, shipping, and land-mobile terminal users. The satellites connect to ground telecommunication systems through the LES. The HSD transceiver, in conjunction with an ARINC 741 Aero H/H+ antenna subsystem, acts as an MES. The combined system provides users with a data and voice communications link to the satellite network and global telecommunications system. Figure 1–9 illustrates a simplified satellite communications system. Page 1–35 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 1–9. Simplified Aeronautical Satellite Communications System Page 1–36 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. HSD Modes and Configuration Descriptions A. General This section describes the system mode and configuration variations for the HSD High-Speed-Data SATCOM Transceiver installations. B. Overview HSD transceivers install in a variety of customized configuration modes. HSD transceivers may be installed as Stand-Alone systems or as Non-Stand-Alone units installed within existing SATCOM systems. Four different system configuration modes are possible: • Stand-Alone Mode—single or dual channel transceiver • Cooperative Mode—single channel transceiver (with Collins SAT-906 systems) • Combined Mode—single or dual channel transceiver (with Honeywell MCS systems) • Selective Mode—single or dual channel transceiver (with Collins SAT-906 or Honeywell MCS systems) • Multi-Channel configurations—dual-channel HSD transceiver integrated with additional HSD-X extension transceiver(s) to support multi-channel operation (more than two 64 kbps channels). (1) Channel Card Configurations This section describes the types of channel card configurations supported by HSD transceivers. (a) Dual-Channel Card HSD Transceivers In dual-channel card HSD transceivers, both 64 kbps channels work either independently or as a bonded 128 kbps data-link to the Inmarsat Communications Network. The user has the option to select the service type needed—either circuit-switched data (Swift64 Mobile ISDN) or MPDS. The HSD also supports two simultaneous voice or 14.4 kbps fax calls when not being used in data mode. (b) Single-Channel Card HSD Transceivers Single-channel-card HSD transceivers provide one 64 kbps channel that supports a bi-directional, 64 kbps data-link to the Inmarsat Communications Network. The user has the option to select the service type needed—either Swift64 Mobile ISDN or MPDS. The HSD also supports one voice or 14.4 kbps fax call when not being used in data mode. (c) Multi-Channel Configurations Stand-Alone HSD-128 transceivers in Multi-Channel installations support two 64 kbps channels that work either independently or as a bonded 128 kbps data-link to the Inmarsat Communications Network as well as an additional 64 kbps channel per HSD-X installed in the system. Page 1–37 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The user has the option to select the service type needed—either circuit-switched data (Swift64 Mobile ISDN) or MPDS. The HSD also supports three or more simultaneous voice or 14.4 kbps fax calls when not being used in data mode— depending on the number of additional HSD-X transceivers installed. (2) Installation Modes and Configurations (a) Stand-Alone Mode Systems In Stand-Alone Mode, the HSD transceiver controls both the HPA and antenna. The system supports one channel of Swift64 Mobile ISDN and one channel of Swift64 MPDS or two channels of Swift64 Mobile ISDN or two channels of MPDS. For details, refer to the system block diagram. (b) Non-Stand-Alone Mode Systems In Non-Stand-Alone configuration modes, the HSD hardware acts as the High Gain Antenna HPA for Aero H/H+ calls and provides one or two channels of Swift64 communications. In these configurations, the Aero H/H+ system provides the system interface to the aircraft antenna subsystem. The radio frequency (RF) from the HSD transceiver and the Aero H/H+ system is combined in the HSD. The receive RF from the antenna sub-system is split before being presented to the Aero H/H+ and HSD transceivers. 1. Cooperative Mode Systems HSD transceivers installed in Cooperative Mode configurations operate with a SAT-906 SATCOM system. The HSD hardware is installed in the SAT-906 HPA equipment position. A communications link between the SAT-906 system and the HSD transceiver coordinates the use of the HPA. An external splitter “splits” the antenna RF receive (Rx) signal path to both the HSD and the SAT-906 SATCOM systems. The antenna is controlled by the SAT-906 system’s SDU. This system configuration provides one channel of Swift64 Mobile ISDN, MPDS high-speed data, or Aero H/H+ communications. Simultaneous Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are possible. Swift64 HSD calls proceed even if an Aero H/H+ incoming or outgoing call is in progress providing there is sufficient HPA power available to process all of the calls. To use ARINC 429 data from the Collins SAT-906 SDU, the minimum requirement for HSD control-card software is version 4.5 (or later). Version 4.5 control-card software is available via HSD service bulletins: 1110-SB-0001 and 1110-SB-0003. The recommended software version for optimum system performance is version 7.5 or later. Version 7.5 is available via service bulletin, 1110-SB-0015. The SAT-906 SDU must have core software –068, including service bulletins 31 and 501, which change the unit to a –150 designation and include wiring SDU pin TP12E grounded to indicate that the SDU is operating with an HSD. To achieve the current “best system” operation performance, incorporate EMS SATCOM service bulletin 1110-SB-0015. At the time of writing, Cooperative Mode installations only support single-channel card configurations. If installing a dual-channel HSD-128 transceiver in a Cooperative Mode environment, the HSD EEPROM parameters must be Page 1–38 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal configured as a single-channel system. Use the HSD maintenance utility program to configure the EEPROM settings for a single channel card. (Menu 3, press M, select miscellaneous parameter number 10.) Refer to the system block diagram in Figure 1–12 for Cooperative Mode system details. 2. Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM) Systems HSD transceivers installed in Combined Mode configurations operate with the Honeywell Aero H/H+ MCS 3000/6000 and MCS 4000/7000 Multi-Channel Satellite Communication Systems. The HSD hardware is installed in the SATCOM HPA equipment position, replacing the Honeywell HPA. An external splitter “splits” the antenna RF receive (Rx) path signal to the HSD and the Aero H/H+ systems. The antenna is controlled by the Aero H/H+ system’s SDU. This system configuration provides up to two channels of access to high-speed Swift64 Mobile ISDN or MPDS services as well as the existing Aero H/H+ communications simultaneously. Swift64 HSD calls proceed even if an Aero H/H+ incoming or outgoing call is in progress—providing there is sufficient HPA power available to process all of the calls. In Combined Mode (HCM) installations, the HSD system provides two channels of Swift64 data service and Aero H/H+ call capability. Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are possible simultaneously under the following conditions: • If a Swift64 call is in process and an Aero H/H+ call is initiated, either incoming or outgoing, the Aero H/H+ call is allowed to proceed; • If any Aero H/H+ calls are in process, a Swift64 call is allowed to proceed providing that there is sufficient HPA power available to process both the Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls; and, • If both call types are in process, and system resources become limited due to dropping antenna gain, Aero H/H+ calls will maintain priority. Refer to the system block diagram in Figure 1–13 for details. 3. Selective Mode Systems HSD transceivers installed in Selective Mode configurations operate with an Aero H/H+ system. The HSD transceiver is installed in the Aero H/H+ HPA equipment position. This system configuration provides either one or two channels of Swift64 Mobile ISDN and MPDS high-speed-data communications OR Aero H/H+ communications. Simultaneous Swift64 and Aero H/H+ calls are not possible. Swift64 HSD calls are terminated if an Aero H/H+ incoming or outgoing call is detected by the HSD transceiver allowing the Aero H/H+ call to proceed. While Aero H/H+ calls are in process, Swift64 HSD calls cannot be initiated. Refer to the system block diagram in Figure 1–13 for details. Page 1–39 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (c) Multi-Channel Configurations The HSD Multi-Channel configuration combines a dual-channel, Stand-Alone Mode HSD-128 Transceiver with one or more single-channel HSD-X transceivers to add additional channels to the system. Each channel provides an ISDN 64 kbps connection that can be used for voice or data services. The two channels in the HSD can be internally bonded to provide a 128 kbps ISDN data connection. Externally, all four channels shown in Figure 1–10 can be combined to provide a single 256 kbps capability with the help of a router, Ethernet hub, or Terminal Adapter. The HSD-128 is the master of the system, and as its name suggests, it controls the overall operation of the Multi-Channel HSD configuration. It keeps track of time and allocated power and may command the HSD-X “slaves” to terminate calls under certain conditions, such as an ocean region change. The HSD-X transceivers are wired to the HSD-128 HPA and therefore compete equally for HPA power allocation. The transmit signal of each channel is fed through a combiners/attenuator combination to the HPA located in the HSD and ultimately to the antenna. Conversely, the receive signal from the antenna goes through a series of splitters on its way to each channel. On power-up, HSD-X transceivers go through an initialization process that identifies and communicates the number of extension channels and their position in the system chain back to the HSD-128 controller. The block diagram in Figure 1–10 illustrates the system function of the HSD-128, two HSD-Xs, and the antenna system. ISDN ISDN MPDS (RS232) Ethernet (10Base T) (Optional) ISDN MPDS (RS232) Ethernet (10Base T) ISDN MPDS (RS232) Ethernet (10Base T) ACU HGA HSD-128 (Master) HSD-X (Slave) D/LNA HSD-X (Slave) Transmit Path Receive Path Crosstalk Bus Figure 1–10. Multi-Channel System Block Diagram Page 1–40 18 September 2007 LEGEND ACU Power/Control & BITE RF Signals Multi-Control ACU BITE/HPA Mute Power/Control & BITE HPA (60W) ARINC 429 Multi-Control OUT Multi-Control IN RS232 65 dB Gain Combiner RX ISDN (2) MPDS Bond (RS422) ISDN Telephone Terminal Adapter Splitter Channel Card 2 TX ISDN (2) TX HSD TRANSCEIVER Terminal Adapter ISDN (1) MPDS ISDN Telephone Channel Card 1 RX Oscillator 10 Mhz Data I/O Card Power Supply 28 V dc or 115 V ac, 400 Hz Control Card RS232 RS232 RS232 OCXO Ready STAND-ALONE SYSTEM (1 or 2 CHANNEL) TX ISDN (1) ARINC 741 Antenna 10 Base-T (Future) RX RS232 MPDS (1) D/LNA RS232 MPDS (2) Tx/Rx Front Panel DB25S Maintenance Port Reset LEDs Remotes Front Panel LEDs SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 1–11. Stand-Alone Mode System Block Diagram Page 1–41 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 1–12. Cooperative Mode System Block Diagram Page 1–42 18 September 2007 LEGEND RF Signals 1. Antenna is controlled by Honeywell SDU NOTES: ACU Multi-Control ACU BITE/HPA MUTE Power/Control & BITE ARINC 429 RS232 SDU ARINC HPA BITE RX Channel Card 2 TX ARINC Multi-Control (Listen Only) HPA (60W) 65 dB Gain RF Module Splitter Circuit Switched (ISDN 2) Power/Control & BITE TX ISDN (2) MPDS Bond (RS422) RX ISDN (1) MPDS RS232 RS232 RS232 Control Card Power Supply 28 V dc or 115 V ac, 400 Hz AERO-H RFU OCXO Ready RS232 Data I/O Card Oscillator 10 Mhz COMBINED MODE HSD TRANSCEIVER RFU TX RFU RX Channel Card 1 TX Circuit Switched (ISDN 1) Splitter MPDS (1) RX MPDS (2) ARINC 741 Antenna D/LNA 10 Base T (Future) Tx/Rx Front Panel DB25S Maintenance Port Reset LEDs Remotes Front Panel LEDs SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 1–13. Combined/Selective Mode System Block Diagram Page 1–43 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal C. Functional System Theory The HSD is a high-speed SATCOM Transceiver that contains: either one or two channel cards, a high stability reference oscillator, a high power amplifier, a data processor module, and a power supply. The HSD receives power from the aircraft as either 28 V dc or 115 V ac, 400 Hz. When integrated with the SAT-906 Aero H/H+ as a Cooperative Mode system (refer to Figure 1–12), the HSD L-band Rx/Tx interfaces are shared with those of the SAT-906 via combiners/splitters between the DLNA and the HPA. The SDU of the SAT-906 maintains control over the HSD component via the crosstalk bus and associated discretes. HSD transceivers installed in Combined Mode configurations operate with the Honeywell Aero H/H+ MCS 3000/6000 and MCS 4000/7000 Multi-Channel Satellite Communication Systems. The HSD hardware is installed in the SATCOM HPA equipment position, replacing the existing HPA. An external splitter “splits” the antenna receive (Rx) path to send the RF signal to the HSD and the Aero H/H+ systems. The antenna is controlled by the Aero H/H+ system’s SDU. The HSD supports one or more channels (depending on the model, mode, and configuration installed) of Inmarsat Swift64 MPDS and Mobile ISDN 64 kbps data links. The HSD and HSD-X both have three different ports that support the following interfaces: EURO ISDN S/T, serial (RS-232), and Ethernet (10BASE-T). Although able to support multiple configurations depending on user needs, the following constraints apply: • EURO ISDN S/T port supports Swift64 Mobile ISDN (circuit-switched services - SCPC) only • RS-232 port supports MPDS only • 10BASE-T port supports Swift64 Mobile ISDN or MPDS (Available on HSD transceivers PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or HSD transceivers that have accomplished Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 to upgrade to a Data I/O Type 2 Card) Note: Only one service type can be used at one time—per HSD or HSD-X transceiver channel card. The most likely configurations (as illustrated in Figure 1–14) include connecting a networking device such as a router or a file server to allow multiple users to share the channel(s) provided by the HSD. The simplest configurations, using the RS-232 interface, allow users to connect directly to the HSD without any kind of networking device (e.g. router or server). The RS-232 port allows a single user for MPDS only, while the ISDN S/T port will allow up to eight users on a first come first serve basis. Page 1–44 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2 Wire Fax (Group 3) 2 Wire Fax (Group 4) ISDN BRI S/T Telephone RS-232 TA Laptop computer ISDN BRI S/T 10BT / USB 10BT RS-232 or ISDN BRI S/T Hub (10BT, USB) Router Laptop computer RS-232 or ISDN BRI S/T 10BT RS-232, ISDN BRI S/T, or Ethernet 10Base T (with Data I/O Type 2) 10BT / USB Hub (10BT, USB) Laptop computer Server Telephone 2 Wire 10-100 Base T EMS CNX Network Module (EMS PN 1110-A-0501-01, Future Availability) Laptop computer Laptop computer Figure 1–14. HSD User Configurations Page 1–45 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Blank Page Page 1–46 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal SYSTEM OPERATION 1. Introduction This section provides basic information on registering, commissioning, and operating the HSD High-Speed Data SATCOM transceiver and HSD-X High-Speed SATCOM Extension transceiver. For more information on Swift64 service providers and the activation of HSD and HSD-X transceivers, visit the EMS Technologies HSD Web page at www.emssatcom.com/hsd/team.asp. Page 2–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. Activating HSD Transceivers To activate an HSD or HSD-X transceiver: 1. Obtain terminal information (Forward Identification Numbers and Terminal Type and Category information) from EMS Technologies. 2. Register the terminal with an Inmarsat approved service provider and activate an account. A. Obtaining Terminal Information Before installing the HSD or HSD-X transceiver, contact EMS Technologies to obtain terminal information needed to register and activate the unit with Inmarsat. EMS SATCOM Customer Care assigns an appropriate Terminal Type number and valid Forward IDs for the HSD transceiver based on the intended installation configuration (Stand-Alone or Non-Stand-Alone Mode). Note: Cooperative, Combined, and Selective Mode installations are Non-Stand-Alone Mode installations that operate with an Aero H/H+ system. Cooperative and Combined installations are assigned a Category B terminal type. Please note that Inmarsat does not support Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps) service for Category B terminals. For more information on available services for Category B systems, contact your Inmarsat Service Provider. Note: If you are replacing or upgrading a Stand-Alone or Selective Mode system with a Combined Mode system, you need to de-activate the “old” system’s Forward IDs and service accounts and “activate” new Forward IDs and service accounts to Category B frequency allocations. This process may take 24 to 48 hours to complete. Contact your service provider for more information. When requesting terminal registration information from EMS SATCOM, please have the following information available: • End customer name, including contact information • Purchase order number • Tail registration number, aircraft type, and serial number of the aircraft the unit is being installed on • Serial Number of HSD or HSD-X transceiver(s) • Intended installation configuration mode (Stand-Alone, Cooperative, Combined (HCM), Selective, or Stand-Alone in a Multi-Channel Configuration) Contact EMS SATCOM Aeronautical Sales and Customer Service at: Toll-free from Canada and U.S.A. 1.800.600.9759 Outside Canada and U.S.A. 1.613.591.9064 Fax: 1 613.591.8703 Web sites: www.emssatcom.com Page 2–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (1) Swift64 Service Categories Inmarsat has restricted the frequencies assigned to the HSD system eliminating the possibility of intermodulation signals occurring, thus avoiding any resulting interference problems with the GPS band signals. Inmarsat split the band of frequencies assigned to Swift64 High-Speed Data into two separate categories: Category A and Category B. Category B frequencies are restricted to those frequencies that do not overlap with AERO-H frequency allocations. HSD transceivers in Cooperative and Combined Mode installations must be registered as Category B systems. HSD transceivers in Stand-Alone and Selective installations do not require restricted frequency allocations. Register Stand-Alone HSD transceivers, Multi-Channel, and Selective Mode systems as Category A systems. The frequencies assigned to 4.8 kbps Low-Speed Voice (LSV) are not within the managed Category B frequency range. Therefore, LSV is not a service supported by Inmarsat in Cooperative and Combined Mode HSD transceivers. Secure communications in Category B, HSD systems do not have access to Mini-M service. However, HSD transceivers have both c8400 or c21000 M4 circuit-switched mode channels, which support secure communication operations. To ensure the correct Category frequency assignments for HSD systems, different terminal type numbers are assigned to HSD transceivers based on their intended installation configuration. Table 2–1 lists the terminal type, frequency category, and supported service types for all types of HSD transceivers installations. Table 2–1. Swift64 Category and Service Matrix HSD Installation Mode Inmarsat 3.1 56 64 Mini-M Terminal 64 kbps MPDS Frequency KHz kbps kbps Voice Type speech Category audio data UDI Stand-Alone Category A 76ES03 and Multi-Channel (HSD and HSD-X) Collins Cooperative Category B 76ES04 N/A Honeywell Combined Category B 76ES05 N/A Selective Mode (Not Category A 76ES03 Rec’d) Note: Category B, Inmarsat terminals do not support Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps LSV). Selective Mode is a non-standard installation and it is not a recommended mode of operation. Selective Mode has been superseded by Combined Mode operation for MCS series SATCOM and with Cooperative Mode operation for Page 2–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal SAT-906 series SATCOM. It is recommended that all systems operating in Selective Mode be upgraded to support Combined or Cooperative Mode as applicable. B. Selecting a Service Provider Register the HSD transceiver with an Inmarsat service provider. Contact Inmarsat for an up-to-date list of Inmarsat Swift64 service providers as follows: Inmarsat 99 City Road, London EC1Y 1AX Tel: +44 20 7728 1000 Fax: +44 20 728 1044 Customer Care Tel: +44 20 7728 1777 Fax: +44 20 7728 1142 Email: customer_care@inmarsat.com Web addresses: www.inmarsat.com and www.inmarsat.com/swift64/supp_ser.htm Note: Although the HSD and HSD-X are Mobile Earth Stations (MES), they are referred to as Aircraft Earth Stations (AES) on the service-provider registration form. C. Registering and Activating the HSD and HSD-X Transceivers Contact your Inmarsat service provider and ask for a “Registration for service activation of Aircraft Earth Station ” form. To complete the registration form the following information is needed: • Customer information (address and contact information) • Service provider details (obtain from your Inmarsat service provider) • System and terminal information (system terminal type, manufacturer, model number, serial number of unit and Inmarsat Serial Number) • Aircraft information (tail number, fuselage/airframe number, manufacturer and model, and country of registration • List of services required (e.g. Swift64 Mobile ISDN) Page 2–4 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Configuring HSD Systems This section provides basic information on how to configure HSD systems for operation with user devices. A. Setting up Networks This section provides basic information on how to configure user connections and networks for operation with the HSD and HSD-X transceivers and satellite communications network. (1) Network Types The samples in Figure 2–1 have been simplified to illustrate different types of networks (including a basic, single-user connection). In the illustration, SATCOM refers to HSD transceivers (including any HSD-X transceivers installed in Multi-Channel configurations), as well as any associated SATCOM systems in Non-Stand Alone installations (Cooperative, Honeywell Combined, and Selective Modes). Figure 2–1. Network Configuration Types Note: A single client is a server that does not need to share the connection. A server connecting to a SATCOM through a hub still has the same logical session link. A router is equivalent to a server and a hub bundled into a single device. Page 2–5 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (2) Networking Components The network configurations illustrated in Figure 2–1 have common components that integrate and operate with HSD transceivers. • An interface connection to the HSD equipment: The HSD equipment supports the following interface connections: an RS-232 serial port (MPDS only), a 10BASE-T Ethernet interface on HSD models, 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 and available as an option on other models with HSD service bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, (MPDS or Swift64 Mobile ISDN), and an ISDN interface (Swift64 Mobile ISDN only). The Ethernet interface is accessed through a direct connection (dedicated network card or crossover cable) or through a hub. • A session over the HSD equipment: This is the logical link between the server and the ground segment. • A connection to other local computers: Connection to other local computers is usually achieved using a hub or router; however, the system supports any method computers use to communicate between each other (for example: wireless, dial-up). • A method of sharing the session with other computers: Session sharing is accomplished using Network Address Translation (NAT)—the method behind Internet Connection Sharing, although various proxies may also be used. (3) HSD Interface Options The HSD has three interface options ("Installation" on page 3-1 provides connection details): (a) ISDN The ISDN interface supports connections to Swift64 Mobile ISDN services only. Computers connect to the ISDN interface through a EURO ISDN S/T BRI terminal adapter or router. (Euro ISDN S/T modem and drivers are required.) (b) Serial Port (RS-232) The RS-232 port interface supports MPDS services only, and to a single channel per physical cable connection. Connect to the serial port RS-232 interface using a serial cable. (Hardware handshaking lines are required: CTS/RTS and DTR/DSR.) On the server computer, install a generic external modem with the port set to 115200 bps. (c) Ethernet The Ethernet interface is supported in HSD transceivers, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160—and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished (with Data I/O Type 2 Card installed). HSD-X transceiver extensions also support Ethernet. The Ethernet interface supports both MPDS and M4 circuit-switched data (Swift64 Mobile ISDN) services for either single or dual channel systems. It supports longer cable lengths to accommodate extension through hubs and other networking devices. Page 2–6 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Connect to the HSD transceiver’s Ethernet interface either directly from a dedicated Ethernet card using an Ethernet crossover cable or from a hub using a regular Ethernet cable. B. Mapping User Devices for ISDN Services This section describes how the HSD system manages ISDN traffic for user devices connected to the network. (1) Overview HSD transceivers support connection to a multitude of user devices allowing the user to customize their system. Because each user’s equipment setup is unique, the HSD system uses routing codes to ensure that incoming calls (whether data or voice) reach the appropriate device. These same routing codes also direct outgoing calls to the appropriate Swift64 service type supported by the Inmarsat Satellite Communications Network (3.1 kHz Audio, 64 kbps Speech, 64 kbps Data, 56 kbps Data, or in Stand-Alone systems—4.8 kbps LSV). The physical interface for ISDN service is EURO S/T, which supports several types of connections to user equipment. HSD transceivers provide either one or two ISDN S/T (BRI) Bus interfaces (depending on the number of channel cards and mode of installation of the unit). Each bus is capable of hosting up to eight, EURO ISDN physical devices—which means a one-channel system supports up to eight physical connections to EURO ISDN devices; whereas, a two-channel system supports up to sixteen physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. Note: An HSD transceiver with a DATA I/O Card Type 2 (models 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or units with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) also supports eight devices per channel card, but uses one “device connection” on the first channel card for system use, therefore providing up to fifteen possible device connections in two-channel systems. Each channel card provides one, 64 kbps ISDN B channel that is available to either ISDN Bus. If the channel(s) is “busy” or “in-call”, the request for service is denied (the system is busy). For ISDN data devices that support bonding (with a two-channel card, HSD transceiver), the device will attempt to use both ISDN B channels to increase data throughput (as long as no other devices are “in call”). For incoming calls, each channel card (ISDN BUS) is assigned a Forward ID. The Forward IDs are assigned Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs) for each service type. Two service types are assigned multiple IMNs; 64 kbps data is assigned three IMNs and 4.8 kbps LSV is assigned 16 IMNs. Note: Sixteen MSNs for 4.8 kbps LSV were implemented in Version 4.1 Control Card Software. Systems shipped from the factory after November 15, 2002 have Version 4.1 software or later. Each service type IMN has associated Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN). MSNs are used to configure the user devices so that incoming calls of different service types are routed to the appropriate device. Page 2–7 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal For a one-channel HSD transceiver: one IMN is assigned to 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz Audio; three IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Data; and sixteen IMNs are assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV. For a two-channel HSD transceiver: two IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz Audio; six IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Data; and in Stand-Alone systems thirty-two IMNs are assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV. For a three-channel HSD Multi-Channel configuration (one HSD-128 and one HSD-X extension channel), three IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz Audio; nine IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Data; and in Stand-Alone systems forty-eight IMNs are assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV. For a four-channel HSD Multi-Channel configuration (one HSD-128 and two HSD-X extension channels), four IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Speech, 56 kbps Data, and 3.1 kHz Audio; 12 IMNs are assigned to 64 kbps Data; and in Stand-Alone systems sixty-four IMNs are assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV. Figure 2–2 illustrates the routing assignments for a two-channel HSD transceiver with the following attached to the bus: two voice lines, one FAX line, and one data line device. Figure 2–2 and Table 2–2 and Table 2–3 illustrate the system setup routing or configuration possibilities for ISDN devices using a two-channel HSD transceiver in Stand-Alone Mode as an example. The following dialing instructions provide an example based on the system setup of Figure 2–2 and the mapping programming details provided in Table 2–2, Table 2–3, and Table 2–4: • To call ISDN Phone #1: Dial IMN of 60xxxxxx1 or 76xxxxxx7 • To call ISDN Phone #2: Dial IMN of 60xxxxxx6 or 76xxxxx29 • To call ISDN FAX: Dial IMN 60xxxxxx2 • To call ISDN FAX: Dial IMN 60xxxxx24 Page 2–8 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 2–2. System Setup and Mapping for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile) Note: Refer to Table 2–2, Table 2–3, and Table 2–4 for the default MSNs assigned within the HSD system. Table 2–2. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #1 Channel Card # 1 Forward ID XAXXXX Service Type IMN MSN 64 kbps Speech 60xxxxxx1 (See Note below) MSN 40 3.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxx2 MSN 20 56 kbps Data 60xxxxxx3 MSN 30 64 kbps Data 60xxxxxx4 60xxxxxx5 60xxxxxx6 MSN 10 MSN 11 MSN 12 4.8 kbps LSV 76xxxxxx7 through to 760xxxx22 MSN 80 through to 95 Table 2–3. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #2 Channel Card # 2 (if installed) Forward ID XBXXXX Service Type IMN MSN 64 kbps Speech 60xxxxx23 MSN 40 3.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxx24 MSN 20 56 kbps Data 60xxxxx25 MSN 30 Page 2–9 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–3. IMN and MSN Assignments for ISDN Bus #2 Channel Card # 2 (if installed) Forward ID XBXXXX 64 kbps Data 60xxxxx26 60xxxxx27 60xxxxx28 4.8 kbps LSV 76xxxxx29 through to 760xxxx44 MSN 80 through to 95 Note: MSN 10 MSN 11 MSN 12 IMNs shown are examples only. Actual IMNs may not be assigned in numerical sequence. HSD-X extension channels are assigned IMNs using the same logic. (a) Inmarsat Mobile Numbers Inmarsat Mobile Numbers (IMNs) are unique routing numbers that act similarly to telephone numbers. IMNs are assigned by Inmarsat to each service type (64 kbps Speech, 3.1 kHz Audio, 56 kbps Data, 64 kbps Data, and 4.8 kbps LSV). When registering your system, request IMNs for each service-type device attached to the HSD transceiver on the Service Activation form. Although the service provider may support an unlimited number of IMNs assigned to a particular system, the number of physical connections available on a system defines the number of IMNs supported. Note: To get assigned extra or multiple IMN per service type, you must request them from your service provider when filling out your service registration and application form. The maximum a one-channel HSD transceiver supports is eight physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. A two-channel HSD transceiver supports up to sixteen physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. The maximum an HSD-X transceiver supports is seven physical connections to EURO ISDN devices. Note: An HSD transceiver with a DATA I/O Card Type 2 installed (models 1110-A-1050 and 1110-A-0160 or other models with service bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) only supports seven EURO-ISDN devices on a one-channel card system. DATA I/O Card Type 2 systems can only connect to one channel card in a two-channel-card, split-bus configuration providing connectivity to fifteen devices in total. The numbering of IMNs varies from one type of Inmarsat service to another. For troubleshooting purposes understanding the IMN format can assist in verifying that the correct service type is assigned to connecting devices. Inmarsat IMNs (for this type of terminal) use the following nine-digit format: IMN Format: T1- T2- X1- X2 -X3 -X4 -X5- X6- X7 Numerical Example: • 760011819 (for 4.8 kbps AMBE LSV) • 600221989 (for 64 kbps Data) Page 2–10 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal T1 and T2 are two-digit identifiers for Inmarsat service types. X1 to X7 can be any digit between "0" and "9". The IMNs for Mini-M (4.8 kbps LSV) service type are identified by the T1 and T2 numbers 7 and 6. The IMNs for the 56 kbps and 64 kbps service types (including ISDN Speech and 3.1 kHz audio) are identified by the T1 and T2 numbers 6 and 0. (b) Multiple Subscriber Numbers Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) act as identification and routing codes for user devices attached to the HSD system. MSNs identify the device on the system so that incoming calls route to the appropriate device. Each device must be assigned an appropriate MSN to identify to the Inmarsat system what type of service that device needs on outgoing calls. The MSNs also provide routing information for incoming calls. For a simplified understanding of MSNs, equate them to telephone extension numbers (where the IMN is the PBX telephone number and the MSN is the extension number). 1. Configuring MSNs Each HSD and HSD-X channel card is assigned one Forward ID and an IMN for each service type the system is registered for with the service provider. Table 2–4 provides the list of the MSN numbers recognized by the HSD system. Both 64 kbps Data and Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps LSV AMBE) services support multiple MSNs. The MSNs are assigned to each IMN as follows: • One MSN for the service types 64 kbps Speech, 3.1 kHz Audio, and 56 kbps Data • Three MSNs for 64 kbps Data • Sixteen MSNs for Mini-M Voice (4.8 kbps LSV AMBE) (On control card software 4.1 or later—systems shipped from the factory after November 15, 2002 have Version 4.1 software or later installed.) The three MSNs assigned to 64 kbps ISDN support connection to three separate devices mapped to the same IMN. Therefore, in dual-channel systems, three ISDN devices can be connected to each channel provided six separate mapping extensions; in three-channel systems, three ISDN devices can be connected to each channel provided nine separate mapping extensions; and, in four-channel systems, three ISDN devices can be connected to each channel providing twelve separate mapping extensions. The sixteen MSNs assigned to 4.8 kbps LSV support the mapping of sixteen separate phones to the same IMN. (Example: sixteen phones connected to a PBX box.) In dual and Multi-Channel systems, PBX devices can be connected to each channel providing up to 64 separate phone extensions. Note: Incoming voice calls will ring any phone devices not programmed with an MSN (left blank) including 4.8 kbps LSV, 64 kbps Speech, and 3.1 kHz audio calls. Configure all devices (e.g. telephones, fax machines, laptops) connected to the HSD system with an appropriate MSN. (Refer to the device manufacturer’s user documentation for specific instructions in how to enter or configure the MSN.) Page 2–11 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–4. HSD Transceiver MSN Configuration Table Forward ID Service Type IMN MSN Channel Card #1 (XAXXXX) 64 kbps Speech 60xxxxxxx 40 Channel Card #2 (XBXXXX) Dual Channel Units 64 kbps Speech 60xxxxxxx 40 Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 1 64 kbps Speech 60xxxxxxx 40 Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 2 64 kbps Speech 60xxxxxxx 40 Channel Card #1 (XAXXXX) 3.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxxx 20 Channel Card #2 (XBXXXX) Dual Channel Units 3.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxxx 20 Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 1 3.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxxx 20 Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 2 3.1 kHz Audio 60xxxxxxx 20 Channel Card # 1 (XAXXXX) 56 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30 Channel Card # 2 (XBXXXX) - 56 kbps Data Dual Channel Units 60xxxxxxx 30 Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 1 56 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30 Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 2 56 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30 Channel Card # 1 (XAXXXX) 64 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 10, 11, 12 Channel Card # 2 (XBXXXX) - 64 kbps Data Dual Channel Units 60xxxxxxx 10, 11, 12 Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 1 64 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 10, 11, 12 Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 2 56 kbps Data 60xxxxxxx 30 Channel Card #1 (XAXXXX) 76xxxxxxx 4.8 kbps LSV (Not supported in Non-Stand-Alone systems) 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 Channel Card #2 (XBXXXX) Dual Channel Units 76xxxxxxx 4.8 kbps LSV (Not supported in Non-Stand-Alone systems) 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 Page 2–12 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–4. HSD Transceiver MSN Configuration Table Forward ID Service Type IMN MSN Channel Card #3 (XCXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 1 4.8 kbps LSV 76xxxxxxx (Not supported in Non-Stand-Alone systems) 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 Channel Card #4 (XDXXXX) Multi-Channel HSD-X 2 76xxxxxxx 4.8 kbps LSV (Not supported in Non-Stand-Alone systems) 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95 Table 2–5. System Assignments for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile) Entry PERIPH MSN TID Call Type REDIR ISDN NO_ID\ 800103 Mobile AMBE Bonded NO_ID\ 800103 Mobile AMBE ISDN NO_ID\ 91 800124 Mobile aero 64k speech ISDN 10\ 51 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI ISDN 11\ 52 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI ISDN 12\ 53 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI ISDN NO_ID\ 51 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI Bonded NO_ID\ 51 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI ISDN 20\ 61 800625 Mobile aero 64k audio 3.1 ISDN NO_ID\ 61 800625 Mobile aero 64k audio 3.1 10 Bonded NO_ID\ 61 800625 Mobile aero 64k audio 3.1 11 ISDN 30\ 71 800623 Mobile aero 56k UDI 12 ISDN NO_ID\ 71 800623 Mobile aero 56k UDI 13 Bonded NO_ID\ 71 800623 Mobile aero 56k UDI 14 ISDN 40\ 91 800124 Mobile aero 64k speech 15 Bonded NO_ID\ 91 800124 Mobile aero 64k speech 16 ISDN 80 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 17 ISDN 81 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 18 ISDN 82 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 19 ISDN 83 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) Page 2–13 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–5. System Assignments for Incoming Calls (Fixed-to-Mobile) Entry PERIPH MSN TID Call Type REDIR 20 ISDN 84 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 21 ISDN 85 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 22 ISDN 86 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 23 ISDN 87 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 24 ISDN 88 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 25 ISDN 89 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 26 ISDN 90 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 27 ISDN 91 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 28 ISDN 92 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 29 ISDN 93 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 30 ISDN 94 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) 31 ISDN 95 10 800103 Mobile AMBE (4.8 kbps LSV) C. Configuring System Parameters using the Maintenance Port Utility This section describes how to configure the system parameters for all modes and configurations of HSD operation, including: Stand-Alone Mode, Cooperative Mode, Honeywell Combined Mode, Selective Mode, and Multi-Channel Configurations. (1) Configuring System Parameters for Stand-Alone Mode This section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in Stand-Alone Mode. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, “reset” or cycle the power on the HSD to activate the new configuration. To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program: • Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system. • Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program. Page 2–14 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • Type the password maint. (The password does not appear on the screen.) The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program Menu 1 appears. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for Stand-Alone operation as described in the following sections. (a) Configuring the Terminal Category for Stand-Alone Mode The factory default for the Terminal Category is configured to “2=HW Strapping.” If the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, the terminal category must be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters. To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M. The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x list EEPROM list event log misc. EEPROM parameter list call log list ORT ocean region parameter set all LES id’sN next menu O previous menu = select reports MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS TERMINAL CATEGORY WHICH PARAMETER # ? 16 2. 11 14 15 16 17 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL TERMINAL CATEGORY VIPER ANTENNA GAIN To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter. The Terminal Category Menu appears. TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE 0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS7000 6=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED 9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP 11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPER NEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 1 3. Type 1 for Stand-Alone and then press Enter. A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the terminal category. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes. Page 2–15 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (2) Configuring System Parameters for Cooperative Mode This section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in Cooperative Mode. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, “reset” or cycle the power on the HSD to activate the new configuration. To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program: • Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system. • Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program. • Type the password MAINT. (The password does not appear on the screen.) The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program menus appear. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for Cooperative Mode operation as described in the following sections. (a) Configuring the Terminal Category for Cooperative Mode If the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, the terminal category must be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters. To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M. The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x list EEPROM list event log misc. EEPROM parameter list call log list ORT ocean region parameter set all LES id’s N next menu O previous menu = select reports MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS WHICH PARAMETER # 2. 11 14 15 16 17 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL TERMINAL CATEGORY VIPER ANTENNA GAIN N for next page To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter. The Terminal Category Menu appears. Page 2–16 18 September 2007 ? 16 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE 0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS7000 6=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED 9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP 11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPER NEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 9 3. Type 9 for Cooperative Rockwell-Collins SAT-906 and then press Enter. A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. (b) Configuring the Number of Channel Cards HSD transceivers operating in Cooperative Mode must be configured as single-channel units—even if the unit is a dual-channel transceiver. To configure the transceiver as a Single Channel system: 1. In Menu 3, press M. 2. Type 10 to select the “Number of Channel Cards” parameter and then press Enter. 3. Type 1 for the number of channel cards and then press Enter. A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the system’s number of channel cards. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes as described in "Configuring LES Access Codes (All Modes)" on page 2-24. (3) Configuring System Parameters for Honeywell Combined Mode To operate the HSD transceiver in Honeywell Combined Mode, you need to configure the following system parameters using the Honeywell SATCOM Direct Commissioning and Maintenance Terminal (CMT) and the HSD Maintenance Port Utility. To configure the Honeywell System Parameters: 1. First, use the Honeywell CMT to: • Obtain the HPA to antenna loss from the Honeywell SDU • Configure High Rate Data Support settings (recommended—but not mandatory) 2. Then use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to: • Configure the Terminal Category (only required when the recommended hardware strapping is not used) • Set Swift64 (M4) and Aero service priorities • Change the LES Access Codes • Reset the system to activate the new configuration. Page 2–17 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (a) Step One: Honeywell System Configuration Using the Honeywell SATCOM Direct CMT, obtain the antenna loss parameter and configure the High Rate Data Support settings. The connection to the Honeywell SATCOM Direct CMT Port uses an RS-232 interface with any “VT-100” terminal emulator program. Configure your VT-100 terminal settings as follows: 9600 bps, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. Refer to Honeywell provided documentation for more information. To configure the Honeywell System: 1. Obtain the HPA to Antenna Loss Parameter Value To maximize system performance, adjust the HPA-to-Antenna Loss parameter within the HSD system to accommodate the HPA to antenna loss from the Honeywell SDU. • Using the Honeywell CMT, obtain the value of the HPA to antenna loss from the Honeywell SDU. • Record the HPA to antenna loss value for future reference. Typically, the value is between 1.5 dB and 2.5 dB. Enter this antenna-loss value into the HSD system configuration using the HSD transceiver’s Maintenance Port Utility Program. 2. Configure the High Rate Data Support Settings Usually, the High Rate Data Support parameters of the Honeywell SDU (Global Beam, High Rate Data and Spot Beam, High Rate Data) are configured to “DIS/EN” (disabled/enabled). Although not mandatory, setting both parameters to “disabled” is recommended. (b) Step Two: Configuring the HSD Transceiver for HCM Mode This section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in HCM Mode. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, the HSD must be “reset” to activate the new configuration. To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program: • Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system. • Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program. • Type the password MAINT. (The password does not appear on the screen.) The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program menus appear. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for HCM operation as described in the following sections. Page 2–18 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 1. Configuring the Terminal Category for Combined Mode If the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, configure the terminal category using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters as described in the following procedure. To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M. The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x list EEPROM list event log misc. EEPROM parameter list call log list ORT ocean region parameter set all LES id’s N next menu O previous menu = select reports MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS WHICH PARAMETER # 11 14 15 16 17 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL TERMINAL CATEGORY VIPER ANTENNA GAIN N for next page ? 16 2. To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter. The Terminal Category Menu appears. TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE 0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS7000 6=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED 9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP 11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPER NEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 8 3. Type 8 for HCM Combined and then press Enter. A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the terminal category. 2. Configuring Antenna Loss To configure the Antenna Loss: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters, press M. The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. Page 2–19 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x list EEPROM list event log misc. EEPROM parameter list call log list ORT ocean region parameter set all LES id’s N next menu O previous menu = select reports MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS WHICH PARAMETER # 11 14 15 16 17 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL TERMINAL CATEGORY VIPER ANTENNA GAIN N for next page ? 1 2. To select the HPA Antenna Cable Loss parameter, type 1 3. Press Enter. The current value for HPA to antenna cable loss appears. HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS 2.5 dB = ? 4. Enter the “HPA to Antenna Cable Loss” value recorded from the Honeywell SDU, and then press Enter. Note: The loss refers to the total loss from the HPA to the antenna, including the coax cable and the DLNA insertion loss (typically 0.8 dB maximum). A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the HPA to Antenna Cable Loss parameter. 3. Configuring Service Priority The HSD system can be configured to give priority to either Aero H or M4 (HCM HSD Swif64) communications. The system default gives priority to Aero H communications. If the HSD parameter is set to Aero priority, the SATCOM Aero H calls are given the priority for power consumption when HPA resources become limited. If the HSD parameter is set to M4 priority, M4 calls have priority when HPA resources become limited. To configure the Service Priority: 1. In Menu 3, press M for misc. EEPROM parameters. The Miscellaneous Parameters List appears. Page 2–20 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS WHICH PARAMETER # 11 14 15 16 17 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL TERMINAL CATEGORY VIPER ANTENNA GAIN N for next page 18 VIPER HPA/ANT LOSS 24 RECEIVER CALIBRATION 28 RX32 ACTIVE 29 DEFAULT LATITUDE 30 DEFAULT LONGITUDE……. WHICH PARAMETER #.? 42 31 42 45 46 OBEY OXCO STATUS HCM AERO/M4 PRIORITIZATION CATEGORY B LOWER FREQUENCY LIMIT CATEGORY B UPPER FREQUENCY LIMIT 2. To select HCM Aero/M4 Prioritization, type 42 and then press Enter. The system prompts you to select a service priority. HCM AERO/M4 PRIORITIZATION AERO EEPROM UPDATED (1=M4 0=AERO) = ? 0 3. Set the service priority for the system as follows: • To select M4 services as the system priority, type 1 then press Enter. • To select Aero services as the system priority, type 0 (the number zero) then press Enter (as displayed in the example provided above). A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of service priority. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes. (4) Configuring System Parameters for Selective Mode This section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in Selective Mode. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, “reset” or cycle the power on the HSD to activate the new configuration. To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program: • Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system. • Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program. • Type the password MAINT. (The password does not appear on the screen.) Page 2–21 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program menus appear. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for Selective Mode operation as described in the following procedure. (a) Configuring the Terminal Category for Selective Mode If the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, the terminal category must be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters. To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M. The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x list EEPROM list event log misc. EEPROM parameter list call log list ORT ocean region parameter set all LES id’s N next menu O previous menu = select reports MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS WHICH PARAMETER # 2. 11 14 15 16 17 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL TERMINAL CATEGORY VIPER ANTENNA GAIN N for next page ? 16 To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter. The Terminal Category Menu appears. TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE 0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS7000 6=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED 9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP 11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPER NEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 3 3. Type the appropriate terminal category number required Selective Mode (0, 3, 4, 5, or 6), and then press Enter. A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the terminal category. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes as described on page 24. Page 2–22 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (5) Configuring System Parameters for Multi-Channel Configurations This section describes how to use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility to configure the HSD system parameters for operation in Multi-Channel Configurations. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed instructions on how to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. When all the required system parameters have been configured, “reset” or cycle the power on the HSD to activate the new configuration. To configure the required system parameters first establish a connection to the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program: • Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver as described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1, and then power up the system. • Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program. • Type the password MAINT. (The password does not appear on the screen.) The HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program Menu 1 appears. You are now ready to begin configuring the system parameters for Multi-Channel operation as described in the following sections. (a) Configuring the Terminal Category for Multi-Channel If the HSD transceiver does not have the recommended hardware strapping for system configuration installed, the terminal category must be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port EEPROM parameters. To configure the Terminal Category: 1. In Menu 3, to select misc. EEPROM parameters press M. The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. The available parameters may differ depending on the version of control processor software installed. MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x list EEPROM list event log misc. EEPROM parameter list call log list ORT ocean region parameter set all LES id’s N next menu O previous menu = select reports MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS WHICH PARAMETER # 2. 11 14 15 16 17 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL TERMINAL CATEGORY VIPER ANTENNA GAIN N for next page ? 16 To select the Terminal Category, type 16 and then press Enter. The Terminal Category Menu appears. Page 2–23 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal TERMINAL CATEGORY HW STRAPPED VALUE 0=SAT906 1=STANDALONE 2=HW STRAPPING 3=MCS3000 4=MCS6000 5=MCS7000 6=MCS COMB 7=STANDALONE W/O ANTENNA 8=HCM COMBINED 9=COOPERATIVE ROCKWELL-COLLINS SAT906 10=OLD COMBINED MODE DEVELOP 11=HSD-X NETWORK 12=HSD-X NETWORK W/O ANTENNA 13=VIPER NEW TERMINAL CATEGORY = ? 11 3. Type the appropriate terminal category number appropriate Multi-Channel Configuration (11, 12, or 13), and then press Enter. A system message appears stating that the EEPROM has been updated. This completes the configuration of the terminal category. You now need to configure the LES Access Codes. D. Configuring LES Access Codes (All Modes) This section describes how to configure the LES access codes provided by your Inmarsat service provider in HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Note: You can remove the label that covers the LES Access Codes LEDs once you have configured the LES Access Codes. (1) General Overview Inmarsat Service Providers (ISPs) operate Land Earth Stations (LES). The ISPs are typically public telephone companies of the country where the LES is located. Using satellite communications antennae and up-and-downlink communications equipment, the LES converts the space segment to a format compatible with public and private telephone and data networks. Each satellite is associated with a number of LES that fall within its coverage. Inmarsat assigns each LES an access code. These access codes are used by the Inmarsat system to route calls to the correct Ocean Region Satellite and LES. New and upgraded HSD units, with Control Processor software version 5.7 or later, are shipped with the factory default LES Access Codes set to ‘0’ (zero). All HSD units (including HSD-X units in Multi-Channel configurations) must be configured with the valid LES Access Codes provided by your Inmarsat Service Provider. (a) Changing Default LES using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program The LES access codes can be configured using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program accessed by connecting a computer running a VT100 terminal emulation program to the RS-232 Maintenance Port on the HSD (or HSD-X) transceivers (refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for connection settings and cabling information). The LES access codes for HSD-X transceivers can either be configured directly, through the HSD-X RS-232 Maintenance Port, or by “passing through” the HSD-128 by activating the console mode feature. (To activate console mode, in menu 18, press X). When configuring the LES access codes using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility, the application requests the input of a Secondary LES Access Code. At the time of writing, the Inmarsat LES have not implemented the recognition of the Page 2–24 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal secondary LES value in their systems. However, a valid Secondary LES Access Code must be entered in the HSD system. The Secondary LES Access Code must be the same as the Primary LES Access Code. When operating HSD software version 5.7, DO NOT select the “Send line ends with line feeds” option in the terminal emulation program’s ASCII Setup. (See example dialog box presented in Figure 2–3.) If this ASCII Sending option is selected, the LES Access Code entered in Menu 3 using the “P” command codes will not be updated or saved to EEPROM. Figure 2–3. Terminal Emulation Program, ASCII Setup HSD transceivers with earlier versions of control processor software (5.4 or earlier) are set with a factory default LES access code of 001. When installing and commissioning the HSD transceiver, change the factory-set default LES for each Ocean Region to the LES access codes provided by your Inmarsat Service Provider. Table 2–6 provides LES access codes for the service providers providing Swift64 services at the time of publication. Contact Inmarsat directly for an up-to-date list of LES and Swift64 service providers. For more information visit Inmarsat’s Web site at www.inmarsat.com/swift64 or contact their Customer Care Service at: Telephone: Fax: E-mail: +44 20 7728 1777 +44 20 7728 1142 customer_care@inmarsat.com Page 2–25 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–6. Inmarsat Swift64 LES Status (As of January, 2004) Ocean Region Service Provider (LES) Global LES Access Code Service Status AORE Stratos Mobile Networks (Satcom Direct) 002 Swift64 – Low Speed Voice (LSV)/HSD (Secure LSV– future availability) AORE Xantic (Station 12) 012 Swift64 LSV/HSD AORE Telenor USA 001* Swift64 LSV AORW Stratos Mobile Networks (Satcom Direct) 002 Swift64 – Low Speed Voice (LSV)/HSD (Secure LSV– future availability) AORW Xantic (Station 12) 012 Swift64 LSV/HSD AORW Telenor USA 001* Swift64 LSV IOR Stratos Mobile Networks (Satcom Direct) 002 Swift64 – Low Speed Voice (LSV)/HSD (Secure LSV– future availability) IOR Xantic (Telstra) 022 Swift64 LSV/HSD IOR Telenor USA 001* Swift64 LSV/HSD POR Stratos New Zealand 002 (Satcom Direct) Swift64 – Low Speed Voice (LSV)/HSD (Secure LSV– future availability) POR Xantic (Telstra) 022 Swift64 LSV/HSD POR Telenor USA 001* Swift64 LSV Note: *When using the LES code 001 for Telenor, calls are automatically routed to the appropriate service (either Swift64 LSV or Swift64 HSD, as defined by the OD/ID code of the call). No additional user action is required. Contact Inmarsat for an up-to-date listing of service providers. Contact your service provider for more information on the services they provide. (b) Equipment Required The following equipment is required to change the default LES access code in an HSD system (HSD or HSD-X transceivers): • Computer (Laptop or PC) • Windows 95® or later (Window 2000® recommended) • HSD control processor software 4.1 or later • Terminal emulation program (e.g. HyperTerminal) (c) Connecting to the HSD Maintenance Port Connect a PC/laptop running a terminal emulation program (e.g., HyperTerminal) to the HSD maintenance port, and then power up the system. (Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for detailed connection information.) Page 2–26 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (d) Changing LES access codes on a call-by-call basis The following procedure provides detailed instructions in how to change the LES default access code for HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Note: This procedure provides instructions on how to change the HSD system default for LES selection. You can also change the LES code on a call-by-call basis using the dial code prefix 901 when troubleshooting and diagnosing network problems. To change the LES access code on a call-by-call basis in all control processor software versions: • Enter the following dial-sequence (Xantic POR LES Access Code (022) used as an example only): 901 + LES CODE + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number + # Example: 901 + 022 + 00 + 1+ 613+5551212 + # (e) Changing LES access codes using control processor software version 5.4 (and earlier) To change the HSD or HSD-X default LES access code in systems operating control processor software version 5.4 or earlier: 1. Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD transceiver, and then power up system. 2. Using a terminal emulation program, open the HSD maintenance utility program. 3. Type the password MAINT. (The password will not appear on the screen.) 4. Press Ctrl+N (repeatedly) to scroll down to Menu 3. Menu 3 appears. MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x list EEPROM reset EEPROM misc. EEPROM parameter system serial number clear call log N next menu O 5. list event log clear event log ignored faults list call log previous menu select reports For miscellaneous EEPROM parameters, press M. The Miscellaneous Parameters list appears. Page 2–27 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 AORW LES ACCESS CODE 4 TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID 5 HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS 6 MAX HPA GAIN 7 MIN ANTENNA GAIN 8 MAX EIRP 9 MAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 12 RX ATTENUATION (LAND-ON-WINGS) 13 MIN SECS BETWEEN CHAN CARD RESETS 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY 33 17 AOR W VALID BEAMS WHICH PARAMETER # ? 6. 18 AOR E VALID BEAMS 19 POR VALID BEAMS 20 IOR VALID BEAMS 21 AORE LES ACCESS CODE 22 POR LES ACCESS CODE 23 IOR LES ACCESS CODE 24 RECEIVER CALIBRATION (AERO) 25 MAX HPA POWER 26 HPA RESERVED POWER (AERO) 27 CHANNEL CARD STARTUP DELAY 28 RX32 ACTIVE 29 DEFAULT LATITUDE 30 DEFAULT LONGITUDE 31 OBEY OXCO STATUS 32 CC DEBUG PORT COMBINED MODE BACKOFF ADJUSTMENT Type in the parameter number for the Ocean Region LES access code you want to change (i.e. 3, 21, 22, or 23), and then press Enter. The program prompts you to type in the LES access code. 7. Type in the Ocean Region LES access code, and then press Enter. Note: You may change one or all of the LES defaults. Each must be entered separately. Refer to Table 2–6 for access codes of the LES service providers available at the time of publication. Contact Inmarsat directly for the most up-to-date service provider and LES access code information. 8. In each parameter, enter a valid LES access code as needed. CAUTION: Do not change the Satellite Longitude parameter—press Enter to continue. 9. Reset the system. (In menu 2, press Z to reset the system, cycle the power to the HSD transceiver, or press the front panel “Test” button or the remote reset switch.) Note: To activate the new default LES code(s) reset the system. If you change the default LES code(s), but do not reset the system, the system uses the “original” or previous default LES code(s)—even though the “new” LES codes appear in the MENU 3 EEPROM Listing—the new codes are activated (or loaded) when the system is reset or the power is cycled. To confirm the activation of new LES access code after resetting the system: 1. In Menu 3, press L. 2. The EEPROM Listing appears. Confirm that the new LES access codes are displayed correctly. (See bolded parameters below.) Page 2–28 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal EEPROM LISTING: MAGIC NUMBER :OK EEPROM VERSION NUMBER 2001 FIRMWARE VERSION 1018 SERIAL NUMBER: 114 IGNORED FAULTS: 0 HARDWARE CONFIG: 0 NUMBER OF POWERUPS (index 0) 13 HOURS OF OPERATION (index 0) 49 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS HIT 'L' for MORE MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS HIT 'L' for MORE HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS: 2.5 dB FORWARD ID: 000000 AORW LES ACCESS CODE: TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID: HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS: 10.0 dB MAX HPA GAIN: 65.0 dB MIN ANTENNA GAIN: 11.0 dB MAX EIRP: 53.5 dBm MAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER: 0.0 dBm NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS : FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED: RX ATTENUATION (LAND-ON-WINGS): 0.0 dB MIN SECS BETWEEN CHAN CARD RESETS: 300 HIT 'L' for MORE MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO: MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL: TERMINAL CATEGORY: HW STRAPPED VALUE AOR W VALID BEAMS: 4 5 6 AOR E VALID BEAMS: 5 6 POR VALID BEAMS: 4 5 6 IOR VALID BEAMS: 5 6 AORE LES ACCESS CODE: POR LES ACCESS CODE: IOR LES ACCESS CODE: RECEIVER CALIBRATION (AERO): 11.0 dB MAX HPA POWER: 18.0 dBw HPA RESERVED POWER (AERO): 16.0 dBw HIT 'L' for MORE CHANNEL CARD STARTUP DELAY: 30 sec RX32 ACTIVE: DEFAULT LATITUDE: 45 D 0' 0.0" N DEFAULT LONGITUDE: 75 D 0' 0.0" W OBEY OXCO STATUS: YES CC DEBUG PORT: NONE COMBINED MODE BACKOFF ADJUSTMENT: 10.0 dB CHECKSUM (stored at offset 462) 9695 OK longest write cycle took 0 MSEC (f) Changing LES access codes using control processor software version 5.7 (or later) To change individual LES access codes in systems operating software version 5.7 up to version 7.0: Page 2–29 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 1. Connect to the HSD-128 Maintenance Port. 2. Type the password maint 3. In Menu 3, press P. 4. Follow the application prompts and enter the LES access codes for each Ocean Region as provided by your service provider. A valid LES ID (LES Access Code) must be entered for all Ocean Regions. A valid LES ID number must also be entered for the Secondary LES parameter; the same LES Access Code as the Primary LES Access Code must be used. Note: Although at the time of writing the Inmarsat LES have not yet implemented the recognition the Secondary LES Access Code parameter in their systems, the HSD requires that a valid LES Access Code for the Secondary LES is entered in the configuration. 5. Using the “Console Mode” function in Menu 18, access each HSD-X installed on the system and configure the LES access codes as described above. CAUTION: Do not change the Satellite Longitude parameter—press Enter to continue. (g) Changing LES access codes using control processor software version 7.0 (or later) To change all of the LES Access Codes simultaneously to the same LES Access Code—available in systems operating software version 7.0 or later: 1. Connect to the HSD-128 Maintenance Port. 2. Type the password maint. 3. In Menu 3, press I. 4. Follow the application prompts and enter the LES access code. The Menu 3, I command configures the Primary and Secondary LES Access Codes for all of the Ocean Regions to the same LES Access Code. Note: In cases where the Service Provider requires different LES Access Codes for different Ocean Regions, each LES Access Code must be programmed individually using Menu 3, item P. 5. Using the “Console Mode” function in Menu 18, access each HSD-X installed on the system and configure the LES access codes as described above. E. Removing the LED Label A label covers the LES Access Codes LEDs. You can remove this label once you have configured the LES Access Codes. F. Activating Configurations After configuring the HSD system parameters, the HSD and HSD-X transceivers must be reset using one of the following methods: • In Menu 2, press Z to reset the system; • Cycle the power to the HSD, and if applicable, HSD-X transceiver(s); or, Page 2–30 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • Press the reset or remote reset button on all HSD and HSD-X units installed in the system. (Not supported in Cooperative or Combined Mode systems.) When the “reset” or “restart” is completed, the configuration values and parameters are activated. Note: In Multi-Channel configurations, the application prompts the user to select the specific units to reset as shown in the example screen below. MENU 2 FIRMWARE Vx.x set veh-relative azimuth desired az veh-rel velocity enter time of day re-enter logon password reset HSD-128 N next menu O TERMINAL: HSD-X NETWORK MODE HSD-X (y/n) [n] ? HSD (y/n) [n] ? set veh-relative elevation resume automatic steering annotate log file get firmware versions set satellite longitude previous menu = select reports • Press Y (for yes) to reset the HSD-X. • Press Y (for yes) to reset the HSD. The configuration values and parameters are now activated. (1) Verifying Configurations This section describes how to verify or refer to the HSD system configuration parameters. To view the HSD ORT system configuration: 1. In Menu 3, press O. The List ORT appears. 2. Press O to scroll through the listing. To view the new system configurations select “List EEPROM” from Menu 3 1. In Menu 3, press L. 2. The List EEPROM appears. Press L to scroll through the listing. G. Configuring System Parameters using the HSD Owner Requirement Tool HSD transceivers operating version 7.0 (or later) control processor software and HSD-X transceivers operating control processor software 6.0, (or later) both support system configuration using the HSD ORT Tool (PN 1110-SW-1047). The HSD Owner Requirements Table (ORT) Tool application is available from EMS Technologies. Contact EMS SATCOM Product Support for more information. The ORT Tool is a Windows-based program that is used to create and change system configuration disks or files for the HSD system. The configuration data files, created using the ORT Tool, are either loaded into the HSD and HSD-X transceivers via the RS-232 maintenance port interface using an HSD load program or loaded using the self-extracting option of the HSD ORT application. Page 2–31 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The ORT Tool allows users to customize certain user-defined parameters in the HSD system such as: • Satellite Data • Service Provider Information • LES Access Code selection • Ethernet Configuration parameters (including IP Address information) • Cable loss The HSD ORT Tool has built-in help files that describe in detail the functionality of the tool. To access the help file, open the ORT Tool and click on Help. (1) Creating an ORT using the HSD ORT Tool This section describes how to create an HSD ORT file that can be loaded on to an HSD/HSD-X transceiver for configuration purposes. Note: The ORT Tool and ORT procedures described in this document may differ from later versions of the ORT Tool. Click the ORT Tool Help button for up-to-date instructions. Note: The HSD ORT Tool is a Windows-based program. Save the program file to either your desktop or in the program files directory of your computer before beginning. To create an HSD ORT configuration file: 1. Double-click on the HSD ORT Tool Icon on your desktop or its filename in the appropriate directory on your computer. The HSD ORT Tool window appears. Page 2–32 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. In the Part Numbers text boxes, type in a Customer PN (required) and Table PN (optional – default is ORT Table). Note: The Part Numbers are used to identify the ORT configuration file. The Customer PN is a required field because of ARINC Data Loader file requirements. If your organization does not require this information, fill in the field the Customer PN fields with any combination of numbers or letters. Note: The optional Table PN is a customer comment field displayed from within the equipment's maintenance menu; it is not a required field. 3. Click Satellite. The Satellite Information dialog box appears with system defaults showing in the satellite names and positions data fields. Page 2–33 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. In the satellite-location-information text boxes (Ocean Region, Index, Location, and Mnemonic), modify the data for a satellite (AORE, AORW, IOR, and POR) as required. Note: In the Index text box, type in a unique number from 0 to 7. This index value references the selected satellite entry’s position with the unit’s tables. 5. In the Service Provider Information text boxes: • Leave the Terrestrial Network ID as the default value. Note: Terrestrial Network ID specifies which telephone network to use; at the time of printing, the Terrestrial Network ID is not required and must be left as the default value. • In the Primary HSD Service Provider text box type the valid LES access code of your primary Inmarsat Swift64 Service Provider. • In the Secondary HSD Service Provider text box, enter the same LES access code of your secondary Inmarsat Swift64 service provider. The Primary and Secondary HSD Service Provider ID codes must be identical. Note: In both the Primary and Secondary HSD Service Provider text box, enter a valid LES access code. Both the Primary and Secondary Service Provider fields may contain the same ID or LES access code as at the time of printing, the Inmarsat Network does not support Secondary Service Providers. 6. Modify the Satellite Information configuration by doing one of the following: • Page 2–34 18 September 2007 Click Add to create a new entry in the satellite list field. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • Click Remove to delete selected satellite entries from the satellite list field. • Click Update to change the data values of a satellite selected from the existing list (the selected satellite appears highlighted). Note: If the required data fields are not completed correctly, an error message appears indicating incomplete or incorrect field entries. Follow the instructions provided in the system error messages and re-try the step. 7. Repeat steps for each satellite that requires new or revised data. 8. Click OK. You return to the main dialog box of the HSD ORT Tool. 9. Click Data I/O. The Data I/O Configuration dialog box appears. The Data I/O dialog box has two, tabbed property sheets: IP and PPPoE. 10. If applicable, select the Get IP Address Automatically check box. Note: If Get IP Address Automatically is selected, BASE IP Address and Network Mask data is not required. 11. If required, in the IP property sheet text boxes, enter the IP addressing information (Host Name, Base IP Address, and Network Mask) that applies to your system configuration. 12. If applicable, select the Allow Telnet check box. Note: Telnet provides remote monitoring and maintenance of devices using a password-protected, terminal-emulation-program session over TCP port 23 (the Telnet Port). Selecting the Allow Telnet check box enables remote access to the HSD using Telnet over the Ethernet port. Clearing the Allow Telnet check box disables this remote functionality. Page 2–35 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 13. Click the PPPoE tab. The PPPoE property sheet appears. 14. In the AC-Name text box (Access Concentrator Name), type the name of the Access Concentrator used by the PPPoE client to differentiate between multiple PPPoE devices. Note: The “AC-Name” is the “name of the HSD unit’s Data I/O card” that is used to direct PPPoE communications to a specific Data I/O card of an HSD installed on a Local Area Network. When configuring Multi-Channel HSD systems, use the naming convention described in Table 2–7. The AC-Name is used to identify the Data I/O cards of HSD and HSD-X units installed on a Local Area Network. If the AC-Name text box is left blank, all of the installed HSD/HSD-X units will respond to a PC’s request for a connection. With each unit specifically identified by a unique AC-Name, connections are managed through the controlled distribution of connection requests. Using the AC-Name to identify each unit’s Data I/O card is particularly useful in the following reasons: Page 2–36 18 September 2007 • To direct communication traffic to a specific unit to leave the other units installed on the network free to handle different service types. For example, direct all MPDS traffic to a specific HSD-X unit so that the HSD transceiver channels are available for ISDN data or voice calls. • To specify the distribution of connections using the AC-Name, so that the connection requests are managed effectively to ensure faster and more efficient connection start ups. • In Multi-Channel HSD networks, to direct connection requests using the AC-Name identifier manages call requests so that multiple connection requests (from different computers on the network) are not sent simultaneously to the same unit, which could lead to call failure. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–7. DATA I/O Naming Convention for AC-Name HSD AC-Name HSD-X #1 DataIO (default) DataIO-1 HSD-X #2 DataIO-2 15. Select or clear the LCP Filtering and Allow MPDS as default service check boxes as required. 16. In the Accessible through PPPoE field, select the appropriate service option (MPDS and ISDN, MPDS Only, None-disable, or ISDN Only). 17. Click OK. You return to the main screen of the HSD ORT Tool. 18. Click Installation. The Installation dialog box, Signal Loss tab sheet appears. 19. In the HSD-X to HSD text boxes, enter the Signal Loss values for each HSD-X unit installed in the HSD system. Note: The installer determines this value. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for more information. 20. In the HSD-to Antenna Loss text box, enter the installation-specific HSD to Antenna Loss value. Note: The installer determines this value (minimum of 1 dB and maximum of 2.5 dB). 21. To exit the Installation dialog box and return to the main ORT Tool menu, click OK. Clicking OK applies the all changed or left as default values in the Installation dialog box, Signal Loss tab fields. Page 2–37 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (2) Saving the ORT file To save the ORT file: 1. Click Save. A Save as dialog box appears. Note: Save a copy of the configuration file for back up and future reference. 2. In the File name text box, type the name of the configuration file. 3. Click Save. You return to the main screen of the HSD ORT Tool. (3) Loading the ORT To create a disk to load the ORT: 1. Click Make Disk. Note: If the configuration file is incomplete or contains invalid data, an error message appears. If an error message appears: • Ensure that all required fields have valid data entered • Save the configuration file • Click Make Disk again The Select contents dialog box appears. The Files to create area of the Select contents dialog box contains four file creation options. The Select contents dialog box also provides two options for creating files: basic ORT files and self-loading ORT files. All of the Select content options are described in Table 2–8. Page 2–38 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–8. Description of Select Contents Dialog Box Options Option Description Selecting the HSD-X option creates an ORT file for HSD-X transceivers. The format of the basic file is HSDX.ORT. The format for a self-loading file is HSDXORT.exe. Selecting the HSD option creates an ORT file for HSD transceivers. The format of basic file is HSD.ORT. The format of a self-loading file is HSDORT.exe. Selecting the Installation option creates an ORT files containing the installation configuration information. This file is loading into the HSD transceiver only. The format of a basic installation file is INST.ORT. The format for a self-loading file is INSTORT.exe. Selecting the Embed Installation option includes the Installation configuration data in the HSD ORT file. Use this option to create a single, HSD ORT file that contains both the HSD ORT and Installation configuration files so that they do not have to be loaded separately. Selecting the Create basic ORT files option generates ORT files that are loading using the HSD Software Load Application, ADT_LOAD.exe (PN 1110-SW-1021). Selecting the Create self-loading ORT files option generates ORT files that are self-loading, executable files that contain the ORT configuration data. The system prompts you to select a destination. 2. Select the appropriate destination to create the disk, and then click OK. The HSD ORT Tool creates the disk copy of the configuration file. A message appears confirming that the disk has been created successfully. 3. After completion of making the disk, click Exit to close the ORT Tool. After completing the configuration of the ORT, load the ORT disks to each HSD or HSD-X unit as described in the next section. (4) Loading ORT Files This section describes how to load both basic and self-loading ORT files. Page 2–39 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (a) Loading Self-loading ORT Files Self-loading ORT files have the HSD software load application embedded in the file. Self-loading ORT files are executable. Opening the file executes the software load application. To load self-loading ORT configuration files onto an HSD or HSD-X unit: 1. Remove power from the system. 2. Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD or HSD-X (Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for cabling and connection details.) 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Apply power to the unit. 5. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The ORT load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. 6. Open the self-loading ORT configuration file. The ORT Loader application window appears. 7. To load the self-loading, ORT configuration files, follow the directions as indicated by the ORT Loader application. The ORT Loader application loads the software to the unit connected to the computer via the selected COM port. When the software load is complete, the window closes. (b) Loading Basic ORT Files When loading a basic ORT file that does not have the self-loading application embedded, load the file using the HSD serial loader, ADT_LOAD.exe (PN 1110-SW-1021). Note: HSD ORT configuration files must be loaded into the HSD transceiver. HSD-X ORT configuration files must be loaded into each of the Multi-Channel HSD-X units installed on the system. The IP addresses are automatically incremented. To load basic ORT configuration files onto an HSD or HSD-X unit: 1. Remove power from the system. 2. Connect a computer to the maintenance port of the HSD or HSD-X (Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for cabling and connection details.) 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Apply power to the unit. Page 2–40 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. 6. Start the HSD Software Load program (ADT_LOAD.exe) to launch the load program. A DOS window opens displaying the “Load Target” menu; it shows a number of load selection options. HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003 which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 – HSD ORT 16 – HSD-X ORT 7. 8. From the “Which Target” menu: • Type “15” to load the ORT file to an HSD unit. • Type “16” to load the ORT file to an HSD-X unit. Press Enter. The load application prompts you to type in a filename. 9. Type the appropriate filename for the software being loaded to the unit, and then press Enter. The application prompts you to select a COM port. 10. Select the COM port on your computer connected to the HSD. 11. Type the appropriate COM port (1 or 2—typically 1), and then press Enter. 12. To start the load, press Enter. Communication with the HSD transceiver is established. The following screen appears. A percentage (%) progress indicator appears on the screen showing load status. Once the load is complete, a confirmation message briefly appears on the screen indicating that the file has been successfully loaded. The DOS window then closes and the unit resets. Page 2–41 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x – [Date] which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT ? File name which contains the firmware image? This download will require one of the PC's COM ports. (1, 2, etc) [1] ? Connect COM1 of this PC to the maintenance port of the data terminal. Hit to abort, or to proceed Establishing communication to the data terminal -- DO NOT CYCLE THE POWER!! Hit ESC to abort. DATA TERMINAL APPARENTLY READY TO ACCEPT PROGRAM switching to 57.6 kbaud loading c:\ort\hsd.ort 67% 100% DATA TRANSFER COMPLETE -- 0 SECONDS dio state 1DATA TRANSMITTED: 1506 BYTES CHECKSUM = 13D9FHSD/HST LOADER Vx.x – [Date] Page 2–42 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. Using the HSD System This section describes how to place voice and fax calls using the ISDN interface of the HSD SATCOM system. A. Placing Voice and Fax Calls Placing voice and fax calls using the HSD system are similar to placing an international telephone call or entering a telephone number for dial-up networking data calls. Like international telephone numbers, the HSD “dialing-number-sequence” includes different “routing” components or codes. Figure 2–4 illustrates the required order of the dialing components. Figure 2–4. HSD Dialing-Sequence Components Each dialing sequence component serves a different routing function: • Dial Code Prefix: Use service-specific dial code prefixes when sending fax or using analogue modems, or for overriding system defaults to force the system to request a specific service type. The illustration uses the dial code prefix for 3.1 KHz audio service type (*82*). (See Table 2–9.) • International Access Code: The international access code for all airborne equipment is 00. However, when calling the aircraft during ground-to-air calls, use the international code of the ground location where the call is originating from. • Country Code: Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) number assigned to the country of your call destination. (Example: “1” is the Country Code for North America.) • Area Code (and City Code, if applicable): PSTN routing number assigned to the area (and if applicable, city) of your call destination. Page 2–43 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • # (SEND): Pressing # (or entering # at the phone number field on data devices) signals the system to “send” the call. Certain devices using the HSD system may not have the functionality to insert the # symbol at the end of the dialing sequence. For those devices, additional Dial Code Prefixes are required to override the “send” command requirement. Refer to Table 2–10 for more information. Note: For more information on using the HSD transceiver for voice and fax, refer to the HSD User Guide (MN-1110-10048). (1) Dial Code Prefixes Although the system automatically selects the appropriate service types on outgoing calls for ISDN devices, a Dial Code Prefix is required to send fax, identify an analogue modem, or force the system to override the system defaults to select a specific service type. (See Table 2–9.) The system requires the Dial Code Prefix *82* for sending fax or when using analogue modems; it forces the system to request the required 3.1 kHz audio service from the Inmarsat Satellite Communications Network. If required, use the Dial Code Prefixes to override the system defaults for selecting specific service types. Dial Code Prefixes for all service types require a “¿” before and after the code number. Other Dial Code Prefixes provide system overrides required if you are using either devices that cannot add a # symbol to the dialing string or devices that are slow dialing. Table 2–10 provides a description of the additional Dial Code Prefixes used for system overrides. Table 2–6 provides a list of the LES and their associated codes available. Table 2–9. Dial Code Prefixes for Forcing Service Type Selection Service Type Service Description Dial Code Prefix (Forces Service Selection) Speech 64 kbps High-Speed Voice 3.1 kHz audio Fax, Analogue Modem, STU-III *82* 56 kbps data High-Speed Data *83* 64 kbps data High-Speed Data *84* 4.8 kbps speech Mini-M Voice (Swift64 Low Speed Voice) *80* Page 2–44 18 September 2007 *81* SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 2–10. Dial Code Prefixes for System Overrides Reason for Override Dial Code prefix Example Dialing Sequence 901 + LES Use this Dial Code Prefix to CODE override the default LES configured in the system. This Dial Code Prefix signals the system to override the default LES and use the selected LES instead. (See Table 2–6.) 901 + LES CODE + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number + # Use with devices that cannot 902 produce or add a “# “character to end the dialing sequence. This Dial Code Prefix signals the system to send the call after a specified delay in user input when the # symbol cannot be entered. 902 + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number 903 Use with slow dialing devices that cannot produce or add a “# “character to end the dialing sequence. This Dial Code Prefix signals the system to send the call after a specified delay in user input. 903 + International Code + Country Code + Area Code + Telephone Number Note: 901 + 002 + 00 + 1+ 613 +5551212 + # 902 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212 903 + 00 + 1+ 613 + 5551212 When using the System Override Dial-Code-Prefixes do not press “¿” before or after the Dial Code Prefix as with other dial code prefixes. (2) Mobile-to-Mobile Communication The HSD provides a two-way link for mobile-to-mobile (aircraft-to-aircraft) communication. Using mobile-to-mobile calling requires additional information. You need to know the IMN of the device or service on the aircraft you are calling. If your service provider does not support Inmarsat’s Single Network Access Code (SNAC) 870, you also need to know which Satellite Ocean Region that the aircraft you are calling is logged on to. Table 2–11 lists the SNAC code and the Satellite Ocean Regions Region Numbers. Table 2–11. Satellite Ocean Region Codes Satellite Ocean Region Ocean Region Number Single Network Access Code 870 Atlantic Ocean Region East (AOR-E) 871 Atlantic Ocean Region West (AOR-W) 874 Pacific Ocean Region (POR) 872 Indian Ocean Region (IOR) 873 Page 2–45 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal If SNAC is unsupported, use the Ocean Regions Number that the aircraft (based on its projected flight path) is probably logged on to. If the call fails to connect to the aircraft, re-try the call using an alternate Ocean Region Number. Figure 2–5 illustrates the Mobile-to-Mobile dialing sequence. Figure 2–5. Mobile-to-Mobile Dialing Sequence B. Using Data Connections This section provides a basic overview of the requirements for making data connections using the HSD transceiver. Refer to the HSD Transceiver User’s Guide (MN-1110-10048) for detailed instructions on creating and configuring HSD dial-up networking connections. (1) Mobile ISDN versus MPDS Deciding which service type to use depends how you intend on using your data connections. For surfing the Web (with high turnover of pages and graphics), video conferencing, video streaming, and large file transfers, Mobile ISDN is faster and more efficient. However, service charges for Mobile ISDN are time-based (based on the length of your total connection time). MPDS provides a cost-effective solution for user applications that involve intermittent interaction or transmission of data, such as e-mail, database queries, and connectivity to IP/LAN and intranets. MPDS also has an “always on” advantage over Mobile ISDN. Service charges for MPDS are based on the number of data bits transmitted over the system—not on the length of your connection time. (2) Connecting to Inmarsat Mobile ISDN Service The transmission of data over satellite networks differs from land-based ISDN applications. Factors inherent in satellite communications (signal fading, latency, and transmission blockages) can cause data transit delays and bit errors. Page 2–46 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Because of these challenges, it is sometimes necessary to optimize the system to achieve peak performance over the satellite network. ISDN protocols are not designed specifically for use over satellite communication networks. To improve data transfer rates most ISDN protocols require minor adjustments. For best results, consider how the ISDN protocol you intend to use sends data over the network. Adjust the configuration taking into account the unique operating environment of satellite network communication. As examples, consider the protocols TCP/IP (over PPP) and V.120. As a basic protocol, PPP operates under the networking protocol TCP/IP. PPP has error checking properties but does not offer flow control. TCP/IP is flexible and designed to run over different networks—including the Internet (which like satellite networks experiences high transit delays). When used together, PPP and TCP/IP protocols perform well over the Inmarsat network. Improve the performance of TCP/IP (over PPP) for Mobile ISDN by changing the default parameters. Increase the maximum size of data allowed in transit at one time to a value up to approximately 255,552 bytes. The protocol V.120 includes error correction and flow control applications. Flow control limits the amount of data that can be in transit at any one time and waits for acknowledgment of receipt from the other end of the connection before sending more data. The default parameters of V.120 limit the maximum transit size of the data package to approximately 1764 bytes—causing poor performance results over satellite ISDN networks. Improve the performance of V.120 over Mobile ISDN by changing the default parameters. Increase the maximum size of data allowed in transit at one time to a value up to approximately 8000 bytes. (Some applications of V.120 permit the user to change the “window size”.) When choosing an ISDN protocol for satellite ISDN networks, consider a flexible solution that allows for modifications to the operating parameters to suit the unique environment of satellite communications. Both the HSD ISDN and Ethernet interfaces support connections to Inmarsat’s Mobile ISDN service. Ethernet is available for HSD transceivers, PNs 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 and HSD transceivers with Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished. All HSD-X transceivers support the Ethernet interface. (a) Using the ISDN Interface The basic requirements for using the HSD ISDN interface to access Swift64 Mobile ISDN services over the satellite network are listed below: • A EURO ISDN terminal adapter or router • An account with an Inmarsat Service Provider • A computer • Dial-up Networking capabilities The following sections describe the three main components required for Swift64 Mobile ISDN service using the ISDN interface (terminal adapters – ISDN modems, ISDN protocols, and ISDN line). Page 2–47 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 1. Terminal Adapters—ISDN Modem Terminal adapters are ISDN devices that function similarly to a modem; they dial and answer calls, and receive and transmit data. They are also referred to as TA’s, ISDN cards, or ISDN modems. Note: The HSD works with Euro S/T ISDN terminal adapters. Inmarsat Swift64 Mobile ISDN service and the HSD do not support the North American ISDN variant. 2. ISDN Protocols Terminal adapters use ISDN protocols to format data between the ISDN line and the user’s computer. The HSD supports most ISDN protocols that run over a B channel on an ISDN line; however, it does not actually implement any of these protocols. The operating system of the user’s computer implements the protocols. 3. ISDN Line This ISDN satellite link acts similarly to ISDN landline providing the same service, but it supports only a single B channel and emulates the D channel. The B channel transmits data the same as an ISDN landline; it sends data at 64 kbps with full duplex. The MES translates the 16 kbps D Channel into an Inmarsat Mobile ISDN signaling system. Despite the differences between landline ISDN and the Inmarsat Mobile ISDN link, most ISDN applications run successfully over the Inmarsat network. (b) Using the Ethernet Interface for Inmarsat Mobile ISDN HSD transceivers with a Data I/O Type 2 Card (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160 and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) and all HSD-X transceiver extensions support the Ethernet interface. The basic requirements for using the HSD Ethernet interface to access Swift64 Mobile ISDN services over the satellite network are listed below: • A PPPoE compatible router—optional devices (e.g. routers) must be PPPoE compatible • An account with an Inmarsat Service Provider • A computer with PPPoE driver installed—a PPPoE driver is the protocol most commonly used by Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) devices; it establishes the connection of the session and the exchanges of PPP frames over Ethernet. • Dial-up Networking capabilities (3) Connecting to Inmarsat MPDS The connection requirements for MPDS service over the satellite network differ depending on whether you access the system through an Asynchronous Serial (RS-232) or Ethernet (10BASE-T) physical connection. (a) Using the RS-232 Interface To make an MPDS connection using the HSD RS-232 port requires the following: Page 2–48 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • An RS-232 cable (Asynchronous Serial) • An activated account with an Inmarsat Service Provider that supports MPDS services • A computer with an available COM port • Dial-up Networking capabilities When operating MPDS over the RS-232 port, no external connecting devices are required. The channel card in the HSD acts as a “modem” and responds to modem “AT” commands. In order to make an MPDS over RS-232 connection, you need to select a standard modem on your computer to direct the data traffic to the PC COM port connected to the RS-232 MPDS port on the HSD. (b) Using the Ethernet Interface HSD transceivers with a Data I/O Type 2 Card (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160 and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) and all HSD-X transceiver extensions support the Ethernet interface. Connections using MPDS over the HSD Ethernet port require the following: • A Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) driver installed—a PPPoE driver is the protocol most commonly used by Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) devices; it establishes the connection of the session and the exchanges of PPP frames over Ethernet. • An activated account with an Inmarsat Service Provider that supports MPDS services • A computer with an Ethernet port • Dial-up Networking capabilities/Web browser • Optional devices (e.g. router) must be PPPoE compatible (c) Optimizing the System for MPDS To optimize your system for MPDS: • Reduce the amount of unnecessary traffic. Ensure that the router configuration disables unnecessary Local Area Network (LAN) messages. • Increase the window size in TCP/IP. • Use DNS caching and Web caching. When using DNS and Web caching, the server only retrieves from the Internet IP addresses and Web pages not stored in the server cache. Note: DNS caching and Web caching is effective when using a LAN configuration on the aircraft. For stand-alone computers, use a personal Web browser cache. To optimize your e-mail client when using MPDS: • Compress attachments (zip files) • Under Tools, in the Options of your e-mail client (e.g. Outlook®, Eudora®) customize the settings for MPDS based on the recommendations below: Page 2–49 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • Disable the read receipt option • Send messages in text format not in HTML format and disable signatures to reduce message size • Disable the “automatic download of message when in viewing panel” feature • Increase the time period for automatic mail checks to reduce traffic • Use IMAP4 mail protocol to allow for header retrieval only Note: Disable the “Save copy of send messages in the ‘Sent Items’ folder” option. (4) Bonding Channel Cards in Two-Channel Card Systems This section provides, as an example, detailed instructions on how to make bonded calls with a two-channel card HSD transceiver using a DIVA T/A ISDN modem. Bonded calls are possible with HSD transceivers that have two channel cards installed. Bonded calls utilize both 64 kbps channels to provide a single 128 kbps data channel. The terminal adapter or router places two separate calls to combine the data transfer over both channels. Although bonded calls provide a single 128 kbps channel, the actual link capacity is application and protocol dependant. Throughput on a Multilink PPP TCP/IP connection is typically 80 to 90 % of the link capacity (running Windows 2000®). The system can only make internally bonded calls if both channels are available. If another device is using one of the B Channels, then the data call proceeds—but as a single channel call. If a bonded call is in progress, (using both B channels) the system is busy and denies all other calls until a channel is free. In Multi-Channel configurations, the HSD transceiver channel cards cannot be internally bonded together with the HSD-X channel cards installed on the system; however, a Multi-Channel configuration, that includes an HSD-128 and two HSD-X extensions, is capable of up to 256 kbps data throughput—with the help of an external device such as a router or Ethernet hub. (a) Bonding HSD Channel Cards using the ISDN Interface If the HSD Transceiver has two channel cards, bonded calls provide the potential for higher throughput. For bonded calls, configure the terminal adapter and connections to use Multilink PPP as the protocol. Note: Not all Internet service providers support Multi-link PPP. Contact your service provider for more information. If a bonded call is in progress, (using both B channels) the system is busy and denies all other calls until a channel is free. Page 2–50 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The following is an example of a configuration for bonded calls using a DIVA T/A for illustration purposes only. Other manufacturers’ terminal adapters may require different or more complex configurations to configure the system for bonded calls. 1. Using HyperTerminal, connect to the Terminal Adapter EURO ISDN modem. 2. Type AT@MENU. The following screen appears. 3. In the protocol field, select Multilink PPP. The protocol field now shows Multilink PPP as the selected protocol. Page 2–51 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. When prompted, select “yes” to save the profile and then reboot your computer. 5. Using the AT@ MENU command, confirm the settings are correct. The Terminal Adapter is now configured to place bonded Multilink calls. Note: If you are dialing a EURO ISDN phone number or a North American ISDN number that has a “HUNT” group assigned, then no changes are required to the Dial-up networking setup of the user’s computer. The following screen illustrates a dial-up networking connection with a “HUNT” group assigned. If a “HUNT” group number is not available, other phone numbers may be used. Page 2–52 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Note: If you are dialing a North American ISDN number, both Service Profile Identifier ISDN (SPID) numbers must be included in the dial-up networking connection to place Multilink calls. To configure the dial-up connection to include both SPID numbers, type in both numbers separated by the “&” symbol. The following screen illustrates the configuration of a Multilink connection to a North American number. Page 2–53 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (b) Bonding Channel Cards using the Ethernet Interface for Mobile ISDN Service HSD transceivers with a Data I/O Type 2 Card (PNs 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160 and HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) support the bonding of two channel cards using the HSD Ethernet interface to access Swift64 Mobile ISDN. Page 2–54 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal To access Swift64 Mobile ISDN services over the Ethernet interface using a bonded two-channel-card connection 1. Create a new dial-up networking connection for two-channel Ethernet ISDN. 2. Double-click on the connection and select properties. The PPPoE Properties Dialog box appears. Page 2–55 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. From the Connect using list, select both available ISDN channels. 4. Select All devices call the same number. 5. Click Configure. The ISDN Configure dialog box appears. 6. Select 64K Digital as the Line type. 7. Select Negotiate line type. 8. Click OK. Page 2–56 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 9. Click on the Options tab. The Options tab sheet appears. 10. From the Multiple Devices list select Dial all devices and then click OK. (Display progress while connecting and Prompt for name and password, certificate, etc, and Redialing options are optional.) 11. Click the Security tab. 12. In Security options, select Typical recommended settings and Allow unsecured password. 13. Click OK. Page 2–57 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 14. Click the Networking tab. The Networking tab sheet appears. Page 2–58 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 15. Select the Internet Protocol TCP/IP. 16. Click Properties. The Internet Protocol dialog box appears. Page 2–59 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 17. Select “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS address automatically”, and then click OK. This completes the creation of the new bonded connection for Mobile ISDN using the Ethernet interface. Before using the connection, you need to configure the Local Area Connection properties. Page 2–60 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal To Configure the Local Area Connection Properties for Bonding (PPPoE): 1. In Network and Dial-up Connections, double-click on Local Area Connection. The Local Area Connection Status dialog box appears. 2. Click Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears. Page 2–61 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Select PPP over Ethernet Protocol and then click Properties. The PPP over Ethernet Protocol Properties dialog box appears. Page 2–62 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. On the General tab sheet, select “2” for the Number of lines (WAN endpoints). This completes the connection configuration for the two-channel Swift64 Mobile ISDN over Ethernet connection. The connection is ready to use. Page 2–63 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Page 2–64 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal INSTALLATION 1. Introduction This section provides general information and procedures required to install HSD transceivers and HSD-X transceivers in Multi-Channel configurations on an aircraft. Mode-specific installation instructions are provided in separate installation sections. The organization of the installation information provided in this section is described below: • General Installation This section provides general installation information that applies to all modes and configurations of HSD and HSD-X systems, including pre-installation instructions, general cabling and connector requirements, information on installation kits, and physical placement considerations. • Section I: Stand-Alone Mode Installation This section provides installation information specific to Stand-Alone Mode HSD transceiver system configurations. • Section II: Combined Mode (HCM)/Selective Mode Installation This section provides installation information specific to Combined Mode and Selective Mode HSD transceiver system configurations. • Section III: Cooperative Mode Installation This section provides installation information specific to Cooperative Mode HSD transceiver system configurations. • Section IV: Multi-Channel Configuration Installation This section provides installation information specific to Multi-Channel HSD transceiver system configurations that includes the installation of HSD-X transceiver extension units. If installation assistance is required, contact EMS SATCOM Product Support at the telephone or fax numbers listed in the front matter of this manual. Page 3–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. Advisories Before performing any installation procedures, read the safety advisories listed in "Introduction" on page TC-1. Page 3–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Pre-Installation Inspection Before installing any HSD equipment, conduct a pre-installation inspection of all parts to ensure that no damage occurred during transit. Page 3–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment • Unpack the HSD/HSD-X transceiver(s) from their shipping containers. • Verify that the part number displayed on the shipping box and equipment component matches the model and part number ordered. If components are missing from the shipment, contact EMS Technologies immediately and report the problem. • Visually inspect the unit for any shipping damage. If any shipping damage has occurred, contact the shipping carrier immediately and report the problem. • Check the HSD/HSD-X transceiver connectors for corrosion and damage. If damage is noted, do not apply power to the unit. Report any damage to EMS SATCOM immediately. Page 3–4 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. Cabling and Connector Requirements This section provides general electrical installation information on power, ground, shielding requirements, and cabling that applies to all installation modes for HSD and HSD-X transceivers. A. Power Requirements The aircraft power supply provides power to the HSD transceiver. This power supply must be +28 V dc nominal for models PN 1110-A-0001, 1110-A-0160, and 1110-A-0080. For HSD models, PN 1110-A-0060, 1110-A-0150, and PN 1110-A-0070, and HSD-X model PN 1110-A-0401, the power supply must be at 115 V ac, 400 Hz (nominal). The breaker rating for the HSD assembly is based on power consumption details provided in Table 1 Variants of Outline and Installation Diagram (1110-E-0001) presented in 225. The power requirements for the HSD-X transceiver are listed in the notes on the HSD-X Outline and Installation Diagram. B. Ground Requirements Improper grounding can potentially lead to ground loops and induced Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) or Radio Frequency Interference (RFI). When installing an HSD or HSD-X transceiver, follow standard grounding practices for both chassis and cabling shields. C. Cable Shielding and Termination The preferred method of cable shield termination is in accordance with NEMA WC 27500:2000 and ARINC 741. ARINC Report 413A – Guidance for Aircraft Electrical Power Utilization and Transient Protection provides more detailed information in Attachment 3-2, Wire Shielding and Grounding Requirements and in Appendix 7. Unless otherwise stated, all cable shields must be connected to the closest aircraft ground at both ends of the cable as well as on both sides on any production break in the cable. Where applicable, terminate shields with connectors via the backshell or via a pigtail with a suitable termination to the closest aircraft ground. General aviation cable-routing guidelines apply. Refer to Table 3–1 for detailed information. Note: Typically, Ethernet and ISDN cable has multiple shields; terminate each shield separately. Table 3–1. Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications Cable Function Conductor Type (Typical) Power Lines Single conductor, stranded Digital Control Single Point N/A Multiple Point Minimum Conductor Coverage by Shield N/A N/A Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85% Serial Data Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85% Ethernet Data Twisted pair, stranded Yes 85% Page 3–5 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–1. Cable Shielding and Termination Specifications Cable Function Conductor Type (Typical) ISDN Data Twisted pair, stranded Discrete Lines Single conductor, stranded RF TX and RX Coaxial Single Point N/A Multiple Point Minimum Conductor Coverage by Shield Yes 85% N/A N/A Yes 95% Definitions: Single Point: Cable shield terminated at one end only—via a connector or suitable crimp terminal. Multiple Point: Cable shield terminated at both ends via a connector or suitable crimp terminal, usually at both ends of the cable—and at both side of any production break. N/A: Not applicable. Page 3–6 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 6. ARINC 600 Trays and Connectors This section provides detailed information on the ARINC 600 trays provided in the HSD Installation Kits that are used in the installation of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. The HSD LRU is installed in a standard, ARINC 600, 8-MCU tray. Ruggedized trays designed specifically for installations on Helicopter aircraft are also available. The HSD-X LRU is typically installed in a standard, 2-MCU tray. Ruggedized trays designed specifically for installations on Helicopter aircraft are also available. A. Installation Kits Installation kits for HSD and HSD-X transceivers are available from EMS Technologies Ltd. Contact EMS Technologies Sales department for more information on how to select and order the appropriate HSD Installation Kit. Table 3–2 lists the recommended installation kits for typical installations. Table 3–2. HSD and HSD-X Installation Kits Installation Kit Name EMS SATCOM Part Number Description HSD Installation Kit 1110-F-0120-01 AC FAN Standard Installation Kit: Bottom AC Fan Tray Assembly and ARINC Connector (Un-pressurized Installation) HSD Installation Kit 1110-F-0120-02 DC FAN Standard Installation Kit: Bottom DC Fan Tray Assembly and ARINC Connector (Un-pressurized Installation) HSD Installation Kit 1110-F-0120-03 HELICOPTER AC FAN Helicopter Installation Kit: Side AC Fan Tray Assembly and ARINC Connector HSD-X Installation Kit AC FAN 1110-F-0121-01 Standard Installation Kit: Fan Tray Assembly with Bottom AC Fan and ARINC Connectors HSD-X Installation Kit NO FAN 1110-F-0121-02 Standard Installation Kit: Tray Assembly and ARINC Connectors (No Fan) HSD-X Installation Kit HELICOPTER NO FAN 1110-F-0121-03 Helicopter Installation Kit: Tray Assembly with Isolators and ARINC Connectors (No Fan) HSD/HSD-X COAX 1110-K-0122 Cable Kit Multi-Channel RF COAX Kit: Tx and Rx Cables (33ft), Combiners, Splitters, Isolators, and HSD-X Cables Page 3–7 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal B. Cabling Notes Before proceeding with the installation of the HSD transceiver, read all cabling notes provided on the HSD System Interconnection Diagram for the applicable HSD system operational mode. (1) HSD Transceiver Cabling When installing the HSD transceiver, follow the cabling requirements listed below: • Maximum recommended cable length should not exceed 50 feet. • LAN cables must meet flammability, TIA/EIA568-A CAT 5 requirements, and conform to ARINC 628 specifications. • Wire size recommendations: • For +28 V dc HOT (BP2), +28 V dc RTN GND (BP3), 115 V ac COLD (BP7), and Chassis GND (BP8), use 12 AWG • For 115 V ac HOT (BP1), use 20 AWG • Unless otherwise specified, for signaling use 22 AWG wire. (2) HSD-X Transceiver Cabling When installing the HSD-X transceiver in Multi-Channel Configurations, follow the cabling requirements listed below: • For 115 V ac HOT (BP2), use 20 AWG • For 115 V ac COLD (BP4), use 20 AWG • Chassis GND (BP3), use 14 AWG (3) HSD Transceiver Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations When installing HSD transceivers, consider the following coaxial cable loss requirements: • Transmit cable: Maximum loss is 2.5 dB including DLNA (typically <0.8 dB) as per ARINC 741. In installations that use a high power relay, the high power relay loss must be included. • Receive cable: For HSD transceivers operating in Stand-Alone, Cooperative, and Combined Mode installations, the minimum loss is 6 – 25 dB (including any in-line attenuator) as per ARINC 74. For HSD-128 and HSD-X transceivers installed in Multi-Channel Configurations, the minimum loss is 0 – 19 dB (including cables and splitters). Page 3–8 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 7. Mechanical Installation This section describes the mechanical installation requirements for the HSD and HSD-X units. The outline and installation drawings for both transceivers are provided at the end of this section. A. General This section contains the information required to plan the physical placement of the HSD and HSD-X (Multi-Channel configurations only) transceivers. The HSD Transceiver Outline and Illustration Drawing (Sheet 1 and 2) illustrates the physical and mechanical specifications of the HSD transceiver. The HSD-X Transceiver Outline and Illustration Drawing (Sheet 1 and 2) illustrates the physical and mechanical specifications of the HSD-X transceiver. In typical aircraft installations, the HSD assembly fits into standard ARINC, 8-MCU mounting trays. HSD-X units fit into standard, 2-MCU mounting trays. Specialized trays, that meet the requirements for installations of both the HSD and HSD-X units on Helicopters, are also available from EMS SATCOM. All HSD ARINC installation trays are included in the HSD and HSD-X Installation Kits that are available from EMS Technologies Ltd. Section Installation Kits describes the HSD and HSD-X Installation Kits available from EMS SATCOM. B. Physical Placement When selecting a placement location for the HSD, and if applicable, HSD-X mounting trays, allow for adequate spacing for the installation of the HSD assembly while providing reasonable access for servicing. Leave a minimum gap of 0.5 inches between LRUs. In Multi-Channel configurations, after wiring the tray(s) for HSD-X units, populate the trays in order, starting from the first-in-line tray that is directly connected to the HSD-128 transceiver. The second HSD-X tray is connected to the first HSD-X tray as shown in Figure 3–1. HSD-X trays are strapped to index the HSD-X units to read the appropriate ARINC messages on the crosstalk bus (communications bus). If an HSD-X must be removed for service, the Multi-Channel HSD system will still function, but the remaining HSD-X units must be moved so that no empty trays are in the middle of the series or chain. Refer to "Maintenance and Repair" on page 5-1 for more information. Page 3–9 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–1. HSD-X Physical Placement Requirements C. Environmental Requirements The environmental requirements that must be considered during the physical placement of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers are based on the RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Specifications detailed in "System Description" on page 1-1. The standard mounting trays for the HSD and HSD-X offer a number of fan configuration options depending on the physical placement of the LRU in the aircraft. (1) Heating and Cooling Refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for a complete listing of the RTCA/DO-160D Environmental Specifications for the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. (a) HSD Transceivers When selecting an installation location for the HSD transceiver, consider the heating and cooling requirements listed below: • Power Dissipation (DC models): 275 Watts nominal, 370 Watts maximum • Power Dissipation (AC models): 275 Watts nominal, 385 Watts maximum • Cooling Air: per ARINC 600 • Recommended Flow rate: 175 lbs/hr • Pressure drop: 0.05”, ± 0.025” H2O (b) HSD-X Transceivers When selecting an installation location for the HSD-X transceiver, consider the heating and cooling requirements listed below: • Power Dissipation: 34 Watts • Cooling Air: per ARINC 600 • Recommended Flow rate: 15.5 lbs/hr • Pressure drop: 0.044”, ± 0.025” H2O Page 3–10 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (c) HSD Fan Tray Requirements WARNING: Failure to install and configure the fan tray assembly as instructed may seriously compromise the HSD’s extreme temperature operation. Fan tray assemblies may be shipped with or without hole-plug-buttons installed. For adequate airflow to the HSD subassemblies, the plugs must be installed or removed in the fan/tray configuration as illustrated in Figure 3–2. Installed plugs are shown in black, and removed plugs are shown in white. Figure 3–2. Fan Tray Plug Configuration D. Chassis Grounding The HSD and HSD-X tray-mounted assemblies must be electrically bonded to the airframe. Ensure the mating surfaces are free from contaminants such as paints or other non-conductive elements. Where surface preparations are insufficient to ensure a proper bond, the use of a short, tin-coated, copper bonding strap of at least 1/4 inch wide is recommended. The LRU and tray assemblies should provide a low impedance path of <0.2 ohms. Page 3–11 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 8. Electrical Installation This section provides mode-specific installation details for HSD and HSD-X transceivers. This section is divided into sub-sections that provide the electrical installation requirements for the different modes of operation. The sub-sections are presented as follows: • Section I: Stand-Alone Mode Installation This section provides installation requirements for HSD transceivers operating in Stand-Alone Mode. • Section II: Combined Mode (HCM)/Selective Mode Installation This section provides installation requirements for HSD transceivers operating in Combined Mode (Honeywell Combined Mode) and Selective Mode. Selective Mode is a non-standard installation and it is not a recommended mode of operation. Selective Mode has been superseded by Combined Mode operation for MCS series SATCOM and with Cooperative Mode operation for SAT-906 series SATCOM. It is recommended that all systems operating in Selective Mode be upgraded to support Combined or Cooperative Mode as applicable. • Section III: Cooperative Mode Installation This section provides installation requirements for HSD transceivers operating in Cooperative Mode. • Section IV: Multi-Channel Configuration Installation This section provides installation requirements for HSD transceivers operating in Multi-Channel Configurations with HSD-X transceiver extension units. A. Section I: Stand-Alone Mode Installation (1) Stand-Alone Mode Installations Wiring Notes This section provides detailed information on the external interface and system connections involved in the installation of an HSD transceiver for Stand-Alone Mode operation. (a) Source/Destination Identification (SDI) – Stand-Alone Source/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided for the BSU and the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications. Pins marked “0” are left open-circuit and pins marked “1” are strapped on the airframe side of the connector to the pin assigned as “SDI Common” (TP5D). For this High Gain Antenna (HGA) HPA application, pin TP5B (“1”) should be strapped and TP5A (“0”) should be left open. Note: The logic for the SDI/WOW is explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. This SDI/WOW logic as applied according to the ARINC specification, where 0=open and 1=strapped to common, is the reverse of the logic applied to all other HSD and HSD-X connectors, Forward ID, System Config, and Data I/O Config , where 0=strapped to common and 1=open. (b) Maintenance Port Interface – Stand-Alone The HSD transceiver has an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for data loading, system monitoring and testing purposes. Page 3–12 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Access to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 Maintenance Port. The HSD Maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the unit. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area. Note: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port—including, equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details. (c) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface – Stand-Alone Several external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain), that must be delimited to ensure proper operation, dictate the HSD performance requirements. Table 3–3 defines these parameters and their expected values. Table 3–3. RF Parameters Definition Parameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB) Antenna Gain 17 Antenna—DLNA Loss 0.1 0.3 DLNA Gain 53 60 DLNA Noise Figure 1.5 1.8 DLNA—HSD (Rx) Loss 25 HSD—Antenna (Tx) Loss 2.5 DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to – Antenna Port) 0.8 (d) WOW Pin Wiring – Stand-Alone These Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)]. WOW wiring, for the HSD, is optional for system operation as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero. The WOW1 and WOW2 pins are either left open circuit or they are connected to the airframe DC ground. The WOW Program Select (PGM) pin is either left open circuit or is connected to the Forward Address Common. The three ground states, defined for any pin are: • OPN: Open circuit Page 3–13 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • AFG: Airframe DC Ground • FAC: Fwd Address Common (TP7K) Resolve any conflict between WOW1 and WOW2 by assuming the aircraft is “in-air.” The interpretation of the state of the WOW1 and WOW2 pins is defined by the state of the WOW program select pin. Refer to Table 3–4 for details. 1. Stand-Alone Mode Installations Labeled as WOW1, WOW2, and WOW Program Select, these discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)]. WOW wiring is optional for system operation in Stand-Alone Mode installations as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero. Table 3–4. WOW Pin Wiring Table Pin Name and Location WOW1 WOW2 PGM TP3G TP3H TP3J Aircraft Status AFG AFG FAC In-air OPN AFG FAC Not valid – Default in-air AFG OPN FAC Not valid – Default in-air OPN OPN FAC On-ground AFG AFG OPN On-ground OPN AFG OPN Not valid – Default in-air AFG OPN OPN Not valid – Default in-air OPN OPN OPN In-air (e) Forward and Return Address IDs – Stand-Alone Figure 3–3 provides an example of a Forward ID address. The Forward ID is a Hex number (example: $ABC123) that must be converted into a binary number for strapping. Page 3–14 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–3. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion Note: A pin strapped to the same potential as T7K (Forward address common) is considered as a logical “0”, whereas an open circuit pin is considered as a logical “1”. MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit. (f) Remote Status Panel – Stand-Alone (Optional) An optional “remote status panel” may be installed in installations where the HSD and/or any HSD-X units are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a “remote status panel” is recommended as it provides visual indications of each of the power, fault, and call status of each of the units. Page 3–15 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal A “remote reset switch” for HSD transceivers can also be installed and located with the Remote Status Panel. Figure 3–4 illustrates a typical wiring diagram for the remote reset circuit. Note: Cooperative and Combined Mode installations and HSD-X transceivers DO NOT support the use of the reset function. 1. HSD Remote Reset Switch Circuit Requirements – Stand-Alone HSD transceivers support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch circuit as shown in Figure 3–4. The HSD Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10 kilohms to be de-asserted (include all cable and switch contact resistance). 2. HSD Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements – Stand-Alone The circuit requirements for the HSD Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–5. Each LED driver circuit has a 200-ohm current limit resistor. The maximum cable resistance (including the forward and return paths) must not exceed 100 ohms to provide adequate current to the 5 volt LEDs (i.e. 10 mA minimum) at the remote status panel. It is recommended that the installer use shielded cables to provide a level of noise immunity. Figure 3–4. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Stand-Alone Page 3–16 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–5. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Stand-Alone (g) User Interfaces – Stand-Alone To facilitate user access to the HSD interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area. Note: Although the Ethernet interface is only supported by HSD-X transceivers, HSD transceiver models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160, and other models of HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, consider pre-wiring the cabin for all interfaces—even when installing an HSD transceiver that currently does not support the Ethernet interface. 1. ISDN Interface Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details below describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. 2. RS-232 Interface (MPDS) Install a DB9S interface connector in the cabin area for connection to the RS-232 interface. Refer to the HSD Interconnection Drawings for pinout designation. 3. Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceiver models, part numbers 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other models of HSD transceivers must have service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 (Data I/O Type 2) accomplished to support the Ethernet interface. Page 3–17 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interface. The next section describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. 4. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details Details relating to the RJ-45 cable terminations, required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services, are shown in Table 3–5 and Figure 3–6. Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404(4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used. Table 3–5. RJ45 Wiring Details – Stand-Alone SERVICE EURO ISDN Signal Ethernet Cable Pin 10BASE-T Cable Pin ECS Other ECS Other RX + White White/Green 3 White White/Orange stripe RX− Blue Green Green Orange/White stripe or solid Orange TX+ White Blue White White/Green stripe TX− Orange White/Blue Brown Green/White stripe or solid Green Figure 3–6. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Stand-Alone Page 3–18 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. System Configuration Pin Strapping – Stand-Alone The HSD adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector. Configuration pins are assigned based on system mode configuration selection and data input/output (I/O) requirements, as shown in Table 3–6. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3–7 and Table 3–8. Table 3–6. Configuration Pin Summary – Stand-Alone Pin # Name Function TP4A to D System Config #1 to #4 System Mode (coded) TP4E to H System Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") MP5G to K Data I/O Config #1 to #4 NOTE: Data I/O Mode (coded) MP6G to K Data I/O Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") Note: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Configuration pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (T7K). • Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configurations resulting in all “1’s” are invalid. 6. System Mode Strap Pins Coding – Stand-Alone The HSD must be externally strapped according to its intended operational configuration mode. Table 3–7 illustrates the system pin strapping for all HSD operational modes and configurations. The system pin strapping for Stand-Alone Mode is highlighted. Page 3–19 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–7. Stand-Alone System Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-Alone Pin Status System Modes TP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D INVALID Stand Alone Selective, SAT-906 Selective, MCS-3000 Selective, MCS-6000 Selective, MCS-7000 Honeywell Combined Reserved Collins Cooperative Multi-Channel Note: The logic for the System Mode pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Mode pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (TP7K). • Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configuration resulting in all “1’s” is Invalid. 7. User Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-Alone Data I/O Mode Pin strapping is only required for HSD transceivers models with Data I/O Type 2 installed (PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160) or other HSD models that have Data I/O Type 2 cards installed via Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004. The following settings allow placing restrictions on the way both channels are used. If the user has no specific requirements then it is recommended to leave both channels as “Unrestricted.” In HSD transceivers with two channel cards, both channels are accessible for Swift64 Mobile ISDN via the ISDN port on a first come-first served basis. All modes, as detailed in Table 3–8, are also described in Figure 3–7. In units where all Data I/O services are available (including Ethernet), the following statements are valid: Page 3–20 18 September 2007 • The channel cards are pooled, which means that no particular card is operated in one of the selected modes. • If one channel card becomes inoperative, and there is a conflicting configuration (for example, 1 Reserved, 1 SCPC – for Swift64 Mobile ISDN), then the remaining card operates in "Unrestricted" mode. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • A “restricted” channel is not handled by the Data I/O Controller, which results in the channel not being accessible for SCPC via Ethernet or for MPDS via RS232 or Ethernet. • An SCPC channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet. • An MPDS channel is accessible for MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet. • An “unrestricted” channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet and MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet. Note: Use a ”Restricted” Data I/O Mode if only ISDN service is available. Table 3–8. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Stand-Alone Pin Status MP5G MP5H MP5J Data I/O Mode MP5K Invalid 1 Restricted, 1 Unrestricted 1 Restricted, 1 SCPC 1 Restricted, 1 MPDS 2 Restricted (ISDN only) 2 SCPC 1 SCPC, 1 Unrestricted 2 MPDS 1 MPDS, 1 Unrestricted 1 SCPC, 1 MPDS 2 Unrestricted (recommended if no specific user requirements) Reserved Note: (‘0’ = FWD Address Common, ‘1’ No Connection) Page 3–21 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–7. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Stand-Alone (h) ARINC 429 IRS Bus Interface – Stand-Alone In Stand-Alone Mode installations, navigational information (refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for more information) is provided to the HSD through the high-speed ARINC 429 IRS bus interface. The IRS bus connects through the top plug of the ARINC 600 connector to the HSD as follows: (i) • IRS A to TP4J • IRS B to TP4K Antenna Interface – Stand-Alone The ARINC 741 antenna subsystem BSU is interconnected to the HSD as specified in Table 3–9. Table 3–9. Stand-Alone Mode HSD to BSU Interconnects Signal Source Signal Name HPA MUTE A HPA MUTE B Page 3–22 18 September 2007 HSD Transceiver Mechanical HGA Phased-Array or Conformal HGA Signal Destination Port BSU-G HSD TP3A STBD BSU-G HSD TP3C Port BSU-H HSD TP3B STBD BSU-H HSD TP3D SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–9. Stand-Alone Mode HSD to BSU Interconnects Signal Source Signal Name HSD Transceiver Mechanical HGA BSU-W(G)1 BSU BITE A BSU BITE B Signal Destination Phased-Array or Conformal HGA BSU-X(H) Port BSU-W HSD TP2A STBD BSU-W HSD TP2C Port BSU-X HSD TP2B STBD BSU-X HSD TP2D MULTI-CONTR OL A TP3E BSU-T(A) & HSD TP1A MULTI-CONTR OL B TP3F BSU-U(B) & HSD TP1B NOTE 1: Letters in (brackets) represent EMS SATCOM AMT-50 BSU pin designations Top/Port (T/P): Refers to Mechanical (fin-mount) High Gain Antenna (HGA) Subsystem Port: Refers to Phased Array (Fuselage-mount) or Port side of Dual (side) Conformal-mount, HGA subsystem Starboard (STBD): Refers to Starboard side of Dual (side) Conformal-mount HGA subsystem (j) Stand-Alone Mode Connection Details The tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for Stand-Alone Mode installations. Table 3–10. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug To Description 1A Multi-control A TP3E Multi-control from control card 1B Multi-control B TP3F Multi-control from control card 2A BSU Top/Port BITE A (See Note 1) Mech. Steered Antenna ARINC Tx-HI BITE from (MA): BSU, Pin G1 or W Top/Port BSU or Other Antenna2 (OA): BSU, PORT-W & Starboard-P 2B BSU Top/Port BITE B MA: BSU, Pin H or X, or ARINC Tx-LO BITE from OA: BSU, PORT-X & Top/Port BSU STBD-R 2C BSU Starboard (STBD) BITE A MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-P & STBD-W Signal Name ARINC Tx-HI BITE from STBD BSU Page 3–23 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–10. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description 2D BSU STBD BITE B MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-R & STBD-X ARINC Tx-LO BITE from STBD BSU 3A Top/Port HPA MUTE A MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-G HPA Mute-A, Port BSU 3B Top/Port HPA MUTE B MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-H HPA Mute-B, Port BSU 3C STBD HPA MUTE MA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD G HPA Mute-A, STBD BSU 3D STBD HPA MUTE MA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD-H HPA Mute-B, STBD BSU 3E OUT Multi-Control IN Multi Ctrl A (TP1A), Multi-Control-HI to HSD and MA: BSU, Pin A or & Antenna Subsystem T, or OA: BSU, PORT-T & STBD-T 3F OUT Multi-Control IN Multi Ctrl B (TP1B), Multi-Control-LO to HSD and MA: BSU, Pin B or & Antenna Subsystem U, or OA: BSU, PORT-U & STBD-U 2K Remote Reset 3G WOW 1 3H WOW 2 3J WOW Program Select 4A, 4B, 4C, 4D System Config 1 to 4A & 4C=0 (TP7K common), 4B & 4D=1(Open) Normally open Remote System Reset momentary switch— open side. (Closed side to MP1F) TP3G Weight On Wheel, as defined in Note 40 of TP3H ARINC 741, Part 1. Refer TP3J to "WOW Pin Wiring – Stand-Alone" on page 3-13 Stand-Alone Mode 4E to 4H System Config 5 to Open (1) System Configuration not assigned 4J IRS-A Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx HI 4K IRS-B Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx LO 5A SDI 1 Not connected HPA Select Code for 5B SDI 2 SDI common (TP5D) HPA Select Code for 5D SDI Common SDI 2 (TP5B) SDI Common for HPA select codes Page 3–24 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–10. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To 5F 5G FWD Address, BIT 1=no connection, 24 (LSB) FWD Address, BIT 5H FWD Address, BIT 5J FWD Address, BIT 5K FWD Address, BIT 20 6A FWD Address, BIT 6B FWD Address, BIT 6C FWD Address, BIT 6D FWD Address, BIT 6E FWD Address, BIT 6F FWD Address, BIT 6G FWD Address, BIT 6H FWD Address, BIT 6J FWD Address, BIT 6K FWD Address, BIT 7A FWD Address, BIT 7B FWD Address, BIT 7C FWD Address, BIT 7D FWD Address, BIT 7E FWD Address, BIT 7F FWD Address, BIT 7G FWD Address, BIT 7H FWD Address, BIT 7J FWD Address, BIT 1 (MSB) 7K FWD Address, Common Description Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat /EMS Common GND connection for system and I/O configuration and Page 3–25 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 1. BSU Pin nomenclature for Mechanically-Steered Antennae (MA) is manufacturer dependent. 2. “Other antenna types” (OA) represent either conformal or phased array antennae. Table 3–11. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To Description O 1A LED 1 Remote Status Panel— HSD—Power On Green (Optional) O 1B LED 2 Remote Status Panel— HSD—Fault (Optional) Red O 1F LED Common Remote Status LED LED Common Panel, and closed side of N.O. Remote Reset Switch O 1G Maint Port Tx (OUT) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2 1H Maint Port Rx (IN) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3 I/ 1J O 2A Maint Port Signal Maint Port serial data, Ground. DB9S-5 CC (channel card) #1 Rx DTE-1A, DB9S-2 or DB25P-3 2B CC #1 Tx DTE-1A, DB9S-3 or DB25P-2 2C CC #1 RTS DTE-1A, DB9S-7 or DB25P-4 O 2D CC #1 CTS DTE-1A, DB9S-8 or DB25P-5 2E CC #1 DTR DTE-1A, DB9S-4 or DB25P-20 O 2F CC #1 DSR DTE-1A, DB9S-6 or DB25P-6 O 2G CC #1 CD DTE-1A, DB9S-1 or DB25P-8 O 2H CC #1 RI DTE-1A, DB9S-9 or DB25P-22 I/ 2J CC #1 SGND DTE-1A, DB9S-5 or DB25P-7 Page 3–26 18 September 2007 Maintenance computer (laptop/PC), for “Remote” access User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1A SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–11. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details I/O From Middle Plug O 3A Signal Name To CC (channel card)#2 Rx DTE-1B, DB9S-2 or DB25P-3 3B CC #2 Tx DTE-1B, DB9S-3 or DB25P-2 3C CC #2 RTS DTE-1B, DB9S-7 or DB25P-4 O 3D CC #2 CTS DTE-1B, DB9S-8 or DB25P-5 3E CC #2 DTR DTE-1B, DB9S-4 or DB25P-20 O 3F CC #2 DSR DTE-1B, DB9S-6 or DB25P-6 O 3G CC #2 CD DTE-1B, DB9S-1 or DB25P-8 O 3H CC #2 RI DTE-1B, DB9S-9 or DB25P-22 I/ 3J I 4G CC #2 SGND DTE-1B, DB9S-5 or DB25P-7 BRI Rx+ ISDN, RJ45-3 4H BRI Rx- ISDN, RJ45-6 O 4J BRI Tx+ ISDN, RJ45-4 O 4K BRI Tx- ISDN, RJ45-5 Description User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1B User Data, ISDN–2 Refer to "User Interfaces – Stand-Alone" on page 3-17 5G to 5K I/O CONFIG Pins See Table 3–8 1 to 4 System Data I/O Mode Configurations 6G to 6K I/O CONFIG 5 to Open (1) System Data I/O Configurations – not assigned 6A BRI Rx+ ISDN, RJ45-3 6B BRI Rx - ISDN, RJ45-6 O 6C O 6D BRI Tx+ ISDN, RJ45-4 BRI Tx- ISDN, RJ45-5 User Data, ISDN–1 Refer to "User Interfaces – Stand-Alone" on page 3-17 Page 3–27 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–11. Stand-Alone Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To 7A 10BASE-T Rx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3 7B 10BASE-T Rx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6 O 7C 10BASE-T Tx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1 O 7D 10BASE-T Tx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2 O C1 RF Tx Output Antenna Subsystem-DLNA Description User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-T (Available in models 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and in units with Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) Coax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–12. Stand-Alone ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details From I/O Bottom Plug Signal Name To Description BP2 +28 V dc HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT +28 V dc supply BP3 +28 V dc return GND Aircraft Power Source, return BP8 Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis Ground BP1 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT 115 V ac 400 Hz supply BP7 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLD BP12 RF Rx Input Antenna Subsystem-DLNA Coax Cable, RF Receive B. Section II: Combined (HCM)/Selective Mode Installation (1) Combined Mode (HCM)/Selective Mode Installations Wiring Notes This section provides detailed information on the external interface and system connections involved in the installation of an HSD transceiver for Combined and Selective Mode operation. Note: Page 3–28 18 September 2007 Selective Mode is a non-standard installation and it is not a recommended mode of operation. Selective Mode has been superseded by Combined Mode operation for MCS series SATCOM and with Cooperative Mode operation for SAT-906 series SATCOM. It is recommended that all systems operating in Selective Mode be upgraded to support Combined or Cooperative Mode as applicable. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Note: All connections, except power and RF, are HSD specific. Refer to “other SATCOM” and antenna manufacturers’ installation documentation for interconnection wiring details. (a) Maintenance Port Interface – Combined/Selective The HSD transceiver has an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for data loading, system monitoring, and testing purposes. Access to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 Maintenance Port. The HSD Maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the unit. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area. Note: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port—including equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details. (b) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface – Combined/Selective Several external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain), that must be delimited to ensure proper operation, dictate the HSD performance requirements. Table 3–13 defines these parameters and their expected values. Table 3–13. RF Parameters Definition – Combined/Selective Parameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB) Antenna Gain 17 Antenna—DLNA Loss 0.1 0.3 DLNA Gain 53 60 DLNA Noise Figure 1.5 1.8 DLNA—HSD (Rx) Loss 25 HSD—Antenna (Tx) Loss 2.5 DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port) – 0.8 (c) WOW Pin Wiring – Combined/Selective This section describes the requirements for WOW pin wiring. • Combined Mode Installations In Combined Mode installations, WOW1, WOW2, and WOW Program Select are reserved for future use. Page 3–29 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • Selective Mode Installations Labeled as WOW1, WOW2, and WOW Program Select, these discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)]. WOW wiring is optional for system operation in Selective Mode installations as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero. Table 3–14. WOW Pin Wiring Table – Combined/Selective Pin Name and Location WOW1 WOW2 PGM TP3G TP3H TP3J Aircraft Status AFG AFG FAC In-air OPN AFG FAC Not valid – Default in-air AFG OPN FAC Not valid – Default in-air OPN OPN FAC On-ground AFG AFG OPN On-ground OPN AFG OPN Not valid – Default in-air AFG OPN OPN Not valid – Default in-air OPN OPN OPN In-air (d) Forward and Return Address IDs – Combined/Selective Figure 3–8 provides an example of a Forward ID address. The Forward ID is a Hex number (example: $ABC123) that must be converted into a binary number for strapping. Page 3–30 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–8. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Combined/Selective Note: A pin strapped to the same potential as T7K (Forward address common) is considered as a logical “0”, whereas an open circuit pin is considered as a logical “1”. Note: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit. Page 3–31 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (e) Remote Status Panel – Combined/Selective (Optional) An optional “remote status panel” may be installed in installations where the HSD units are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a “remote status panel” is recommended as it provides visual indications of each of the power, fault, and call status of each of the units. A “remote reset switch” for HSD transceivers can also be installed and located with the Remote Status Panel. Figure 3–10 illustrates a typical wiring diagram for the remote reset circuit. 1. HSD Remote Reset Switch Circuit Requirements Note: Combined Mode installations DO NOT support the use of the reset function. In Selective Mode installations, the use of the reset function is optional. HSD transceivers support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch circuit as shown in Figure 3–9. The HSD Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10 kilohms to be de-asserted (include all cable and switch contact resistance). 2. HSD Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements The circuit requirements for the HSD Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–10. Each LED driver circuit has a 200-ohm current limit resistor. The maximum cable resistance (including the forward and return paths) must not exceed 100 ohms to provide adequate current to the 5 volt LEDs (i.e. 10 mA minimum) at the remote status panel. It is recommended that the installer use shielded cables to provide a level of noise immunity. Figure 3–9. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Combined/Selective Page 3–32 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–10. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Combined/Selective (f) User Interfaces – Combined/Selective To facilitate user access to the HSD interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area. Note: Although the Ethernet interface is only supported by HSD-X transceivers, HSD transceiver models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160, and other models of HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, consider pre-wiring the cabin for all interfaces—even when installing an HSD transceiver that currently does not support the Ethernet interface. 1. ISDN Interface Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details below describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. 2. RS-232 Interface (MPDS) Install a DB9S interface connector in the cabin area for connection to the RS-232 interface. Refer to the HSD Interconnection Drawings for pinout designation. 3. Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceiver models, part numbers 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other models of HSD transceivers must have service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished to support the Ethernet interface. Page 3–33 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interface. The next paragraph, describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. 4. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details Details relating to the RJ45 cable terminations, required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services, are shown in Table 3–15 and Figure 3–11. Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404(4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used. Table 3–15. RJ45 Wiring Details – Combined/Selective SERVICE EURO ISDN Signal Ethernet Cable 10BASE-T Cable Pin Pin ECS Other ECS Other RX + White White/Green White White/Orange stripe RX− Blue Green Green Orange/White stripe or solid Orange TX+ White Blue White White/Green stripe TX− Orange White/Blue Brown Green/White stripe or solid Green Figure 3–11. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Combined/Selective Page 3–34 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. System Configuration Pin Strapping – Combined/Selective The HSD adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector. Configuration pins are assigned based on system-mode-configuration selection and data input/output (I/O) requirements as shown in Table 3–16. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3–17 and Table 3–18. Table 3–16. Configuration Pin Summary – Combined/Selective Pin # Name Function TP4A to D System Config #1 to #4 System Mode (See Table 3–17) TP4E to H System Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") MP5G to K Data I/O Config #1 to #4 NOTE: Data I/O Mode (See Table 3–18) MP6G to K Data I/O Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") Note: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Configuration pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (T7K). • Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configurations resulting in all “1’s” are invalid. 6. System Mode Strap Pins Coding – Combined/Selective The HSD must be externally strapped according to its intended operational configuration mode. Table 3–17 illustrates the system pin strapping for all HSD operational modes and configurations. The HCM Mode is highlighted as an example. Table 3–17. Combined Mode System Mode Pin Strapping Pin Status System Modes TP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D INVALID Stand-Alone Selective, SAT-906 Selective, MCS-3000 Selective, MCS-6000 Selective, MCS-7000 Honeywell Combined Reserved Page 3–35 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–17. Combined Mode System Mode Pin Strapping Pin Status System Modes TP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D Collins Cooperative Multi-Channel Note: The logic for the System Mode pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Mode pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (TP7K). • Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configuration resulting in all “1’s” is Invalid. 7. User Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Combined/Selective Data I/O Mode Pin strapping is only required for HSD transceivers models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or other HSD models that have Data I/O Type 2 cards installed via Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004. The following settings allow placing restrictions on the way both channels are used. If the user has no specific requirements then it is recommended to leave both channels as “Unrestricted.” In HSD transceivers with two channel cards, both channels are accessible for Swift64 Mobile ISDN via the ISDN port on a first come-first served basis. All four modes, as detailed in Table 3–18, are also described in Figure 3–12. In units where all Data I/O services are available (including Ethernet), the following statements are valid: • The channel cards are pooled, which means that no particular card is operated in one of the selected modes. • If one channel card becomes inoperative, and there is a conflicting configuration (for example, 1 Reserved, 1 SCPC – for Swift64 Mobile ISDN), then the remaining card operates in "Unrestricted" mode. • A “restricted” channel is not handled by the Data I/O Controller, which results in the channel not being accessible for SCPC via Ethernet or for MPDS via RS232 or Ethernet. • An SCPC channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet. • An MPDS channel is accessible for MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet. • An “unrestricted” channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet and MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet. Note: Use a ”Restricted” Data I/O Mode if only ISDN service is available. Page 3–36 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–18. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Combined/Selective Pin Status MP5G MP5H MP5J Data I/O Mode MP5K Invalid 1 Restricted, 1 Unrestricted 1 Restricted, 1 SCPC 1 Restricted, 1 MPDS 2 Restricted (ISDN only) 2 SCPC 1 SCPC, 1 Unrestricted 2 MPDS 1 MPDS, 1 Unrestricted 1 SCPC, 1 MPDS 2 Unrestricted (recommended if no specific user requirements) Reserved Note: (‘0’ = FWD Address Common, ‘1’ No Connection) Page 3–37 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–12. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Combined/Selective (g) ARINC 429 IRS Bus Interface – Combined/Selective In HCM Combined Mode and Selective Mode installations, navigational information (refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for details) is provided to the HSD through the high-speed ARINC 429 IRS bus interface. The IRS bus connects through the top plug of the ARINC 600 connector to the HSD as follows: • IRS A to TP4J • IRS B to TP4K (h) Antenna Interface – Combined/Selective The SATCOM Aero H/H+ system provides the interface to the antenna. Refer to Honeywell documentation for specific details. (i) RF Splitter Installation – Combined/Selective Refer to the Interconnection Diagrams for cabling details. Refer to Table 3–19 for a list of the required cable assembly parts. Substitutions using different parts of equivalent functionality are acceptable. Note: Before installing the RF splitter, read all of the steps included in the following splitter installation procedure. Note: Actual splitter mounting location may vary depending on the placement of the existing RFU and HPA assemblies. Page 3–38 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal To install the RF Splitter: 1. Determine a suitable location near the RFU to secure the splitter. 2. Cut the receive coax cable at the splitter mounting location. 3. Re-terminate the cut ends with TNC coax connectors 4. Connect the end coming from the antenna subsystem to the splitter input (S) connector. 5. Connect the end going to TPC1 of the RFU to one of the output ports of the splitter, one or two. 6. Run a new coax cable (length is installation specific) from the unused splitter output port to BP-12 of the ARINC 600 connector of the HSD tray assembly. Table 3–19. Receive Path Parts Requirements – Combined/Selective Item Manufacturer PN EMS SATCOM PN Description RF Splitter ZAPD-2-TNC 32800004 Mini-Circuit, 2-way 0°, TNC, Splitter Receive Coax 432101 – ECS, Coax Cable, 0.130 O.D., 50Ω, 17.5 dB/100 ft @ 1.5 GHz Connector (@ Splitter) CTS522 – ECS, TNC, Straight Plug Connector (@ BP12) P522 – ECS, ARINC 600, Size 5, Socket (j) Combined/Selective Mode Connection Details The tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for Combined and Selective Mode installations. Table 3–20. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O I/O From Top Plug Signal Name 1A to 1D Multi-Control IN and BITE OUT To As per avionics manufacturer’s documentation Description Multi-Control and BITE 2A BSU Top/Port BITE A SDU, MP7G ARINC Tx-HI BITE From Top/Port BSU 2B BSU Top/Port BITE B SDU, MP7H ARINC Tx-LO BITE From Top/Port BSU 2C BSU STBD BITE A Mechanically ARINC Tx-HI BITE Steered Antenna1 From STBD BSU (MA): Not required Other Antenna2 (OA): SDU, MP7J Page 3–39 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–20. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug BSU STBD BITE B To Description MA: Not required OA: SDU, MP7K ARINC Tx-LO BITE From STBD BSU 3A to 3D HPA MUTE MA: Not required As per avionics manufacturer’s documentation HPA Mute-A & B to BSU 2K Remote Reset Normally Open momentary switch—open side (Closed side to MP1F) Remote System Reset (Optional; not recommended for Combined Mode) 3G WOW 1 TP3G 3H WOW2 TP3H Weight On Wheel, as defined in Note 40 of ARINC 741 3J WOW Program Select TP3J 2D Signal Name 4A to 4D System Config 1 to 4 System Mode Configurations 4E to 4H System Config 5 to 8 Open (1) System Mode configuration-not assigned 4J IRS-A Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx HI 4K IRS-B Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx LO 5A, 5B, & SDI 1, SDI 2, & SDI 5D Common As per avionics manufacturer’s documentation HPA Select Code for HGA 5F Page 3–40 18 September 2007 FWD Address, BIT 24 1=no connection, Six digit Hex ID assigned (LSB) 0=Common (TP7K) by Inmarsat /EMS SATCOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–20. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name 5G FWD Address, BIT 23 5H FWD Address, BIT 22 5J FWD Address, BIT 21 5K FWD Address, BIT 20 6A FWD Address, BIT 19 6B FWD Address, BIT 18 6C FWD Address, BIT 17 6D FWD Address, BIT 16 6E FWD Address, BIT 15 6F FWD Address, BIT 14 6G FWD Address, BIT 13 6H FWD Address, BIT 12 6J FWD Address, BIT 11 6K FWD Address, BIT 10 7A FWD Address, BIT 9 7B FWD Address, BIT 8 7C FWD Address, BIT 7 7D FWD Address, BIT 6 7E FWD Address, BIT 5 7F FWD Address, BIT 4 7G FWD Address, BIT 3 7H FWD Address, BIT 2 7J FWD Address, BIT 1 (MSB) 7K FWD Address, Common To Description Common GND connection for system and I/O configuration and FWD ID 1. BSU Pin nomenclature for Mechanically-Steered Antennae (MA) is manufacturer dependent. Page 3–41 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. “Other antenna types” (OA) represent either conformal or phased array antennae. Table 3–21. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To Description 1A LED 1 Remote Status Panel—Green HSD-64—Power On (Optional) 1B LED 2 Remote Status Panel—Red HSD-64—Fault (Optional) 1F LED Common Remote Status LED LED Common Panel and closed side of N.O. Remote Reset switch (if used) 1G Maint Port Tx (Out) Maint Port serial data, Maintenance Laptop/PC, DB9S-2 for “Remote” access 1H Maint Port Rx (In) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3 1J Maint Port Signal GND Maint Port serial data, DB9S-5 2A Channel Card (CC) #1 Rx DTE-1A, DB9S-2 2B CC #1 Tx DTE-1A, DB9S-3 2C CC #1 RTS DTE-1A, DB9S-7 O 2D CC #1 CTS DTE-1A, DB9S-8 2E CC #1 DTR DTE-1A, DB9S-4 O 2F CC #1 DSR DTE-1A, DB9S-6 O 2G CC #1 DCD DTE-1A, DB9S-1 O 2H CC #1 RI DTE-1A, DB9S-9 I/O 2J CC #1 SGND DTE-1A, DB9S-5 6A BRI RX+ RJ45-3 6B BRI RX- RJ45-6 O 6C BRI TX+ RJ45-4 O 6D BRI TX- RJ45-5 Page 3–42 18 September 2007 User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1A User Data, ISDN–1 Refer to "User Interfaces – Combined/Selective" on page 3-33 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–21. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To Description 5G to 5K I/O CONFIG Pins 1 to See Table 3–8 System Data I/O Mode Configurations 6G to 6K I/O CONFIG Pins 5 to Open (1) Data I/O Config – not assigned 4G BRI Rx+ ISDN, RJ45-3 4H BRI Rx- ISDN RJ45-6 User Data, ISDN–2 (Provisional) O 4J BRI Tx+ ISDN, RJ45-4 O 4K BRI Tx- ISDN, RJ45-5 7A 10BASE-T Rx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, User Data, RJ45-3 Ethernet 10BASE-T 7B 10BASE-T Rx- 7C 10BASE-T Tx+ 7D 10BASE-T Tx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, (Available in models RJ45-6 1110-A-0150, Ethernet 10BASE-T, 1110-A-0160, and in units RJ45-1 with Service Bulletin, Ethernet 10BASE-T, 1110-SB-0004 RJ45-2 accomplished) C1 RF Tx Output Antenna Subsystem-DLNA Coax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–22. Combined/Selective Mode ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details From I/O Bottom Plug Signal Name To Description +28 V dc HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT +28 V dc supply +28 V dc Rtn GND Aircraft Power Source, Rtn Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis Ground 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT 115 V ac 400 Hz supply 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLD 12 RF Rx Input RF Rx Splitter output RF Receive from Antenna port Subsystem Page 3–43 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal C. Section III: Cooperative Mode Installation (1) Cooperative Mode Installations Wiring Notes This section provides detailed information on the external interface and system connections involved in the installation of an HSD transceiver in Cooperative Mode operation. (a) General Overview – Cooperative Mode This section describes external interfaces unique to HSD Transceivers operating in Collins SAT-906 Cooperative-Mode. For detailed interface descriptions, refer to the Cooperative Mode, Interconnection Diagram, (1110-B-0156). Note: All connections, except power and RF, are HSD specific. Refer to “other SATCOM” and antenna manufacturers’ installation documentation for interconnection wiring details. To achieve the current “best system” operation performance, the HSD should have EMS SATCOM service bulletin 1110-SB-0015 incorporated (service bulletin 1110-SB-0015 supercedes 1110-SB-0003). Cooperative Mode installations that use an HSD without a minimum of service bulletin 1110-SB-0003 (control processor software version 4.5) incorporated will occasionally generate Disable 0100, Disable 0800, and Disable 1000 SAT-906 system errors. Cooperative Mode system installations that use an HSD with service bulletin 1110-SB-0003 incorporated operate with improved system performance and should only generate Disable 1000 SAT-906 system errors (Disable 1000 errors occur on approximately 1% of M4 call terminations). This error occurs due to the HSD reporting a lower than expected actual power out value in the HPA Status Word on the ARINC 429 HPA BITE bus. Currently, Cooperative Mode installations only support single channel card configurations. If installing a dual-channel HSD transceiver in a Cooperative Mode environment, use the maintenance port utility to configure the EEPROM setting, in Menu 3, for a single channel card. The following general wiring notes must be considered before installing an HSD transceiver for Cooperative Mode operation with the Collins SAT-906 system. • Splitter for the RX path • System Configuration strapping is set to “Cooperative Rockwell-Collins SAT-906” in the EEPROM parameter for software versions 4.5. External system strapping to “Collins Cooperative” Mode is used for installations operating software versions 5.7 or later (1110-SB-0011). Software versions 5.7 or later “read” the hardware strapping to automatically identify the system configuration. Add the following HSD-specific wiring: • Forward ID Address (Category B) • Antenna to BSU BITE information from SDU • A “Tx Disable” line from the SDU to the HSD • ARINC 429 SDU to/from HSD, Crosstalk BUS lines Other HSD-specific wiring includes: Page 3–44 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • ISDN, Ethernet (if supported with an installed Data I/O Type 2 Card), and/or MPDS (RS-232) interface wiring • System and Data I/O Configuration lines • Optional maintenance and LED remote interfaces (b) Rockwell Collins Requirements for Cooperative Operation with SAT-906 At the time of printing, the SAT-906 SDU needs, at a minimum, core software – 068, that includes service bulletins 31 and 501, which changes the unit to a – 150 designation with wiring SDU pin TP12E grounded to indicate that the SDU is operating with an HSD. The Collins Owner Requirements Table (ORT) must updated with the latest version, ORT generation tool. (c) Maintenance Port Interface – Cooperative Mode The HSD transceiver has an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for data loading, system monitoring and testing purposes. Access to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 Maintenance Port. The HSD Maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the unit. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area. Note: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port—including, equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details. (d) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface – Cooperative Mode Several external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain), that must be delimited to ensure proper operation, dictate the HSD performance requirements. Table 3–23 defines these parameters and their expected values. Table 3–23. RF Parameters Definition – Cooperative Mode Parameter Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB) Antenna Gain 17 Antenna—DLNA Loss 0.1 0.3 DLNA Gain 53 60 DLNA Noise Figure 1.5 1.8 DLNA—HSD (Rx) Loss 25 Page 3–45 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–23. RF Parameters Definition – Cooperative Mode Parameter HSD—Antenna (Tx) Loss Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB) 2.5 DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna Port) – 0.8 (e) WOW Pin Wiring – Cooperative Mode In Cooperative Mode installations, WOW 2 discrete is re-assigned as Tx- Disable and is therefore not used. (f) Forward and Return Address IDs – Cooperative Mode Figure 3–13 provides an example of a Forward ID address. The Forward ID is a Hex number (example: $ABC123) that must be converted into a binary number for strapping. Page 3–46 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–13. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Cooperative Mode Note: A pin strapped to the same potential as T7K (Forward address common) is considered as a logical “0”, whereas an open circuit pin is considered as a logical “1”. Note: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit. Page 3–47 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (g) Remote Status Panel – Cooperative Mode (Optional) An optional “remote status panel” may be installed in installations where the HSD is located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a “remote status panel” is recommended as it provides visual indications of each of the power, fault, and call status of the HSD. Note: Cooperative Mode installations DO NOT support the use of the reset function. 1. HSD Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements – Cooperative Mode The circuit requirements for the HSD Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–14. Each LED driver circuit has a 200-ohm current limit resistor. The maximum cable resistance (including the forward and return paths) must not exceed 100 ohms to provide adequate current to the 5 volt LEDs (i.e. 10 mA minimum) at the remote status panel. It is recommended that the installer use shielded cables to provide a level of noise immunity. Figure 3–14. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Cooperative Mode (h) User Interfaces – Cooperative Mode To facilitate user access to the HSD interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area. Note: Although the Ethernet interface is only supported by HSD-X transceivers, HSD transceiver models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160, and other models of HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, consider pre-wiring the cabin for all interfaces—even when installing an HSD transceiver that currently does not support the Ethernet interface. Page 3–48 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 1. ISDN Interface Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface. "RJ-45 Connector Termination Details" on page 3-49 describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. 2. RS-232 Interface (MPDS) Install a DB9S interface connector in the cabin area for connection to the RS-232 interface. Refer to the HSD Interconnection Drawing for pinout designation. 3. Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceiver models, part numbers 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other models of HSD transceivers must have service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished to support the Ethernet interface. Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interface. "RJ-45 Connector Termination Details" on page 3-49 describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. 4. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details Details relating to the RJ-45 cable terminations, required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services, are shown in Table 3–24 and Figure 3–15. Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404(4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used. Table 3–24. RJ-45 Wiring Details – Cooperative Mode SERVICE EURO ISDN Signal Ethernet Cable 10BASE-T Cable Pin Pin ECS Other ECS Other RX + White White/Green White White/Orange stripe RX− Blue Green Green Orange/White stripe or solid Orange TX+ White Blue White White/Green stripe TX− Orange White/Blue Brown Green/White stripe or solid Green Page 3–49 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–15. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Cooperative Mode 5. System Configuration Pin Strapping – Cooperative Mode The HSD adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector. Configuration pins are assigned based on system-mode-configuration selection, and data input/output (I/O) requirements as shown in Table 3–25. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3–26 and Table 3–27. Table 3–25. Configuration Pin Summary – Cooperative Mode Pin # Name Function TP4A to D System Config #1 to #4 System Mode (See Table 3–26) TP4E to H System Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") MP5G to K Data I/O Config #1 to #4 NOTE: Data I/O Mode (See Table 3–27) MP6G to K Data I/O Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") Note: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Configuration pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (T7K). • Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configurations resulting in all “1’s” are invalid. 6. System Mode Strap Pins Coding – Cooperative Mode The HSD must be externally strapped as highlighted in Table 3–26; it illustrates the system pin strapping for operation in Cooperative Mode (with Collins SAT-906). Page 3–50 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–26. System Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative Mode Pin Status System Modes TP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D INVALID Stand Alone Selective, SAT-906 Selective, MCS-3000 Selective, MCS-6000 Selective, MCS-7000 Honeywell Combined Reserved Collins Cooperative Multi-Channel Note: The logic for the System Mode pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Mode pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (TP7K). • Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configuration resulting in all “1’s” is Invalid. 7. User Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative Mode Data I/O Mode Pin strapping is only required for HSD transceivers models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or other HSD models that have Data I/O Type 2 cards installed via Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004. The following settings allow placing restrictions on the way both channels are used. If the user has no specific requirements then it is recommended to leave both channels as “Unrestricted.” In HSD transceivers with two channel cards, both channels are accessible for Swift64 Mobile ISDN via the ISDN port on a first come-first served basis. All four modes, as detailed in Table 3–27, are also described in Figure 3–16. In units where all Data I/O services are available (including Ethernet), the following statements are valid: • The channel cards are pooled, which means that no particular card is operated in one of the selected modes. • If one channel card becomes inoperative, and there is a conflicting configuration (for example, 1 Reserved, 1 SCPC – for Swift64 Mobile ISDN), then the remaining card operates in "Unrestricted" mode. Page 3–51 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • A “restricted” channel is not handled by the Data I/O Controller, which results in the channel not being accessible for SCPC via Ethernet or for MPDS via RS232 or Ethernet. • An SCPC channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet. • An MPDS channel is accessible for MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet. • An “unrestricted” channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet and MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet. Note: Use a ”Restricted” Data I/O Mode if only ISDN service is available. Table 3–27. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Cooperative Mode Pin Status MP5G MP5H MP5J Data I/O Mode MP5K Invalid 1 Restricted, 1 Unrestricted 1 Restricted, 1 SCPC 1 Restricted, 1 MPDS 2 Restricted (ISDN only) 2 SCPC 1 SCPC, 1 Unrestricted 2 MPDS 1 MPDS, 1 Unrestricted 1 SCPC, 1 MPDS 2 Unrestricted (recommended if no specific user requirements) Reserved Note: (‘0’ = FWD Address Common, ‘1’ No Connection) Page 3–52 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–16. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Cooperative Mode (i) ARINC 429 IRS Bus Interface – Cooperative Mode Although the IRS bus connections are not required, the installation of provisional wiring for these connections is recommended. (j) Antenna Interface – Cooperative Mode The SAT-906 Aero H/H+ system provides the interface to the antenna. Refer to Rockwell Collins SAT-906 documentation for specific details. (k) RF Splitter Installation – Cooperative Mode Refer to Table 3–28 for a list of the required cable assembly parts. Substitutions using different parts of equivalent functionality are acceptable. Note: Before installing the RF splitter, read all of the steps included in the following splitter installation procedure. Note: Actual splitter mounting location may vary depending on the placement of the existing RFU and HPA assemblies. To install the RF Splitter: 1. Determine a suitable location near the RFU to secure the splitter. 2. Cut the receive coax cable at the splitter mounting location. 3. Re-terminate the cut ends with TNC coax connectors. Page 3–53 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. Connect the end coming from the antenna subsystem to the splitter input (S) connector. 5. Connect the end going to TPC1 of the RFU to one of the output ports of the splitter, one or two. 6. Run a new coax cable (length is installation specific) from the unused splitter output port to BP-12 of the ARINC 600 connector of the HSD tray assembly. Table 3–28. Receive Path Parts Requirements – Cooperative Mode Item EMS SATCOM PN Manufacturer PN Description RF Splitter ZAPD-2-TNC 32800004 Mini-Circuit, 2-way 0°, TNC, Splitter Receive Coax 432101 – ECS, Coax Cable, 0.130 O.D., 50Ω, 17.5 dB/100 ft @ 1.5 GHz Connector (@ Splitter) CTS522 – ECS, TNC, Straight Plug Connector (@ BP12) P522 – ECS, ARINC 600, Size 5, Socket (l) Cooperative Mode Connection Details The tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for Cooperative Mode installations. Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug I/O 1A to 1D Multi-Control IN and As per Collins BITE OUT documentation Multi-Control and BITE 2A BSU Top/Port BITE A SDU, MP7G ARINC Tx-HI BITE From Top/Port BSU 2B BSU Top/Port BITE B SDU, MP7H ARINC Tx-LO BITE From Top/Port BSU 2C BSU STBD BITE A Mechanically Steered1 ARINC Tx-HI BITE Antenna (MA): Not From STBD BSU required Other Antenna2 (OA): SDU, MP7J 2D BSU STBD BITE B MA: Not required OA: SDU, MP7K 2E OUT SDU Crosstalk SDU, MP12A ARINC 429 2F OUT SDU Crosstalk SDU, MP12B ARINC 429 Signal Name Page 3–54 18 September 2007 To Description ARINC Tx-LO BITE From STBD BSU SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description 2H IN SDU Crosstalk A SDU, MP12C ARINC 429 2J IN SDU Crosstalk B SDU, MP12D ARINC 429 3H Tx– disable SDU, MP5J ARINC Discrete, Tx disable 3A to 3D HPA MUTE MA: Not required As per Collins documentation HPA Mute-A &B to BSU 2K Remote System Reset Normally Open momentary switch— (Not supported in open side Cooperative Model) (Closed side to MP1F) 4A to 4D System Config 1 to 4 4A & 4B=0 (TP7K COM) System Mode – Collins 4C & 4D=1 (OPEN) Cooperative Remote Reset 4E to 4H System Config 5 to 8 Open (1) System Mode configuration – not assigned 4J IRS-A Aircraft main IRS IRS Data, Rx HI (Provisional) 4K IRS-B Aircraft main IRS IRS Data, Rx LO (Provisional) 5A, 5B, & SDI 1, SDI 2, & SDI As per Collins 5D Common documentation HPA Select Code for HGA Page 3–55 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name 5F FWD Address, BIT 24 (LSB) 5G FWD Address, BIT 23 5H FWD Address, BIT 22 5J FWD Address, BIT 21 5K FWD Address, BIT 20 6A FWD Address, BIT 19 6B FWD Address, BIT 18 6C FWD Address, BIT 17 6D FWD Address, BIT 16 6E FWD Address, BIT 15 6F FWD Address, BIT 14 6G FWD Address, BIT 13 6H FWD Address, BIT 12 6J FWD Address, BIT 11 6K FWD Address, BIT 10 7A FWD Address, BIT 9 Page 3–56 18 September 2007 To 1=no connection, 0=Common (TP7K) Description Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat /EMS SATCOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–29. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Top Plug Connection Details I/O From Top Plug Signal Name 7B FWD Address, BIT 8 7C FWD Address, BIT 7 7D FWD Address, BIT 6 7E FWD Address, BIT 5 7F FWD Address, BIT 4 7G FWD Address, BIT 3 7H FWD Address, BIT 2 7J FWD Address, BIT 1 (MSB) 7K FWD Address, Common To Description Common GND connection for system and I/O configuration and FWD ID 1. BSU Pin nomenclature for Mechanically-Steered Antennae (MA) is manufacturer dependent. 2. “Other antenna types” (OA) represent either conformal or phased array antennae. Table 3–30. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name I/O Description 1A LED 1 Remote Status Panel— HSD—Power On Green (Optional) 1B LED 2 Remote Status Panel— HSD—Fault (Optional) Red 1F LED Common Remote Status LED Panel and closed side of N.O. Remote Reset switch (if used) LED Common 1G Maint Port Tx (Out) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2 1H Maint Port Rx (In) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3 Maintenance Laptop/PC, for Remote access 1J Maint Port Signal GND Maint Port serial data, DB9S-5 I/O To Page 3–57 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–30. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To 2A Channel Card (CC) #1 Rx DTE-1A, DB9S-2 2B CC #1 Tx DTE-1A, DB9S-3 2C CC #1 RTS DTE-1A, DB9S-7 O 2D CC #1 CTS DTE-1A, DB9S-8 2E CC #1 DTR DTE-1A, DB9S-4 O 2F CC #1 DSR DTE-1A, DB9S-6 O 2G CC #1 DCD DTE-1A, DB9S-1 O 2H CC #1 RI DTE-1A, DB9S-9 I/O 2J CC #1 SGND DTE-1A, DB9S-5 4G BRI RX+ RJ45-3 4H BRI RX- RJ45-6 O 4J BRI TX+ RJ45-4 O 4K BRI TX- RJ45-5 6A BRI RX+ RJ45-3 6B BRI RX- RJ45-6 O 6C BRI TX+ RJ45-4 O 6D BRI TX- RJ45-5 Description User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1A User Data, ISDN–2 (Provisional) Refer to "User Interfaces – Cooperative Mode" on page 3-48 User Data, ISDN–1 Refer to "User Interfaces – Cooperative Mode" on page 3-48 5G to 5K I/O CONFIG Pins 1 See Table 3–26 to 4 System Data I/O Mode Configurations 6G to 6K I/O CONFIG Pins 5 Open (1) to 8 Data I/O Config – not assigned Page 3–58 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–30. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connection Details From Middle Plug I/O Signal Name To Description 7A 10BASE-T Rx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3 User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-T 7B 10BASE-T Rx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6 7C 10BASE-T Tx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1 7D 10BASE-T Tx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2 (Available in models 1110-A-0150, 1110-A-0160, and in units with Service Bulletin, 1110-SB-0004 accomplished) C1 RF Tx Output Antenna Subsystem-DLNA Coax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–31. Cooperative Mode ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connection Details From I/O Bottom Plug Signal Name To Description +28 V dc HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT +28 V dc supply +28 V dc Rtn GND Aircraft Power Source, Rtn Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis Ground 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT 115 V ac 400 Hz supply 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLD 12 RF Rx Input RF Rx Splitter output port RF Receive from Antenna Subsystem Note: At SDU#1, connect TP12E to GND D. Section IV: Multi-Channel Configuration Installation (1) Multi-Channel Configuration Installation Wiring Notes This section provides detailed information on the external interface and system connections involved in the installation of an HSD-128 and HSD-X transceivers for Multi-Channel configuration operation. Table 3–33, Table 3–34, Table 3–35, and Figure 3–38 illustrate the interconnection and contact assignment details of a Multi-Channel HSD configuration. This section provides detailed information on cable loss considerations, the splitter for the receive path, and the combiner for the transmit path. Page 3–59 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (a) Multi-Channel Coaxial Cable Loss Considerations – Multi-Channel When installing a Multi-Channel HSD configuration, the transmit loss between the HSD-X slaves and the HSD-128 master must be considered. This loss, taking into consideration the cables, the combiner, and the attenuator, should come as close as possible to 29.5 dB (as shown in Table 3–32). For an illustrated example, refer to Figure 3–17. Table 3–32. Coax Cable Losses – Multi-Channel Item Loss (dB) Cable, HSD-X to combiner Combiner 3.5 Cable, combiner to attenuator Attenuator 20 Cable, attenuator to HSD-128 Total: 29.5 Note: The installer should try to achieve 29.5 dB loss; ± 3 dB for all HSD-X slaves. (See Figure 3–17.) The loss is generally referred to as “HSD-X cable loss”, even though it includes the combiner and attenuator. Figure 3–17. HSD-X Coax Cable Loss After installation, the actual calculated (or measured) loss between each HSD-X and the HSD should be included in the HSD-128 ORT or EEPROM configuration. Page 3–60 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (b) HSD-128 Transceiver Multi-Channel Configuration Installations The tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug, connection details for Stand-Alone Mode installations for the HSD-128 transceiver—specific to Multi-Channel HSD configurations. This section describes the general installation details and external interface connections that are the same for all operational modes and configurations of HSD and HSD-X transceivers. (c) Source/Destination Identification (SDI) – Multi-Channel Source/Destination Identification (SDI) is provided for the BSU and the HPA as per ARINC 741 specifications. Pins marked “0” are left open circuit and pins marked “1” are strapped on the airframe side of the connector to the pin assigned as “SDI Common” (TP5D). For this High Gain Antenna (HGA) HPA application, pin TP5B (“1”) should be strapped and TP5A (“0”) should be left open. Note: The logic for the SDI/WOW is explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. This SDI/WOW logic, where 0=open and 1=strapped to common, is the reverse to the logic applied to all other HSD and HSD-X connectors, Forward ID, System Config, and Data I/O Config, where 0=strapped to common and 1=open. (d) Maintenance Port Interface – Multi-Channel Both HSD and HSD-X transceivers have an RS-232 Maintenance Port interface that provides access to a maintenance utility program for data loading, system monitoring and testing purposes. Access to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program is achieved by connecting an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) to the RS-232 Maintenance Port. The HSD Maintenance port is available at the front of the HSD and at the rear ARINC 600 connector. Connection on the front of the HSD is accessible via a DB25S connector for local maintenance of the unit. Remote access is provided for cases where local access is unavailable. For remote access, install an accessible DB9S connector in the cabin area. Direct connection to the HSD-X’s front panel, maintenance port requires an HSD-X maintenance port cable. The front connector, maintenance port supports trace and data load functions and is a female, micro-D-type, M83513/04-B11N, or equivalent. As well, a permanent connector wired to the rear, middle-plug, of the ARINC-600 connector can be installed for remote access. Specifications and pinouts for this cable are provided in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. Note: The front panel and remote connections to the maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for information on how to connect and use the maintenance port—including, equipment requirements, connection and cabling requirements, software loading instructions, and configuration details. Page 3–61 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (e) Antenna Subsystem RF Interface – Multi-Channel Several external RF parameters (such as cable losses and antenna gain), that must be delimited to ensure proper operation, dictate the HSD performance requirements. Table 3–33 defines these parameters and their expected values. Table 3–33. RF Parameters Definition – Multi-Channel Parameter (f) Min. Value (dB) Max. Value (dB) Antenna Gain 17 Antenna—DLNA Loss 0.1 0.3 DLNA Gain 53 60 DLNA Noise Figure 1.5 1.8 DLNA—HSD-128 (BP12), including cables and splitter (Rx) Total Loss 19 DLNA—HSD-X (BP5), including cables and splitter (Rx) Total Loss 24 HSD-128—Antenna (Tx) Loss 2.5 DLNA Insertion Loss (Tx to Antenna – Port) 0.8 WOW Pin Wiring – Multi-Channel These Weight-On-Wheel (WOW) discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)]. WOW wiring, for the HSD, is optional for system operation as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero. The WOW1 and WOW2 pins are either left open circuit or they are connected to the airframe DC ground. The WOW Program Select (PGM) pin is either left open circuit or is connected to the Forward Address Common. The three ground states, defined for any pin are: • OPN: Open circuit • AFG: Airframe DC Ground • FAC: Fwd Address Common (TP7K) Resolve any conflict between WOW1 and WOW2 by assuming the aircraft is “in-air.” The interpretation of the state of the WOW1 and WOW2 pins is defined by the state of the WOW program select pin. Refer to Table 3–34 for details. 1. Multi-Channel Configurations Labeled as WOW1, WOW2, and WOW Program Select, these discretes are wired only if equivalent information is not strapped as being available to the SDU on an ARINC 429 input [for example, IRS or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS)]. Page 3–62 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal WOW wiring is optional for system operation in Stand-Alone Mode installations as the HSD already receives speed information for Doppler correction. However, if WOW wiring is not wired, normal maintenance must be disabled when speed or Doppler readings are greater than zero. Table 3–34. WOW Pin Wiring Table – Multi-Channel Pin Name and Location WOW1 WOW2 PGM TP3G TP3H TP3J Aircraft Status AFG AFG FAC In-air OPN AFG FAC Not valid – Default in-air AFG OPN FAC Not valid – Default in-air OPN OPN FAC On-ground AFG AFG OPN On-ground OPN AFG OPN Not valid – Default in-air AFG OPN OPN Not valid – Default in-air OPN OPN OPN In-air (g) Forward and Return Address IDs – Multi-Channel Figure 3–18 provides an example of a Forward ID address. The Forward ID is a Hex number (example: $ABC123) that must be converted into a binary number for strapping. Page 3–63 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–18. Forward ID, Hex to Binary Conversion – Multi-Channel Note: A pin strapped to the same potential as T7K (Forward address common) is considered as a logical “0”, whereas an open circuit pin is considered as a logical “1”. Page 3–64 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Note: MSB is the Most Significant Bit and LSB is the Least Significant Bit. (h) Remote Status Panel – Multi-Channel (Optional) An optional “remote status panel” may be installed in installations where the HSD and/or any HSD-X units are located in inaccessible or remote locations. The installation of a “remote status panel” is recommended as it provides visual indications of each of the power, fault, and call status of each of the units. A “remote reset switch” for HSD transceivers can also be installed and located with the Remote Status Panel. Figure 3–19 illustrates a typical wiring diagram for the remote reset circuit. Note: HSD-X transceivers DO NOT support the use of the reset function. 1. HSD Remote Reset Switch Circuit Requirements HSD transceivers support the installation of a Remote Reset Switch circuit as shown in Figure 3–19. The HSD Remote Reset circuit requires less than 100 ohms between TP1K (RESET) and MP1F(COM) to be asserted and greater than 10 kilohms to be de-asserted (include all cable and switch contact resistance). 2. HSD Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements The circuit requirements for the HSD Remote Status LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–20. Each LED driver circuit has a 200-ohm current limit resistor. The maximum cable resistance (including the forward and return paths) must not exceed 100 ohms to provide adequate current to the 5 volt LEDs (i.e. 10 mA minimum) at the remote status panel. It is recommended that the installer use shielded cables to provide a level of noise immunity. 3. HSD-X Remote LED Driver Circuit Requirements The HSD-X unit’s Remote LED drivers are shown in Figure 3–21. The open collector transistors located in the HSD-X are capable of driving up to 500 mA of current—so either incandescent lamps or LED circuits with the appropriate current limits can be used. The example shown in Figure 3–21 shows an LED powered with a 28-volt source. Page 3–65 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–19. HSD Remote Reset Circuit – Multi-Channel Figure 3–20. HSD Remote LED Panel Circuit – Multi-Channel Figure 3–21. HSD-X Remote Status LED Driver Circuits – Multi-Channel Page 3–66 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (i) User Interfaces – Multi-Channel To facilitate user access to the HSD interfaces, install the following connectors in the appropriate cabin area. Note: Although the Ethernet interface is only supported by HSD-X transceivers, HSD transceiver models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160, and other models of HSD transceivers with service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished, consider pre-wiring the cabin for all interfaces—even when installing an HSD transceiver that currently does not support the Ethernet interface. 1. ISDN Interface Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user connections to the ISDN interface. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details below describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. 2. RS-232 Interface (MPDS) Install a DB9S interface connector in the cabin area for connection to the RS-232 interface. Refer to the HSD Interconnection Drawings for pinout designation. 3. Ethernet Data Interface HSD transceiver models, part numbers 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 support the Ethernet interface. All other models of HSD transceivers must have service bulletin 1110-SB-0004 accomplished to support the Ethernet interface. All HSD-X transceivers support the Ethernet Data Interface. Install an RJ-45 interface connector in the cabin area for user access to the Ethernet interface. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details below describes the RJ-45 connector and cable termination. 4. RJ-45 Connector Termination Details Details relating to the RJ-45 cable terminations, required for both the ISDN and/or 10BASE-T services, are shown in Table 3–35 and Figure 3–22. Use LAN cables that meet flammability and TIA/EIA568-A CAT-5 requirements. Cables #922404(4 conductor) and # 922408 (8 conductor), as supplied by Electronics Cable Specialists, are acceptable. Equivalent substitutions from other manufacturers may be used. Page 3–67 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–35. RJ-45 Wiring Details – Multi-Channel SERVICE EURO ISDN Signal Ethernet 10BASE-T Cable Cable Pin Pin ECS Other ECS Other RX + White White/Green 3 White White/Orange stripe RX− Blue Green Green Orange/White stripe or solid Orange TX+ White Blue White White/Green stripe TX− Orange White/Blue Brown Green/White stripe or solid Green Figure 3–22. RJ-45 Connector Terminator Details – Multi-Channel 5. System Configuration Pin Strapping – Multi-Channel The HSD adjusts its configuration according to the status of several strap pins on the rear ARINC 600 connector. Configuration pins are assigned based on system-mode-configuration selection and data input/output (I/O) requirements as shown in Table 3–36. Detailed pin assignment is shown in Table 3–37 and Table 3–38. Page 3–68 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–36. Configuration Pin Summary – Multi-Channel Pin # Name Function TP4A to D System Config #1 to #4 System Mode (See Table 3–27) TP4E to H System Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") MP5G to K Data I/O Config #1 to #4 NOTE: Data I/O Mode (See Table 3–28) MP6G to K Data I/O Config #5 to #8 Not assigned (set to"1") Note: The logic for the System Configuration pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Configuration pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (T7K). • Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configurations resulting in all “1’s” are invalid. 6. System Mode Strap Pins Coding – Multi-Channel The HSD transceiver must be externally strapped according to its intended operational configuration mode. Table 3–37 illustrates the system pin strapping for all HSD operational modes and configurations. Table 3–37. System Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-Channel Pin Status System Modes TP4A TP4B TP4C TP4D INVALID Stand Alone Selective, SAT-906 Selective, MCS-3000 Selective, MCS-6000 Selective, MCS-7000 Honeywell Combined Reserved Collins Cooperative Multi-Channel Note: The logic for the System Mode pins is reverse to the logic explained in ARINC 741 Characteristic Attachment 1-4, Note 19. For System Mode pins, 0=strapped to common and 1=open. • Pins marked “0” are signaled by strapping to “Fwd Address Common” (TP7K). Page 3–69 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • Pins marked “1” are signaled by an open circuit—no connection. • Configuration resulting in all “1’s” is Invalid. 7. User Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-Channel Data I/O Mode Pin strapping is only required for HSD transceivers models, PN 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or other HSD models that have Data I/O Type 2 cards installed via Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0004. The following settings allow placing restrictions on the way both channels are used. If the user has no specific requirements then it is recommended to leave both channels as “Unrestricted.” In HSD transceivers with two channel cards, both channels are accessible for Swift64 Mobile ISDN via the ISDN port on a first come-first served basis. All four modes, as detailed in Table 3–38, are also described in Figure 3–23. In units where all Data I/O services are available (including Ethernet), the following statements are valid: • The channel cards are pooled, which means that no particular card is operated in one of the selected modes. • If one channel card becomes inoperative, and there is a conflicting configuration (for example, 1 Reserved, 1 SCPC – for Swift64 Mobile ISDN), then the remaining card operates in "Unrestricted" mode. • A “restricted” channel is not handled by the Data I/O Controller, which results in the channel not being accessible for SCPC via Ethernet or for MPDS via RS232 or Ethernet. • An SCPC channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet. • An MPDS channel is accessible for MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet. • An “unrestricted” channel is accessible for SCPC via Ethernet and MPDS via RS232 and Ethernet. Note: Use a ”Restricted” Data I/O Mode if only ISDN service is available. Page 3–70 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–38. Data I/O Mode Pin Strapping – Multi-Channel Pin Status MP5G MP5H MP5J Data I/O Mode MP5K Invalid 1 Restricted, 1 Unrestricted 1 Restricted, 1 SCPC 1 Restricted, 1 MPDS 2 Restricted (ISDN only) 2 SCPC 1 SCPC, 1 Unrestricted 2 MPDS 1 MPDS, 1 Unrestricted 1 SCPC, 1 MPDS 2 Unrestricted (recommended if no specific user requirements) Reserved Note: (‘0’ = FWD Address Common, ‘1’ No Connection) Page 3–71 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–23. User Data I/O Mode Configurations – Multi-Channel (j) Multi-Channel Configuration Connection Details The tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug connection details for Multi-Channel Configuration installations of HSD-128 transceivers and HSD-X transceiver extensions. Page 3–72 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–39. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Top Plug Connections I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description I 1A Multi-control A TP3E Multi-control from control card I 1B Multi-control B TP3F Multi-control from control card I 2A BSU Top/Port BITE A (See Note 1) Mech. Steered Antenna ARINC Tx-HI BITE from (MA): BSU, Pin G1 or W or Top/Port BSU Other Antenna2 (OA): BSU, PORT-W & Starboard-P I 2B BSU Top/Port BITE B MA: BSU, Pin H or X, or OA: BSU, PORT-X & STBD-R ARINC Tx-LO BITE from Top/Port BSU I 2C BSU Starboard (STBD) BITE A MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-P & STBD-W ARINC Tx-HI BITE from STBD BSU I 2D BSU STBD BITE MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-R & STBD-X ARINC Tx-LO BITE from STBD BSU I 3A Top/Port HPA MUTE A MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-G HPA Mute-A, Port BSU I 3B Top/Port HPA MUTE B MA: Not required OA: BSU, PORT-H HPA Mute-B, Port BSU I 3C STBD HPA MUTE A MA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD G HPA Mute-A, STBD BSU I 3D STBD HPA MUTE B MA: Not required OA: BSU, STBD-H HPA Mute-B, STBD BSU O 3E OUT Multi-Control A IN Multi Ctrl A (TP1A), and Multi-Control-HI to HSD & MA: BSU, Pin A or T, or Antenna Subsystem OA: BSU, PORT-T & STBD-T O 2E A OUT All slave HSD-Xs TP6A ARINC 429 Tx-HI HSD-X crosstalk broadcast O 2F B OUT All slave HSD-Xs TP6B ARINC 429 Tx-Lo HSD-X crosstalk broadcast I 2H A IN HSD-X slave 1 TP6C ARINC 429 Tx-HI HSD-X crosstalk chain I 2J B IN HSD-X slave 1 TP6D ARINC 429 Tx-Lo HSD-X crosstalk chain Page 3–73 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–39. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Top Plug Connections I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description O 3F OUT Multi-Control B IN Multi Ctrl B (TP1B), and Multi-Control-LO to HSD MA: BSU, Pin B or U, or & Antenna Subsystem OA: BSU, PORT-U & STBD-U I 2K Remote Reset I 3G I 3H WOW 1 Normally open Remote System Reset momentary switch—open side. (Closed side to MP1F) TP3G Weight On Wheel, as defined in Note 40 of TP3H ARINC 741, Part 1. TP3J WOW 2 I 3J WOW Program Select I 4A, 4B, 4C, 4D System Config 1 4A, 4B, & 4C=0 (TP7K to 4 common) 4D=1(Open) Multi-Channel Mode Configurations I 4E to 4H System Config 5 Open (1) to 8 System Configuration not assigned I 4J IRS-A Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx HI I 4K IRS-B Aircraft main IRS IRS 429 Data, Rx LO I 5A SDI 1 Not connected HPA Select Code for HGA I 5B SDI 2 SDI common (TP5D) HPA Select Code for HGA I 5D SDI Common SDI 2 (TP5B) I 5F I 5G FWD Address, BIT 24 (LSB) FWD Address, 1=no connection, 0=Common (TP7K) SDI Common for HPA select codes Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat /EMS SATCOM I 5H FWD Address, I 5J FWD Address, I 5K FWD Address, BIT 20 I 6A FWD Address, I 6B FWD Address, I 6C FWD Address, I 6D FWD Address, I 6E FWD Address, Page 3–74 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–39. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Top Plug Connections From Top Plug I/O Signal Name I 6F FWD Address, I 6G FWD Address, I 6H FWD Address, I 6J FWD Address, I 6K FWD Address, I 7A FWD Address, I 7B FWD Address, I 7C FWD Address, I 7D FWD Address, I 7E FWD Address, I 7F FWD Address, I 7G FWD Address, I 7H FWD Address, I 7J FWD Address, BIT 1 (MSB) I 7K FWD Address, Common I C1 RF in Tx 1BSU To Attenuator, from HSD-X slaves Description Common GND connection for system and I/O configuration and Coax Cable, RF Transmit Pin nomenclature for Mechanically-Steered Antennae (MA) is manufacturer dependent. antenna types” (OA) represent either conformal or phased array antennae. 2“Other Table 3–40. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration, ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connections I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To Description O 1A LED 1 Remote Status Panel— Green HSD—Power On O 1B LED 2 Remote Status Panel— Red HSD—Fault Page 3–75 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–40. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration, ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connections I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To Description O 1F LED Common Remote Status LED LED Common Panel, and closed side of N.O. Remote Reset Switch O 1G Maint Port Tx (OUT) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2 1H Maint Port Rx (IN) Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3 I/ 1J O 3A Maint Port Signal Maint Port serial data, Ground. DB9S-5 CC (channel card)#2 Rx DTE-1B, DB9S-2 or DB25P-3 3B CC #2 Tx DTE-1B, DB9S-3 or DB25P-2 3C CC #2 RTS DTE-1B, DB9S-7 or DB25P-4 O 3D CC #2 CTS DTE-1B, DB9S-8 or DB25P-5 3E CC #2 DTR DTE-1B, DB9S-4 or DB25P-20 O 3F CC #2 DSR DTE-1B, DB9S-6 or DB25P-6 O 3G CC #2 CD DTE-1B, DB9S-1 or DB25P-8 O 3H CC #2 RI DTE-1B, DB9S-9 or DB25P-22 I/ 3J I 4G CC #2 SGND DTE-1B, DB9S-5 or DB25P-7 BRI Rx+ ISDN, RJ45-3 4H BRI Rx- ISDN, RJ45-6 O 4J BRI Tx+ ISDN, RJ45-4 O 4K BRI Tx- ISDN, RJ45-5 5G to 5K I/O CONFIG Pins See Figure 3–8 1 to 4 Page 3–76 18 September 2007 Maintenance computer, for “Remote” access User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1B User Data, ISDN–2 Refer to "User Interfaces – Multi-Channel" on page 3-67 System Data I/O Mode Configurations SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–40. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration, ARINC 600 Middle Plug Connections From Middle Plug I/O Signal Name To 6G to 6K I/O CONFIG 5 to 8 Open (1) 6A BRI Rx+ ISDN, RJ45-3 6B BRI Rx - ISDN, RJ45-6 O 6C O 6D BRI Tx+ ISDN, RJ45-4 BRI Tx- ISDN, RJ45-5 Description System Data I/O Configurations – not assigned 7A 10BASE-T Rx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3 7B 10BASE-T Rx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6 O 7C 10BASE-T Tx+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1 O 7D 10BASE-T Tx- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2 O C1 RF, Tx Output Antenna Subsystem-DLNA-J3 User Data, ISDN–1 Refer to "User Interfaces – Multi-Channel" on page 3-67 User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-T Coax Cable, RF Transmit Table 3–41. HSD-128 Multi-Channel Configuration ARINC 600 Bottom Plug Connections From I/O Bottom Plug Signal Name To Aircraft Power Source, HOT Description +28 V dc HOT +28 V dc supply +28 V dc return GND Aircraft Power Source, return Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis Ground 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT 115 V ac 400 Hz supply 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLD 12 RF Rx Input Splitter output from Antenna Subsystem –DLNA Coax Cable, RF Receive Page 3–77 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (k) HSD-X Installations – Multi-Channel The tables in this section provide all top, middle, and bottom plug, connection details for of HSD-Xs integrated with the HSD-128 transceiver in Multi-Channel configurations. Table 3–42. HSD-X Top Plug Connections I/O From Top Plug Signal Name To Description 4A, 4B, System 4A, 4B, 4C, 4D = 1 (Open) System Configuration 4C, 4D Configuration 1 to 4 Reserved 6A HSD-X/HSD I/F Bus A In HSD-128 Master TP2E ARINC 429 Rx-HI Master Crosstalk Broadcast 6B HSD-X/HSD I/F Bus B In HSD-128 Master TP2F ARINC 429 Rx-LO Master Crosstalk Broadcast 6C HSD-X/HSD I/F Bus A Out Refer to the interconnection diagram 1110-B-0419 ARINC 429 Tx-HI HSD-X Crosstalk Ring 6D HSD-X/HSD I/F Bus B Out Refer to the interconnection diagram 1110-B-0419 ARINC 429 Tx-LO HSD-X Crosstalk Ring 8A Input Bus A In Refer to the interconnection diagram 1110-B-0419 ARINC 429 Rx-HI HSD-X Crosstalk Ring 8B Input Bus B In Refer to the interconnection diagram 1110-B-0419 ARINC 429 Rx-LO HSD-X Crosstalk Ring 9D Fwd ID Common 10A Fwd ID #1 (MSB) 10B Fwd ID #2 10C Fwd ID #3 10D Fwd ID #4 11A Fwd ID #5 11B Fwd ID #6 11C Fwd ID #7 11D Fwd ID #8 12A Fwd ID #9 12B Fwd ID #10 12C Fwd ID #11 Common GND connection for system, I/O configuration, and FWD ID Page 3–78 18 September 2007 1 = no connection, 0 = common (TP9D) Six digit Hex ID assigned by Inmarsat / EMS SATCOM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–42. HSD-X Top Plug Connections I/O From Top Plug Signal Name 12D Fwd ID #12 13A Fwd ID #13 13B Fwd ID #14 13C Fwd ID #15 13D Fwd ID #16 14A Fwd ID #17 14B Fwd ID #18 14C Fwd ID #19 14D Fwd ID #20 15A Fwd ID #21 15B Fwd ID #22 15C Fwd ID #23 15D Fwd ID #24 (LSB) To Description Figure 3–24. HSD-X Top Plug Connections (Illustrated) Page 3–79 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–43. HSD-X Middle Plug Connections– Multi-Channel I/O From Middle Plug Signal Name To Description 1A Maint Port Tx Maint Port serial data, DB9S-2 1B Maint Port Rx Maint Port serial data, DB9S-3 1C Maint Port GND Maint Port serial data, DB9S-5 1D MPDS SGND DTE-1, DB9S-5 or DB25P-7 2A MPDS Rx DTE-1, DB9S-2 or DB25P-3 2B MPDS Tx DTE-1, DB9S-3 or DB25P-2 2C MPDS RTS DTE-1, DB9S-7 or DB25P-4 2D MPDS CTS DTE-1, DB9S-8 or DB25P-5 3C MPDS DTR DTE-1, DB9S-4 or DB25P-20 3D MPDS DSR DTE-1, DB9S-6 or DB25P-6 4C MPDS CD DTE-1, DB9S-1 or DB25P-8 4D MPDS RI DTE-1, DB9S-9 or DB25P-22 O 10A Channel Available Discrete Channel Available O 10B Service Ready Discrete System ready 10C HSD-X Fail Discrete An “ON” state indicates that the HSD-X LRU has failed 10D Transmit Disable Discrete An “ON” state commands the HSD-X LRU to turn off its transmit carrier. 11A to 11C I/O Config 1 to 3 As per 245 System Data I/O Mode Configurations 13A ISDN BRI RX+ ISDN, RJ45-3 13B ISDN BRI RX- ISDN, RJ45-6 O 13C ISDN BRI TX+ ISDN, RJ45-4 User Data, ISDN-1 Refer to "User Interfaces – Multi-Channel" on page 3-67 O 13D ISDN BRI TX- ISDN, RJ45-5 Page 3–80 18 September 2007 Maintenance Computer, for “Remote” access, RS-232 User Mobile Packet Data (MPDS), RS-232, DTE-1A SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–43. HSD-X Middle Plug Connections– Multi-Channel From Middle Plug I/O Signal Name To Description 15A 10BASE-T RX+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-3 15B 10BASE-T RX- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-6 15C 10BASE-T TX+ Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-1 15D 10BASE-T TX- Ethernet 10BASE-T, RJ45-2 User Data, Ethernet 10BASE-T Table 3–44. HSD-X Bottom Plug – Multi-Channel From I/O Bottom Plug Signal Name To Description RF, Tx Output Combiner to HSD-128 Coax Cable, RF Transmit 115 V ac HOT Aircraft Power Source, HOT 115 V ac 400 Hz supply Chassis GND Aircraft Ground Aircraft Chassis Ground 115 V ac COLD Aircraft Power Source, COLD 115 V ac 400 Hz supply RF Rx Input Splitter from Antenna Subsystem-DLNA Coax Cable, RF Receive Table 3–45. HSD-X I/O Data Strapping– Multi-Channel MP11A MP11B MP11C I/O Config Invalid Restricted (disable Data I/O) MPDS (Future) SCPC (M4) only Unrestricted (recommended if there are no specific user requirements) Not Assigned Not Assigned Reserved Note: MP11D: Reserved, 0 = FWD Address Comm Page 3–81 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 3–46. Inter-LRU RF Connection Considerations for Attenuators– Multi-Channel Function From To Frequency (MHz) Loss VSWR HSD-X1 Tx HSD-X1 BP1 HSD-128 TPC1 1626.5-1660.5 29.5dB ± 1.5:1, max 3.0dB HSD-X2 Tx HSD-X2 BP1 HSD-128 TPC1 1626.5-1660.5 29.5dB ± 1.5:1, max 3.0dB HSD-X1 Rx DLNA HSD-X1 BP5 1525.0-1559.0 5.0dB to 1.5:1, max 24.0dB HSD-X2 Rx DLNA HSD-X2 BP5 1525.0-1559.0 5.0dB to 1.5:1, max 24.0 dB HSD-128 Rx DLNA Page 3–82 18 September 2007 HSD-128 BP12 1525.0-1559.0 0.0dB to 1.5:1, max 19.0dB SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 9. Outline/Installation and Interconnection/Contact Assignment Diagrams This section contains the outline and installation drawings and interconnection and contact assignment diagrams for all installation modes and configurations of HSD and HSD-X transceivers. All foldout pages are odd-numbered and “not-backed” for print production purposes. A. Outline/Installation Diagrams Figure 3–25 and Figure 3–26 illustrate the physical characteristics of the HSD transceiver and provides installation data for the unit. Figure 3–27 and Figure 3–28 illustrate the physical characteristics of the HSD-X transceiver and provides installation data for the unit. B. Interconnection/Contact Assignment Drawings Figure 3–29 illustrates the interconnection details for Stand-Alone Mode HSD Transceivers. Figure 3–30 provides the contact assignments for Stand-Alone Mode HSD Transceivers. Figure 3–31 illustrates the interconnection details for Combined/Selective Mode HSD Transceivers. Figure 3–32 provides the contact assignments for Combined/Selective Mode HSD Transceivers. Figure 3–33 illustrates the interconnection details for Cooperative Mode HSD Transceivers. Figure 3–34 provides the contact assignments for Cooperative Mode HSD Transceivers. Figure 3–35 and Figure 3–36 illustrate the interconnection details for Multi-Channel HSD configurations. Figure 3–37 and Figure 3–38 provide the contact assignments for Multi-Channel HSD configurations. Page 3–83 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Blank Page Page 3–84 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–25 (Sheet 1). HSD Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0001, Rev D Page 3–85 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–26 (Sheet 2). HSD Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0001, Rev D Page 3–87 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–27 (Sheet 1). HSD-X Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0401, Rev 1 Page 3–89 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–28 (Sheet 2). HSD-X Outline and Installation Drawing - 1110-E-0401, Rev 1 Page 3–91 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–29 (Sheet 1). Stand-Alone Mode HSD System Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0019, Rev F Page 3–93 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–30 (Sheet 2). Stand-Alone Mode HSD System Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0019, Rev F Page 3–95 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–31 (Sheet 1). HSD Selective/Combined Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0081, Rev D Page 3–97 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–32 (Sheet 2). HSD Selective/Combined Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0081, Rev D Page 3–99 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–33 (Sheet 1). HSD Cooperative Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0156, Rev 3 Page 3–101 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–34 (Sheet 2). HSD Cooperative Mode Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0156, Rev 3 Page 3–103 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–35 (Sheet 1). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C Page 3–105 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–36. (Sheet 2). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C Page 3–107 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–37 (Sheet 3). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C Page 3–109 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 3–38 (Sheet 4). HSD-128 Multi-Channel Interconnection Diagram - 1110-B-0419, Rev C Page 3–111 / blank back 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal TEST AND FAULT ISOLATION 1. Introduction This section provides the information required to determine the operational readiness of the HSD and HSD-X transceivers and to aid service personnel in diagnosing system faults. The operational and diagnostic tests described in this section require using the HSD and HSD-X transceivers built-in diagnostic tool referred to as the HSD maintenance utility program. This section provides detailed descriptions of the HSD maintenance utility program menus, reports, and basic user instructions. Refer to page "HSD Maintenance Utility Program" on page 4-3 for maintenance port cabling details. Note: Depending on the version of software installed, the maintenance utility program report and menu screens displayed may differ from those shown as examples in this manual. Page 4–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 2. Operational and Diagnostic Testing A. General Usually, units require testing for one of the reasons listed below: • To verify the operational readiness of the unit during and after installation on an aircraft. • To verify that a fault exists and produce system reports for troubleshooting purposes. • To verify the operational readiness of repaired LRUs during re-installation on an aircraft. This section presents software loading and test and fault isolation procedures for the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. All test and load procedures require using the HSD maintenance utility program, which is accessed by connecting to the maintenance port of the unit. B. Test and Fault Isolation Equipment Requirements Table 4–1 lists the equipment required to access the HSD maintenance utility program and perform operational and diagnostic testing and software loads on the HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Table 4–2 lists the optional equipment or information that, although not required, may increase test efficiency or allow for optional diagnostic procedures. Equivalent substitutions may be used. Table 4–1. List of Required Test Equipment Item Equipment Specification Quantity Computer Standard VT-100 terminal emulation program HyperTerminal©, Serial communication ProComm Plus©, or program using an RS-232 port equivalent Cable, maintenance port interface cable Special HSD units (See Figure 4–3) HSD-X units (See Figure 4–4) Remote access: maximum length 25 ft (Measured from the ARINC 600 connector to the DB9 breakout connector) Front Panel access: maximum length 50 ft Multimeter Standard – General purpose toolset Standard – Software load program Special PN 1110-SW-1021 HSD/HSD-X software files As specified in applicable service bulletins As required Page 4–2 18 September 2007 Special VT-100 386 CPU, 20-MHz or 1 higher SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–2. List of Optional Test Equipment Item Equipment Specification Quantity Service Provider Information Package Special Inmarsat service provider Internet access Standard Inmarsat Swift64 high-speed-data High speed data terminal Special Setup Guide MN-1110-10048 Time Domain Refectometer – Standard C. HSD Maintenance Utility Program This section describes the HSD maintenance port utility program and provides the connection and cabling details required to access and use the program. (1) General Overview A maintenance utility program, built into the HSD and HSD-X transceiver’s operational software, provides a system interface for fault isolation and diagnostic procedures. Connection to this program is made through the RS-232 maintenance port interface. To use the HSD Maintenance Utility Program, an RS-232, VT-100 terminal (PC or Laptop operating a terminal emulation program) must be connected to the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. The maintenance port on the front panel of HSD transceivers provides a direct connection to the HSD maintenance utility program using a DB25S connector. Optionally, remote cabin access is possible using a DB9S connector via the ARINC 600 connector. Direct connection to the HSD-X’s front panel, maintenance port requires an HSD-X maintenance port cable. The front connector, maintenance port supports trace and data load functions and is a female, micro-D-type, M83513/04-B11N, or equivalent. As well, a permanent connector wired to the rear, middle-plug, maintenance port connector can be installed for remote access. A description of the HSD-X maintenance port pins is provided in 305. For testing and monitoring of all components of a Multi-Channel HSD configuration, access to all units in the system is achieved by using a single terminal (PC or Laptop) connected to the Maintenance Port of the HSD-128 Transceiver. Communication with any installed HSD-Xs installed in the system is possible by passing through the HSD’s Maintenance Facility when operating in “console-mode.” Figure 4–1 illustrates the Maintenance Port Facility in a Multi-Channel configuration. Although system monitoring is possible using the “console-mode” feature, software updates, if required, must be loaded directly to the HSD-128 and each HSD-X via their respective maintenance port. Page 4–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 4–1. Multi-Channel Maintenance Port Access (2) Connection Requirements This section describes specific cabling requirement needed to connect to and use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program. (a) Cabling Notes The HSD and HSD-X transceivers provide two options for physical connection to the HSD maintenance port and utility program: direct connection and remote connection. Table 4–3, Table 4–4, Figure 4–2, and Figure 4–3 provide cabling details for the HSD transceiver for both direct and remote connection types. Select one of the connection options below to access the HSD maintenance utility program. Table 4–5 and Figure 4–4 provide cabling details for the HSD-X transceiver for both direct and remote connection types. Select one of the connection options below to access the HSD maintenance utility program. Note: The direct and remote connection points to the HSD maintenance port cannot be used simultaneously. Table 4–3. Remote Maintenance Port Access Cabling (HSD) Pin Definition ARINC Connector (Rear) Remote (DB9S) Maint Port SGND (MP1J) Maint Port Rx (MP1H) Maint Port Tx (MP1G) Page 4–4 18 September 2007 Cable (See Figure 4–2) Remote Access Computer (DB9P) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–4. Front-Panel Maintenance Port Access Cabling (HSD) Pin Definition Front Panel DB25S HSD Maintenance Cable Connector DB25P Maint Port SGND 10 10 Maint Port Rx 12 12 Cable (See Figure 4–3) Front Panel Access Computer DB9P Table 4–5. HSD-X Maintenance Port Pin Descriptions Function HDS-X In/Out Pin Signal Type Data Loader in A – Reserved Data Loader in B – Reserved Spare – – Data Loader out A – Reserved Data Loader out B – Reserved Spare – – Data Loader Continuity Link (A) – Reserved Maint Port TD Out RS-232 Maint Port GND GND RS-232 Maint Port RD 10 In RS-232 Data Loader Continuity Link (B) 11 – Reserved ATE Reserved 12 – ATE ATE Reserved 13 GND ATE ATE Reserved 14 – ATE ATE Reserved 15 – ATE (b) Maintenance Port Cable Assembly HSD maintenance cable connections may vary in length, type of connection used, and pinouts—depending on the access point used. The cable assembly for HSD transceivers assumes that the computer’s COM Port interface is a 9-Pin, D-Sub connector (DB9S). Cable assembly details for HSD transceivers are presented in Figure 4–2 and Figure 4–3. The cable assembly required for HSD-X transceivers is presented in Figure 4–4. Note: The maximum cable length, shown in Figure 4–2 and Figure 4–3, assumes that the length is measured from the ARINC 600 connector to the DB9 breakout connector. Page 4–5 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 4–2. Remote Access, Maintenance Cable (HSD) Figure 4–3. Front Panel Access, Maintenance Cable (HSD) Page 4–6 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 4–4. HSD-X Front-Panel, Maintenance Port Cable (c) Interface Requirements A standard VT100 compatible terminal running an emulator program (such as HyperTerminal, ProComm Plus, or another similar serial communication package) provides the user interface to the HSD maintenance utility program. The RS-232 connection settings for HSD and HSD-X maintenance ports are the same. Refer to Table 4–6 for the recommended terminal connection settings. Table 4–6. Terminal Connection Settings Parameter Setting Character Format ASCII Baud Rate 19200 bps No. of bits Parity None Stop bits Flow Control None (3) Accessing the Maintenance Utility Program Access to the maintenance utility program menus is password protected. Each password permits access to a different level of program functionality. This document only describes the two password-protected access levels required to perform operational testing and verification, software updates, and the basic system monitoring and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual: End User and Field Representative. Page 4–7 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (a) End User Access: Level 1 – Password: MENU This limited-access level is for anyone without technical training on the product. It provides read-only access to help users diagnose problems with the assistance of product support personnel. (b) Field Representative Access: Level 2 – Password: MAINT This level is for trained original equipment manufacturer (O.E.M.) installers and product support personnel. This access level supports “read’” and limited “write” capabilities. Users are able to disable/mask/clear faults, change satellite or LES preferences, view and modify certain EEPROM parameters, and perform other maintenance or upgrade functions. (4) Using the HSD Maintenance Utility Program This section describes the basic operating instructions for using and navigating the HSD maintenance utility program. (a) Entering Passwords • For untrained users use Level 1 access: Type menu, and then press Enter. • For trained technicians and product support personnel use Level 2 access: Type maint, and then press Enter. Note: The typed password does not appear on the screen. (b) Navigating the HSD Maintenance Utility Program • To scroll through the available menus press Ctrl+N. • To go to the previous menu, press Ctrl+O. • To refresh the menu screen or exit from a Reports Menu press ESC. (c) Selecting MENU Items • To enable test or data entry functions, press the letter associated with the menu items. When a menu item is selected, the application may prompt the user for additional inputs or selections. (d) Selecting Report Items • To open the list of possible system reports, press the equals sign (=). A list of report items appears. Active reports show as toggled “ON.” Inactive reports show as toggled “OFF.” • To activate a report item, type the report item number and then press Enter. Note: Multiple report items can be activated at the same time; however, you must type and enter each report item number separately. • To turn “OFF” individual, active report items, type the report item number you want to toggle off, and then press Enter. • To turn “OFF” all active report items, press the equals sign (=) to display the report item list, and then press X. Page 4–8 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (5) Menu Descriptions This section describes the menus and menu items available in the HSD maintenance utility program in Level 1 access (using the MENU password) and Level 2 access (using the MAINT password) based on control processor software version 4.5 and 7.0. The differences between version 4.5 and 7.0 are noted within the examples. All menus and items that appear in Level 1 also appear in Level 2. No additional menus or menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. Note: Depending on the version of software and configuration mode installed, the actual menus and screen displays in “live” systems may differ slightly from the illustrations provided in this manual. (a) Level 1 Menu Selections (Password: MENU) Figure 4–5 shows all menus available to Level 1 users for control-processor software version 4.5 to 7.0. Menu items added or changed in version 7.0, control processor software are highlighted in bold text. No additional menus or menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. MENU1 FIRMWARE V7.0 explain hpa error status N next menu O MENU2 = select reports FIRMWARE V7.0 annotate log file get firmware versions N next menu O MENU 3 list EEPROM list call log N next menu previous menu re-enter logon password reset HSD-128 previous menu = select reports FIRMWARE V7.0 O MENU 4 list event log list ORT previous menu = select reports FIRMWARE V7.0 channel card forward ID's N next menu O previous menu = select reports Figure 4–5. Level 1 MENU Selections Note: Menu 3, item O ‘list ORT’ was added in control processor software version 7.0. Page 4–9 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (b) Level 2 Menu Selections (Password: MAINT) Figure 4–6 through Figure 4–12 show all menus and menu items available in Level 2, menu options in control processor software, version 7.0. Menu items added in version 7.0, control processor software are highlighted in bold. Where applicable, any items that were deleted in version 7.0 are described and noted below each menu. No additional menus or menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. MENU1 FIRMWARE V7.0 override forward id explain hpa error status hcm RF threshold N next menu O test LEDs set hcm attenuator previous menu = select reports Figure 4–6. Level 2: Menu 1 MENU2 FIRMWARE V7.0 set veh-relative azimuth desired az veh-rel velocity enter time of day re-enter logon password reset HSD-128 N next menu O set veh-relative elevation resume automatic steering annotate log file get firmware versions set satellite longitude previous menu = select reports Figure 4–7. Level 2: Menu 2 MENU 3 list EEPROM misc. EEPROM parameter list ORT set all LES id's N next menu O FIRMWARE V7.0 list event log list call log ocean region parameter previous menu = select reports Figure 4–8. Level 2: Menu 3 Note: Page 4–10 18 September 2007 In control processor software, version 7.0, menu 3, item N ‘serial number’ was removed. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MENU 4 channel card forward ID's set Ocean Region toggle ISDN connection N next menu Level 2: Menu 4 MENU10 FIRMWARE V7.0 O next menu force spot beam selection change spot beam report MUX stats previous menu = select reports FIRMWARE V7.0 simul INS lat simul INS heading simul INS pitch simul INS speed deactivate all simul words simul sb ACU status deactivate antenna status words N O simul INS long simul INS true track simul INS roll activate all simul words simul port ACU status activate antenna status words previous menu = select reports Figure 4–9. Level 2: Menu10 MENU 13 FIRMWARE V7.0 query DATA IO elapsed time query DATA IO services DATA IO fault logging level N next menu O query DATA IO version query DATA IO config pins DATA IO console mode previous menu = select reports Figure 4–10. Level 2: Menu 13 MENU 14 FIRMWARE V7.0 num entries in call table get call table N next menu O list call table previous menu = select reports Figure 4–11. Level 2: Menu 14 Page 4–11 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MENU 15 FIRMWARE V7.0 request channel card versions N next menu O channel card serial number previous menu = select reports Figure 4–12. Level 2, Menu 15 MENU 18 FIRMWARE V7.0 HSD-X slave console mode list HSD-X slave cable loss N next menu O HSD-X slave cable loss get HSD-X firmware version previous menu = select reports Figure 4–13. Level 2, Menu 18 Note: In control processor software, version 7.0, Menu 18 is available when the terminal category is set to HSD-X Network, HSD-X Antenna, or Viper configurations. (6) Menu Item Descriptions This section provides a brief description of the Level 2, maintenance-utility-program menu items used for test and fault isolation procedures. Although this section only provides illustrations and descriptions for Level 2 access, descriptions of all Level 1 access menu items shown in Figure 4–5 are covered. (All Level 1 menus are included in Level 2 Menus.) In active HSD systems, menu screens display the firmware version. Note: Depending on the version of software installed, the number of channels cards in the system, and the HSD configuration mode, the menu and report items available to users may differ slightly from the illustrations shown and described in this document. (a) Menu 1 Figure 4–14 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 1 screen display. Table 4–7 describes the items available in Menu 1. In control processor software, version 7.0, the following changes were made to menu 3 selections (delta between version 4.5 and 7.0). No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. • Page 4–12 18 September 2007 Added menu items, S ‘set hcm attenuator’ and R ‘ hcm RF threshold’ SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MENU1 FIRMWARE V7.0 override forward id explain hpa error status hcm RF threshold N next menu O test LEDs set hcm attenuator previous menu = select reports Figure 4–14. Menu 1 Screen Display Table 4–7. Menu 1 Item Descriptions Menu Item Description • Used in testing and fault isolation • Enter a “test or alternate” Forward ID to use during fault isolation procedures. Resetting the HSD or cycling the power cancels this function. L: test LEDs • Toggles the “Power ON” (LED 1) and ‘Fault’ (LED 2) LEDs ON (A) and OFF (D) or returns them to software control (X). Y: explain hpa error status • Reports HPA status: X: override forward id • Displays HPA OK when no error codes are reported from the system’s power up test • Displays HPA error code message if system’s power up test fails • Used to set the preferred attenuation for Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM) operation to reduce the output signal level of the HCM module. • Displays the HCM module threshold parameters for the RF: • If the measured RF level is below this threshold, the “RF low” bit is set in the HPA maintenance word, which is then sent by the HSD control processor to the Honeywell SDU. (b) Menu 2 Figure 4–15 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 2 screen display. Table 4–8 describes the items available in Menu 2. In control-processor software version 7.0, no changes were made to menu 3 selections. No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. Page 4–13 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MENU2 FIRMWARE Vx.x A set veh-relative azimuth K desired az veh-rel velocity T enter time of day L re-enter logon password Z reset HSD-128 N next menu O E set veh-relative elevation R resume automatic steering N annotate log file V get firmware versions S set sat long previous menu = select reports Figure 4–15. Menu 2 Screen Display Table 4–8. Menu 2 Item Descriptions Menu Items Item Description Note: Menu 2 selections E and K are used to manually input navigational data to point the antenna to a preferred satellite location and /or peak for a maximum signal reception. These commands are typically used where no IRS data is available. A: set veh-relative azimuth K: desired az veh-rel velocity • Antenna azimuth pointing offset with reference to the front centerline of the aircraft • Offset value entered in degrees from 0° to ± 180 °, where a positive entry is clockwise (cw) and a negative entry is counterclockwise (ccw) • Activates continuous antenna azimuth sweep at a set elevation, as entered with menu item “E” • Azimuth sweep velocity entered as deg/sec value Note: T: enter time of day • When combined with a signal-monitoring “reports” selection, sweep the antenna for maximum signal strength to determine optimum location coordinates. Permits the on-board entry of date and time for initial one-time setting of the “Real Time Clock” • Where no clock is available (on some early models) the time may be set to time stamp a log file of a “reports” item L: re-enter logon password • Permits a user to enter a new access level password: menu or maint Z: reset HSD • Enables a complete, soft reset of the LRU; once reset, the menu access password must be re-entered E: set veh-relative elevation R: resume automatic steering Page 4–14 18 September 2007 • Antenna elevation pointing offset with respect to the aircraft horizontal “rest” position, i.e., assumed to have no pitch or roll offset • Offset value entered in degrees from 0° to 90° • Re-activates programmed automatic antenna-steering in both azimuth and elevation SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–8. Menu 2 Item Descriptions Menu Items Item Description • Allows for input of text into a log file • This feature can be used to document information such as test conditions, system or aircraft identification or any pertinent information needed for later review V: get firmware versions • Displays the system Kernel and Application software versions as well as the channel card(s) and HPA firmware revisions S: set satellite longitude • Sets the satellite longitude N: annotate log file (c) Menu 3 In control processor software version 7.0, the following changes were made to menu 3 selections (delta between version 4.5 and 7.0). No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. • Deleted item N, ‘serial number’ as it was no longer required. • The new item O, ‘list ORT’, displays all available ocean regions along with the satellite longitude. • The new item P, ‘ocean region parameter’, displays the ocean region number along with the ocean region e.g. REGION 0: AOR WEST. This command item configures both the Primary and Secondary LES access codes in the unit. • The new item I, ‘set all LES id’s’, sets the LES IDs in all the ocean regions to the same LES access code and service provider. • Removed several miscellaneous parameters from the Menu 3, item M selections. In menu 3, the following changes were made to item M ‘misc. EEPROM parameter’: • Removed extraneous parameters, 12, 19 to 24 and 28 to 31, which were neither required for system configuration nor operation • Added parameter 3, ‘GPS protection algorithm’ — used to disable the GPS algorithms the HSD uses to prevent calls from interfering with the GPS navigational system on the aircraft. • Added parameter 4, ‘Registration Req’d before calls’ — used to require successful ocean region registration before HSD calls are permitted (by default ocean region registration is not required). • Added parameter 17, ‘Viper Antenna Gain’ — used to configure the nominal antenna gain used by the HSD when operating in Viper Mode—presuming that the HSD is connected to an antenna that does not provide antenna status words. • Added parameter 18, ‘Viper HPA/ANT Loss’ — this is the RF loss between the HPA and the antenna, when the system is operating in Viper Mode. Page 4–15 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • Added parameter 45, ‘Category B Lower Frequency Limit’ and Parameter 46, “Category B Upper Frequency Limit” — these two parameters specify the “CAT B” terminal frequency range. Calls, which involve transmitting outside of this range, may interfere with the GPS navigational system if an Aero H call occurs at the same time. Usually the GPS protection algorithm tears down these calls. Figure 4–16 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 3 screen display for version 7.0, control processor software. Table 4–9 describes the items available in Menu 3. MENU 3 FIRMWARE V7.0 list EEPROM misc. EEPROM parameter list ORT set all LES id's N next menu O list event log list call log ocean region parameter previous menu = select reports Figure 4–16. Menu 3 Screen Display Table 4–9. Menu 3 Item Descriptions Menu Item L: list EEPROM S: list event log Item Description • Displays a list of all system EEPROM parameters and their corresponding values (this function is READ only) • Certain parameters are set using menu 3, item M selection. Figure 4–17 shows an example of the EEPROM listing • A list of system fault codes stored in non-volatile RAM • When selected, several options are available: 0 = Most recent saved entry is displayed S = Displays next most recent entry saved • = Displays all remaining logged entries 1 = Special events (Does not include Ocean Region Registration entries) M: misc. EEPROM parameter • Enables entry or entry changes to some of the EEPROM parameters listed in function ‘L’ Note: Parameters 5,6,7,8, 9, 13, 25, 26, 27, and 28 are not accessible using Level 1 or Level 2 passwords F: list call log • Displays call log files for HSD or HSD-X. When selected, two options are available: Press “F” to display complete list of all log files Press “X” to list extended EIRP trace data Page 4–16 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–9. Menu 3 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item Description O: list ORT • Displays all EEPROM parameters, including all cable losses and LES configurations P: ocean region parameter • Used to configure LES access codes (primary and secondary service providers) for individual ocean regions I: set all LES id’s • Used to configure the LES access codes to configure all ocean regions to the same LES access code and service provider (including primary and secondary service providers) Page 4–17 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal EEPROM LISTING: MAGIC NUMBER :OK EEPROM VERSION NUMBER 2001 FIRMWARE VERSION 1018 SERIAL NUMBER: xxx IGNORED FAULTS: 0 HARDWARE CONFIG: 0 NUMBER OF POWERUPS (index 0) 570 HOURS OF OPERATION (index 0) 117 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS HIT 'L' for MORE HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS: 2.5 dB FORWARD ID: xxxxxx AORW LES ACCESS CODE: TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID: HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS: 10.0 dB MAX HPA GAIN: 66.3 dB MIN ANTENNA GAIN: 11.0 dB MAX EIRP: 53.5 dB MAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER: 0.0 dB NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS : FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED: RX Attenuation (LAND-ON-WINGS): 0.0 dB MIN SECS BETWEEN CHAN CARD RESETS: 300 HIT 'L' for MORE MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO: MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL: TERMINAL CATEGORY: HW STRAPPED VALUE AOR W VALID BEAMS: 4 5 6 AOR E VALID BEAMS: 5 6 POR VALID BEAMS: 4 5 6 IOR VALID BEAMS 5 6 AORE LES ACCESS CODE: POR LES ACCESS CODE: IOR LES ACCESS CODE: RECEIVER CALIBRATION (AREO): 11 dB MAX HPA POWER: 18.0 dBw HPA RESERVED POWER: 16.0 dBw HIT ‘L’ for MORE CHANNEL CARD STARTUP DELAY: 30 sec RX32 ACTIVE: DEFAULT LATITUDE: 45 DO’ 0.0”N DEFAULT LONGITUDE: 75 DO’ 0.0”W OBEY OXCO STATUS: YES CCDEBUG PORT: NONE COMBINED MODE BACKOFF ADJUSTMENT: 10.0 dB CHECKSUM (stored at offset 462) 9656 OK Longest write cycle took 0 MSEC Figure 4–17. Menu 3 – L: EEPROM Listing (Version 4.5) Page 4–18 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Note: Depending on the version of software installed and the Terminal Category, the EEPROM Listing shown may differ from those shown and described here. N next menu O previous menu MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 AORW LES ACCESS CODE 4 TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 12 RX ATTENUATION (LAND-ON-WINGS) 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY 17 AOR W VALID BEAMS WHICH PARAMETER # ? 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 28 29 30 31 = select reports AOR E VALID BEAMS POR VALID BEAMS IOR VALID BEAMS AORE LES ACCESS CODE POR LES ACCESS CODE IOR LES ACCESS CODE RECEIVER CALIBRATION (AERO) RX32 ACTIVE DEFAULT LATITUDE DEFAULT LONGITUDE OBEY OXCO STATUS Figure 4–18. Menu 3 – Item M: Miscellaneous Parameters (Version 4.5) MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS 1 HPA-TO-ANTENNA TOTAL LOSS 2 FORWARD ID 3 GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS 4 REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS 10 NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS WHICH PARAMETER # 18 24 28 29 30 11 FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED 14 MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO 15 MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL 16 TERMINAL CATEGORY 17 VIPER ANTENNA GAIN N for next page VIPER HPA/ANT LOSS RECEIVER CALIBRATION RX32 ACTIVE DEFAULT LATITUDE DEFAULT LONGITUDE 31 OBEY OXCO STATUS 42 HCM AERO/M4 PRIORITIZATION 45 CATEGORY B LOWER FREQUENCY LIMIT 46 CATEGORY B UPPER FREQUENCY LIMIT Figure 4–19. Menu 3 – Item M: Miscellaneous Parameters (Version 7.0) Page 4–19 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–10. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 4.5) Parameter Parameter Title HPA Cable loss Description • Measured transmit coax cable loss from the HSD at MPC1 to the antenna including the DLNA loss (0.8 dB) • Maximum is 2.5 dB – 0.8 dB = 1.7 dB • Entry required ONLY if the ID is not strapped, refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for strapping details Forward ID 3, 21, 22, and 23 AORW, AORE, POR, • and IOR ‘LES’ Access Codes Inmarsat Service Provider LES access code entry; default is “1” Terrestrial Network ID • Used to change Terrestrial Network ID (where applicable) 10 Number of Channel Cards • Entry selects the number of channel cards the system is configured for. • Default for Stand-Alone Mode installations is “2” • Future consideration is provided for additional LEDs, beyond the two currently activated • Default is “2”’ • Enables a selected “reports” item to be highlighted in Inverse Video when it is activated • Default is “1” (activated) • Offers a choice of displaying the letter “D” or the degree symbol “°” when viewing the lat/long information displayed in the ‘Reports’ output: 11 14 15 Page 4–20 18 September 2007 Front Panel LEDs Enabled Maintenance Port Inverse Video Maintenance Port Degrees Symbol • Select “0” to use the letter “D”, e.g. 180.0 D • Select “1” to use a degree symbol “°”, e.g. 180.0° SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–10. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 4.5) Parameter 16 Parameter Title Channel Card Category Description • • Offers an LRU configuration choice of: • 0 for SAT-906 • 1 for Stand-Alone • 2 for HW Strapping • 3 for MCS3000 • 4 for MCS6000 • 5 for MCS7000 • 6 for MCS Combined • 7 for Stand-Alone without antenna • 8 for Honeywell Collaborative • 9 for Cooperative Rockwell Collins SAT-906 Default is “2” (where hardware is read on power-up) 17, 18, 19, and 20 AORW, AORE, POR, • and IOR Valid Beams Not applicable (applied to prototype channel card software) 24 Receiver Calibration • (AERO) Enables attenuation of receive RF input level to the channel cards • Entered as an absolute number, e.g., 10, means 10 dB of input RF attenuation is added • Not applicable to HSD systems with version C30 (or later) channel card software (Version C30 and later channel card software automatically adjusts RF input) • Default is “0” 28 RX32 Active • Not applicable (applied to prototype HPA systems) 29 Default Latitude • Allows user to enter a default latitude value • Reset the HSD to activate revised default values • Allows user to enter a default longitude value • Reset the HSD to activate revised default values • Prevents system operation until OCXO is warmed up (unless overridden) • Use parameter setting to override warm-up during testing procedures 30 31 Default Longitude Obey OXCO Status Page 4–21 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–11. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 7.0) Parameter Parameter Title Description HPA cable loss • Measured transmit coax cable loss from the HSD at MPC1 to the antenna including the DLNA loss—maximum is 2.5 dB Forward ID • Entry required ONLY if the ID is not strapped, refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for strapping details GPS protection algorithms • Used to disable the GPS algorithms the HSD uses to prevent calls from interfering with the GPS navigational system on the aircraft. Registration req’d before calls • Used to change Terrestrial Network ID (where applicable) 10 Number of channel cards • Entry selects the number of channel cards the system is configured for—default for Stand-Alone Mode installations is “2” 11 Front panel LEDs enabled • Future consideration is provided for additional LEDs, beyond the two currently activated—default is “2”’ 14 Maintenance port inverse video • Enables a selected “reports” item to be highlighted in Inverse Video when it is activated—default is “1” (activated) 15 Maintenance port degrees symbol • Offers a choice of displaying the letter “D” or the degree symbol “°” when viewing the lat/long information displayed in the ‘Reports’ output: Page 4–22 18 September 2007 • Select “0” to use the letter “D”, e.g. 180.0 D • Select “1” to use a degree symbol “°”, e.g. 180.0° SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–11. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 7.0) Parameter 16 Parameter Title Channel card category Description • Offers an LRU configuration choice of: • 0 for SAT-906 • 1 for Stand-Alone • 2 for HW Strapping • 3 for MCS3000 • 4 for MCS6000 • 5 for MCS7000 • 6 for MCS Combined • 7 for Stand-Alone without antenna • 8 for HCM Combined (Honeywell Combined Mode) • 9 for Cooperative Rockwell Collins SAT-906 • 10 not used • 11 for HSD-X Network (Multi-Channel AERO) • 12 for HSD-X Network without antenna (Multi-Channel Non AERO) • 13 for VIPER • Default is “2” (where hardware is read on power-up) 17 Viper antenna gain • Used to configure the nominal antenna gain used by the HSD when operating in Viper Mode—presuming that the HSD is connected to an antenna that does not provide antenna status words 18 Viper HPA/ANT loss • Used to configure the nominal antenna gain used by the HSD when operating in Viper Mode—presuming that the HSD is connected to an antenna that does not provide antenna status words Page 4–23 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–11. Menu 3, Item 'M' EEPROM Parameter Descriptions (Version 7.0) Parameter 24 Parameter Title Description Receiver Calibration • (AERO) Enables attenuation of receive RF input level to the channel cards • Entered as an absolute number, e.g., 10, means 10 dB of input RF attenuation is added • Not applicable to HSD systems with version C30 (or later) channel card software (Version C30 and later channel card software automatically adjusts RF input) • Default is “0” 28 RX32 Active • Not applicable (applied to prototype HPA systems) 29 Default Latitude • Allows user to enter a default latitude value • Reset the HSD to activate revised default values • Allows user to enter a default longitude value • Reset the HSD to activate revised default values • Prevents system operation until OCXO is warmed up (unless overridden) • Use parameter setting to override warm-up during testing procedures • Sets HPA power allocation to Aero H/H+ or Swift64 call priority (1=M4, 0=AERO-H) • Default set to AERO priority 30 31 42 Default Longitude Obey OXCO status HCM AERO/M4 prioritization 45 Category B lower frequency limit • Used to specify category B terminal lower frequency range. Calls transmitting outside of this specified range may interfere with the GPS navigational system if an Aero H call occurs simultaneously; however, in this event, the GPS protection algorithm usually tears down the call 46 Category B upper frequency limit • Used to specify category B terminal upper frequency range. Calls transmitting outside of this specified range may interfere with the GPS navigational system if an Aero H call occurs simultaneously; however, in this event, the GPS protection algorithm usually tears down the call Page 4–24 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (d) Menu 4 In control-processor software version 7.0, the following changes were made to Menu 4 selections (delta between version 4.5 and 7.0). No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. • Removed Menu 4, item F, ‘force spot beam’ selection. Figure 4–20 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 4 screen display. Table 4–12 describes the items available in Menu 4. MENU 4 FIRMWARE V7.0 Q channel card forward ID's S change spot beam M report MUX stats N next menu O set Ocean Region toggle ISDN connection previous menu = select reports Figure 4–20. Menu 4 Screen Display Table 4–12. Menu 4 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item Description Q: channel card forward IDs • Enables viewing of channel cards, # 1 and # 2 Forward IDs O: set Ocean Region • Allows for manual selection of satellite Ocean Regions: AORW: “0” AORE: “1” POR: “2” IOR: “3” • To revert to programmed selection, type –1 and press Enter for AUTO selection • Used for testing and fault isolation purposes • Connects ISDN 1 lines to Channel Card 2 (Does not work in reverse—ISDN 2 to ISDN 1) • Redirection only applies until the system is reset S: change spot beam • Enables manual selection of specific spot beams independently assigned for each channel card M: report MUX stats • Not applicable • Used for engineering debugging purposes only J: toggle ISDN connection Page 4–25 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (e) Menu 10 Menu 10 items are used to manually enter INS parameters to simulate the INS data required for HSD operation when INS data is unavailable. Figure 4–21 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 10 screen display. Table 4– 13 describes the items available in Menu 10. No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. In control-processor software version 7.0, the following changes were made to Menu 10 selections (delta between version 4.5 and 7.0). • Added item C, ‘simul port ACU status’, which prompts the user to enter both the port antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz. • Added item M, ‘activate antenna status words’, which activates all set antenna status words. • Added item N, ‘deactivate antenna status words’, which deactivates all set antenna status words. • Added item B, ‘simul sb ACU status’, which prompts the user to enter the Starboard antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz. MENU10 FIRMWARE Vx.x simul INS lat simul INS heading simul INS pitch simul INS speed deactivate all simul words simul sb ACU status deactivate antenna status words N next menu O simul INS long simul INS true track simul INS roll activate all simul words simul port ACU status activate antenna status words previous menu = select reports Figure 4–21. Menu 10 Screen Display Table 4–13. Menu 10 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item Description L: simul INS lat • Allows user to simulate a latitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS H: simul INS heading • Allows user to simulate a aircraft heading by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS P: simul INS pitch • Allows user to simulate aircraft pitch by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS S: simul INS speed • Allows user to simulate aircraft speed by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS X: deactivate all simul words • De-activates all simulated parameters reverting the HSD system back to using the INS data received from the aircraft Page 4–26 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–13. Menu 10 Item Descriptions Menu Item B: simul sb ACU status Item Description • N: deactivate antenna • status words • G: simul INS long Used to enter the starboard antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz Used to deactivate all set antenna status words Allows user to simulate aircraft longitude by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS T: simul ins true track • Allows user to simulate true track by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS R: simul INS roll • Allows user to simulate aircraft roll by overriding the data received from the aircraft INS A: activate all simul words • Activates all input simulate parameters overriding the INS data received from the aircraft • Lat and Long values from the EEPROM values set in Menu 3 C: simul port ACU status • Used to enter both the port antenna gain in dB and the message rate in Hz M: activate antenna status words • Used to activate all set antenna status words (f) Menu 13 Menu 13 items are used to query and debug systems with Data I/O Card 2 (available on HSD models 1110-A-0150 and 1110-A-0160 or other HSD models via service bulletin 1110-SB-0004). Menu 13 is the same in all control processor software versions 4.5 and later. Figure 4–22 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 13 screen display. Table 4–14 describes the items available in Menu 13. MENU 13 FIRMWARE Vx.x T query DATA IO elapsed time S query DATA IO services F DATA IO fault logging level N next menu O V query DATA IO version C query DATA IO config pins X DATA IO console mode previous menu = select reports Figure 4–22. Menu 13 Screen Display Page 4–27 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–14. Menu 13 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item Description T: query Data IO elapsed time • Displays the time (in seconds) since the last Data I/O reset S: query Data IO services • Displays active interfaces F: Data IO fault logging level • Sets the level of minimum severity of events that are reported to the Data I/O card V: query Data IO version • Displays the firmware version of the Data I/O card C: query Data I/O config pins • Displays the Data I/O configuration pin summary X: Data IO console mode • Opens a virtual TTY session to the Data I/O maintenance port on the HSD (g) Menu 14 Menu 14 items are used for debugging and clarifying call routing issues. Menu 14 is the same in all control processor software versions 4.5 and later. Figure 4–23 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 14 screen display. Table 4–15 describes the items available in Menu 14. MENU 14 FIRMWARE Vx.x N num entries in call table T get call table N next menu O list call table previous menu = select reports Figure 4–23. Menu 14 Screen Display Table 4–15. Menu 14 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item Description N: num entries in call table • Displays the call table number entries for fixed-originated or mobile-originated calls for either channel card 1 or channel card 2 T: get call table • Displays the call table lists for fixed-originated or mobile-originated calls for either channel card 1 or channel card 2 L: list call table • Lists the call table for fixed-originated or mobile-originated calls for either channel card 1 or channel card 2 Page 4–28 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (h) Menu 15 Menu 15 was added in control processor software version 7.0 to allow the user to query the system for channel-card, software versions and serial number information. Figure 4–24 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 15 screen display. Table 4–16 describes the items available in Menu 15. MENU 15 FIRMWARE V7.0 request channel card versions N next menu O channel card serial number previous menu = select reports Figure 4–24. Menu 15 Screen Display Table 4–16. Menu 15 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item Description V: request channel card versions • Displays software versions for a selected channel card D: channel card serial number • Displays the serial number of the selected channel card (i) Menu 18 Menu 18 was added in control processor software version 7.0 to support Multi-Channel configurations. No additional menu items were added with the release of Version 7.5, Control Processor software. Menu 18 is only available if the HSD system is configured to either HSD-X Network, HSD-X without Antenna, or Viper terminal categories. Figure 4–25 shows the HSD maintenance utility program Menu 18 screen display. Table 4–17 describes the items available in Menu 18. MENU 18 FIRMWARE V7.0 HSD-X slave console mode list HSD-X slave cable loss N next menu O HSD-X slave cable loss get HSD-X firmware version previous menu = select reports Figure 4–25. Menu 18 Screen Display Page 4–29 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–17. Menu 15 Item Descriptions Menu Item Item Description X: HSD-X slave console mode • Activates a system control connection to a selected HSD-X unit installed on the system L: list HSD-X slave cable loss • Select this item to display the HSD to HSD-X cable loss for a selected HSD-X unit installed on the system B: HSD-X slave cable loss • Used to enter the measured HSD to HSD-X cable loss for selected HSD-X unit V: get HSD-X firmware version • Select this item to display the software version of a selected HSD-X unit installed on the system (7) Report Item Descriptions When testing or troubleshooting the HSD system, monitoring real-time system data is sometimes required. Figure 4–26 shows all the report items potentially available to Level 2 user. Most reports are used for factory debugging purposes only. This document describes only the reports typically used in the field for operational and fault isolation testing. Note: Depending on the version of software installed, the maintenance utility program report items displayed may differ from those shown in Figure 4– 26 and Figure 4–27. Page 4–30 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 1 OFF messages to channel card #1 2 OFF hex output to channel card #1 3 OFF responses from channel card #1 4 OFF hex input from channel card #1 5 OFF channel #1 misc info 6 OFF sb antenna arinc input 7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word 8 OFF sb antenna status word 9 OFF channel card call status 10 OFF channel card THA codes 11 OFF channel card errors 12 OFF INS input 13 OFF messages to channel card #2 14 OFF hex output to channel card #2 15 OFF responses from channel card #2 16 OFF hex input from channel card #2 17 OFF channel #2 misc info 18 OFF port antenna arinc input 19 OFF port antenna maintenance word 20 OFF port antenna status word 21 OFF call codes 22 OFF spot beam selection 23 OFF standard output 24 OFF doppler, antenna az/el 25 OFF HPA arinc i/o 37 OFF combined-mode spoofed output 26 OFF HPA error status 38 OFF combined-mode power allotment 27 OFF HPA/channel card backoffs 39 OFF combined-mode debugging 28 OFF miscellaneous digital inputs 40 OFF enthusiastic combined-mode debug 29 OFF channel card A_AM msgs 41 OFF delta combined-mode debugging 30 OFF multi-control arinc bus 42 OFF raw arinc data from ITS 31 OFF ocean region info 43 OFF high-precision hpa power 32 OFF hex input from data i/o 44 OFF hpa calibration (gain droop) 33 OFF hex output to data i/o 45 OFF combined mode ocean region debug 34 OFF input from data i/o 46 OFF hpa resets 35 OFF changes in multi-control bus 47 OFF channel card temperature 36 OFF unit test call setup 48 OFF hexadecimal INS input 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF main loop latency main loop timing one second tick extended call codes standalone w/o ant data RC SDU time and date RC arinc i/o (hex) RC misc arinc i/o (ascii) RC EIRP RC SAT-906 Status 59 OFF RC Satellite Position 60 OFF debug channel card power 61 OFF non-zero channel card power 62 OFF m4 availability status 63 OFF enthusiastic output to RC SDU 64 OFF channel card frequencies 65 OFF enthusiastic messages from HPA 66 OFF channel card boot sequence 67 OFF HPV power meter/attenuator Figure 4–26. HSD Maintenance Utility Program: Report Items (Version 4.5) Page 4–31 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 1 OFF messages to channel card #1 2 OFF hex output to channel card #1 3 OFF responses from channel card #1 4 OFF hex input from channel card #1 5 OFF channel #1 misc info 6 OFF sb antenna arinc input 7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word 8 OFF sb antenna status word 9 OFF channel card call status 10 OFF channel card THA codes 11 OFF channel card errors 12 OFF INS input 13 OFF messages to channel card #2 14 OFF hex output to channel card #2 15 OFF responses from channel card #2 16 OFF hex input from channel card #2 17 OFF channel #2 misc info 18 OFF port antenna arinc input 19 OFF port antenna maintenance word 20 OFF port antenna status word 21 ON call codes 22 OFF spot beam selection 23 OFF standard output 24 OFF doppler, antenna az/el 25 OFF HPA arinc i/o 37 OFF combined-mode spoofed output 26 OFF HPA error status 38 OFF combined-mode power allotment 27 OFF HPA/channel card backoffs 39 OFF combined-mode debugging 28 OFF miscellaneous digital inputs 40 OFF enthusiastic combined-mode debug 29 OFF channel card A_AM msgs 41 OFF delta combined-mode debugging 30 OFF multi-control arinc bus 42 OFF raw arinc data from ITS 31 OFF ocean region info 43 OFF high-precision hpa power 32 OFF hex input from data i/o 44 OFF hpa calibration (gain droop) 33 OFF hex output to data i/o 45 OFF combined mode ocean region debug 34 OFF input from data i/o 46 OFF hpa resets 35 OFF changes in multi-control bus 47 OFF channel card temperature 36 OFF unit test call setup 48 OFF hexadecimal INS input 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 OFF main loop latency OFF main loop timing OFF one second tick OFF extended call codes OFF standalone w/o ant data OFF RC SDU time and date OFF RC arinc i/o (hex) OFF RC misc arinc i/o (ascii) OFF RC EIRP OFF RC SAT-906 Status OFF RC Satellite Position OFF debug channel card power 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 61 OFF non-zero channel card power 62 OFF m4 availability status 63 OFF enthusiastic output to RC SDU 64 OFF channel card frequencies 65 OFF enthusiastic messages from HPA 66 OFF channel card boot sequence 67 OFF debug honeywell combined mode 68 OFF CFDS debugging 69 OFF vt100 scenario 70 OFF HCM input 71 OFF HCM power level 72 OFF DATA I/O events HCM power control 85 OFF debug CC#2 channel card power TIM HCM power debugging 86 OFF Channel card rx attenuation HCM BITE 87 OFF interworking report HSD-X arinc messages 88 OFF all words to SDU HSD-X net configuration 89 OFF debug call teardown vt100 eirp/power 90 OFF debug cc backoff dialtone debugging 91 OFF HSD frequencies RC CC#2 SDU time and date 92 OFF intermod debugging RC CC#2 arinc i/o (hex) 93 OFF spot beam debugging RC CC#2 misc arinc i/o (ascii) 94 OFF vt100 channel card info RC CC#2 EIRP 95 OFF vt100 debugging RC CC#2 SAT-906 Status Figure 4–27. HSD Maintenance Utility Program: Report Items (Version 7.0) Page 4–32 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (8) Activating Maintenance Reports In Level 1, menu access, report item 23 (standard output) is automatically generated when the equals sign (=) is pressed. Once activated, the report data output is repeated on the computer display at one-second intervals. Level 2, maint access provides more flexibility in the use of the reports function. This access level permits the activation or de-activation any one of the report items (toggle ON and OFF). (a) Report Items: General Guidelines 1. Press the equal sign on the keyboard (=) to open the Report Item menu. 2. To activate a report, type the number of the report item needed, and then press Enter. This toggles ON the report number entered. To toggle the report OFF, type in the report number again, and press Enter. 3. Press X to disable all report items (toggles reports OFF). 4. Press Ctrl+N to display the next group of report items. 5. Press S to save all selected report items to EEPROM. If the items selected are not saved, they are "de-activated" when the system is reset or power is cycled to the unit. 6. Press Esc (in Level 2 access only) to start the scrolling report display. Press Esc again to return to the MENU selection screen. (b) Report Items: Descriptions Not all the report items are used in the testing or troubleshooting of the system. This section describes only the more commonly used report items. 1. Report Item: 23 Use report item #23 (the most comprehensive report) to get an overall general impression of the HSD system health. An example of the contents of report item 23 is shown in Figure 4–28. Table 4–18 provides a brief description of the parameters. Each distinct parameter is numbered for description purposes. 145D38'52.9"N 74D59'29.3"W 2PT 0.2D 3RL -0.4D 4HD 349.9D 5TK 0.2D 60 knots 710:26:07 8dop 0 ppb 9az 161.6 deg 10el 33.6 deg 11AOR WEST 12ant gain 13 (sbd) 13CARD #1: 14C/No=51.5 dB/Hz 15sig=-16.8 1627 C 17no call 18beam=4 13CARD #2: 14C/No=51.5 dB/Hz 15sig=-15.4 1627 C 17no call 18beam=4 Figure 4–28. Example of Report Item 23 Page 4–33 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–18. Report 23 Item Descriptions Report 23 Item Number Description IRS lat/long as interpreted by the HSD Aircraft pitch angle, where “UP” is +ve Aircraft roll angle, where clockwise (cw) is +ve Aircraft heading; where the nose of the aircraft is pointing, based on yaw offset Aircraft true track; direction the aircraft is flying—not necessarily the direction it is pointing (See NOTE) Aircraft velocity Time, based on the system real time clock Doppler frequency offset; increases with velocity (See NOTE) Antenna azimuth pointing to the satellite, with respect to the nose of the aircraft 10 Antenna elevation angle to the satellite, with respect to the horizontal position of the aircraft 11 Ocean Region the system is logged-on to 12 Reported antenna gain and the selected antenna, port or starboard 13 Indicates the channel card for which results 14) to 17) relate to 14 RF input Carrier-to-Noise (C/No) level; typically 50.0 to 55.0 15 RF input signal level; typically –12.0 to –18.0 when not ”in call”: *not to exceed 0 when “in-call” 16 HSD internal LRU temperature 17 System call status 18 Satellite beam the card is registered on Note: When the aircraft is stationary the field may appear as ¾’s. 2. Report Items: 5 & 17, 8 & 20, and 21 Some other commonly used report items, used in the testing or troubleshooting of the system, are shown in Figure 4–29. These report items shown are only available to Level 2, maint access users. Note: Depending on the version of software installed, and the user’s selection of reports, the maintenance utility program report items displayed may differ from those shown in the example illustrated Figure 4–29. Note: Signal strength values (C/no=) in early versions of software do not show the decimal point. If operating HSD transceivers with earlier software, divide the C/no value by ten. Page 4–34 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Report 5; Channel card #1 & #2 miscellaneous information: CARD #1: C/No=51.8 sig=-16.6 no call beam=4 AOR WEST bt=OK oc=OK int=8080 CARD #1: C/No=51.6 sig=-16.8 no call beam=4 AOR WEST bt=OK oc=OK int=8080 CARD #2: C/No=52.0 sig=-16.1 no call beam=4 AOR WEST bt=OK oc=OK int=8080 CARD #2: C/No=51.7 sig=-16.3 no call beam=4 AOR WEST bt=OK oc=OK int=8080 Report 8 & 20; Starboard and Port Antenna Status: starboard status: 0x608236 SDI: STARBOARD SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 13 OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking starboard active HGA LNA on starboard status: 0x608236 SDI: STARBOARD SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 13 OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking starboard active HGA LNA on starboard status: 0x608236 SDI: STARBOARD SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 13 port status: 0x600201 SDI: PORT/TOP SSM: NORMAL OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking starboard port status: 0x600201 SDI: PORT/TOP SSM: NORMAL OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking starboard Report 21; 13:39:00 54 dB/Hz 13:39:00 13:39:06 0 dB/Hz 13:39:06 13:39:12 55 dB/Hz 13:39:12 13:39:18 0 dB/Hz 13:39:19 13:39:20 13:39:19 13:39:20 OPERATION gain: 0 active HGA LNA off OPERATION gain: 0 active HGA LNA off Call Codes: #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C #2 #1 #2 #1 ABC456 ABC123 ABC456 ABC123 E4 E4 E4 E4 stop stop stop stop 1001 1001 1001 1001 call call call call cleared cleared cleared cleared by by by by MES MES MES MES terminal terminal terminal terminal 30 28 30 28 dB/Hz dB/Hz dB/Hz dB/Hz Figure 4–29. Maintenance Port, Report Items Table 4–19. Report information Report(s) Information Report 5 & 17 Channel card #1 & #2 miscellaneous information: (C/No) - RF input carrier to noise level (value displayed is typically 50 to 55 when not “in-call” and 55 to 65 when “in-call”-may also show as “0’s”) (sig) - RF input signal level (typically –12 to –18 when not “in-call”) (beam) - Satellite Beam the card is registered on (oc) - Ocean region the card is logged-on to (bt) - Card boot-up status Page 4–35 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–19. Report information Report(s) Information (oc) - Ocean region registration status (int) - Interface status ( =8080 means the card is ready for dialing) Report 8 & 20 Starboard and Port Antenna Status: (Hex code) - Raw hex code of the 32-bit ARINC word—decoded message follows code (SDI) - Antenna being used (for mechanically steered, only Port data is valid) (SSM) - Antenna serviceability (Gain) - Reported antenna gain (may vary with increased blockage or keyhole pointing) (Mode) - Reports tracking status, antenna selection, and high gain mode (LNA) - Power-on status Report 21 Call Codes: (Time) - Time based on the system real time clock (Fwd Addr) - Forward Address ID assigned to the system channel cards (Alpha/no.) - Ocean region and beam the card is logged-on to (Call) - Call real-time status, service type code, and Inmarsat Cause Code (See Table 4–20) (RF power) - LES requested HPA power in dBW (OR status) - Ocean region registration status (Call orig) Call originating from MES (Mobile) or from a fixed location. (Call type) Call types (for example, speech) D. Fault Definitions (1) Cause Indication (Fault Codes) The four fields listed below are used to signal the cause indication result: • Coding Standard (1 bit) • Cause Location (4 bits) • Cause Class (4 bits) • Cause Value (4 bits) The Table 4–20 shows the hexadecimal coding for these fields and briefly describes the events relating to each code. (2) Inmarsat Cause Codes The fault definitions that appear in the HSD Maintenance Menu logs are based directly on the cause code definitions provided by Inmarsat. Table 4–20 defines the Maintenance Port Menu fault codes of the HSD. Page 4–36 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 1001 Call cleared by MES terminal (normal termination of call) 1011 Call failed, MES terminal busy 1012 Call cleared, MES terminal busy 1021 Call failed, MES time-out (no answer) 1081 Call failed, MES terminal not installed 1091 Call failed, MES terminal out-of-service 1092 Call cleared, MES terminal out-of-service 1141 MES preempted clear by higher priority call 1142 MES preempted fixed call by higher priority call 1143 Offered call cleared, pre-empted at MES 1144 Call cleared, MES initiated preemption 1145 Attempted call cleared, pre-empted at MES 1146 Attempted call abandoned by MES terminal 11A0 Call cleared, credit card not accepted 11D1 Call failed, Request data invalid 11D2 Call failed, insufficient digits in service address 11D3 Call failed, invalid service address 11D4 Call cleared, credit card data information invalid 11D5 Call cleared, invalid country code 11D6 Call cleared, PID information is not consistent 11D7 Call rejected, invalid service for Pri.1 or 2 call 11D8 Call cleared, dialed number not 2 or 3 digits for Pr.1 or 2 call 11E0 Call cleared, invalid credit card PIN at this LES 11E1 Call cleared, too many invalid credit card call attempts 1202 Handover, MES ready 1281 Call failed, MES cannot accept 1291 Call failed, MES cannot accept at present 12B1 Call cleared by MES for unspecified reason 12C2 Call cleared, no credit card valid message received 12C3 Call failed, MES time-out (no terrestrial answer) 12C4 Call cleared, authentication query not received (usually caused by call setup failure) 12C5 Call cleared, MES missing sup service SU 12C6 Call cleared, MES missing sup service 2SU 12C7 Call cleared, MES missing SCPC channel release SU sup service 12C8 Handover failed, LES not detected Page 4–37 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 12D1 Call failed, Spot-beam data invalid 12D2 Call failed, invalid scrambling vector 1351 Call cleared, insufficient free memory 1361 Call cleared by MES cable unwrap 1362 Call cleared, long interruption in reception at MES 1363 MES secondary clear due to repoint OR 1391 Call cleared, traveled distance exceeds 700km 1392 Call cleared, spot beam transition (call terminated because aircraft left spot beam) 1393 Call cleared, Cooperative Mode 1451 Call failed, terrestrial circuits congested 1452 Call failed, LES congested (no channel and no circuit) 1502 Handover, LES Ready, normal clear 1551 Call failed, LES congested (no channel) 1581 Call failed, service not provided at this LES 1591 Call failed, service temporarily not available at this LES 1592 Call cleared, credit card type not supported 15A1 Call failed, MES not authorized at this LES 15A2 Call failed, service not authorized at this LES 15A3 Call cleared, credit card not authorized 15A4 Call cleared, authentication reply invalid 15A5 Call failed, PID not authorized for any service 15A6 Call failed, PID not authorized for requested service 15B1 Call cleared by LES for unspecified reason 15C1 Call failed, LES time-out (no assignment) 15C2 Call failed, LES time-out (no service address) 15C3 Call failed, LES time-out (no scrambling vector) 15C4 Call failed, no service address and no scrambling vector 15C5 Call cleared, incomplete credit card data information 15C7 Call failed, LES time-out (no MES Connect) 15C9 Call cleared, no authentication reply 15CA Call cleared, notification ack not received 15CB Call cleared, invalid sequence number in notification ack 15CC Handover failed, no response to request 15CD Handover failed, MES not ready 15D1 Call failed, LES time-out (invalid assignment) Page 4–38 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 15D2 LES MES already busy 15E1 Call cleared but MES still transmitting (FAULT) 1651 Call failed, LES congested (no channel unit) 1661 Call failed, long interruption in reception at LES 1662 LES long term blockage of SCPC MES 16C2 LES missing MES SCPC 16C3 Handover failed, MES not detected 1790 Call cleared, failure credit card validation process 1791 Call cleared, failure authentication process 1811 NCS MES ID busy 1812 NCS MES ID busy IPDS 1841 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.1 call 1842 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.2 call 1843 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption for incoming Pri.3 call 1844 Call cleared, NCS initiated preemption 1851 Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject no SCPC available 1852 Call failed, satellite congestion NCS reject SCPC does not match request 1853 Call failed, lease channel congestion 1854 Call failed, MES outside spot beam coverage area 1855 Call rejected, preemption failed, no channel available 1856 Call rejected, spot beam selection failed 1857 Handover failed, channel not available 18A1 NCS MES ID not found 18A2 Call failed, MES not authorized 18A3 Call failed, LES not authorized 18B1 Call failed by NCS for unspecified reason 18B2 Call rejected, invalid service requested 18C1 NCS MES burst missing 18C3 NCS MES busy preemption failed 18D1 Call failed, invalid call request 18E1 NCS MES busy already 18E2 NCS MES busy already MPDS 1F01 Call cleared by terrestrial circuit (normal call termination from ground source) 1F11 Call failed, terrestrial party busy 1F21 Call failed, LES time-out (no answer) Page 4–39 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 1F61 Call failed, terrestrial circuit failure 1F62 Call failed, early clear by terrestrial circuit 2000 MES int reject MES RQ invalid CNO 2001 MES int reject MES RQ failed qualification 2010 MES int reject MES RP invalid CNO 2011 MES int reject MES RP failed qualification 2012 MES int reject MES RP operation timeout 2020 MES int reject NCSA missing 2021 MES int reject NCSA invalid CNO 2022 MES int reject NCSA failed qualification 2023 Call failed, Signal lost on NCSA during call setup, check antenna and try again 2024 Call failed, Missing channel assignment, try again 2025 Call failed, Signal lost on NCSC during call setup, check antenna and try again 2030 MES int reject LES ID failed qualification 2040 MES int reject SCCS invalid CNO 2041 MES int reject SCCS not paired 2048 Call failed, invalid number dialed 2049 Call failed, terminal not ready for call, try later 2050 Call failed, Not allowed to make another mobile call yet, wait 20 seconds and try again 2051 Call failed, dialed number is barred 2052 Call failed, LES selected is barred 2053 Call failed, number dialed must be in a phonebook 2053 Call failed, terminal can only be used with a valid SIM 2055 Call failed, user not logged in 2056 Call failed, user not logged in to SIM 2057 Call failed, LES is not in SIM allowed list 2058 Call cleared, SIM removed during call 2059 Call failed, terminal is locked for outgoing calls 2060 MES int reject NCSS failed qualification 2061 MES int reject spot beam invalid 2062 Call failed, no spot beams in the ocean region, select another OR 2063 Terminal ID is not set correctly, check with dealer 2070 Lost NCSC signal, seeking 2071 Stand-Alone Mode finished, seeking network Page 4–40 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 2080 SIM error, check SIM is inserted correctly 2090 MES int reject ORR query invalid 2091 MES int reject ORR invalid 2092 MES int reject MES RR failed qualification 2093 MES int reject MES RR invalid CNO 2094 MES int reject NCRA missing 2095 MES int reject NCRA lost lock 2100 MES int reject illegal call type 2101 MES Int reject illegal peripheral 2102 Call request failed, call already in progress 2103 Call failed, star code is badly formatted 2104 Call failed, cannot accept two address book star codes 2105 Call failed, address book entry not found 2106 Call failed, star code does not exist 2120 MES int reject no transmit power available 2200 Battery flat for terminal operation 2201 Call cleared, used all allocated time for call type 2300 MES int reject no coop response 2301 MES int reject no power 2302 MES int reject no location report 2400 MES int reject no ORA SU found 2F00 LES int reject lack of MES RESP response 2F01 LES int reject lack of MES ARN response 2F02 LES int reject incorrect SVECSCPC 8000 ACSE Recycling 8001 ACSE Top Of Find BB 8002 ACSE Top Of Process BB 8010 ACSE Finding Primary NCS Long 8011 ACSE Finding Secondary NCS Short 8012 ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Short 8013 ACSE Finding Primary NCS Short 8014 ACSE Finding Primary Standalone Long 8018 ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Short 8019 ACSE Finding Secondary Standalone Long 8020 ACSE Found Primary NCS 8021 ACSE Found Secondary NCS Page 4–41 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 8022 ACSE Found Primary Standalone 8023 ACSE Found Secondary Standalone 8024 ACSE found primary NGNCS 8025 ACSE found secondary NGNCS 8030 ACSE NSR Invalid 8040 ACSE Inert 8041 ACSE ODU Status 8080 ACSE NSR Valid 8081 ACSE NSR Valid LES A 8100 ACSE Booting 8110 ACSE Booted 8120 ACSE FIDR ID Invalid 8200 ACSE Spot Beam Selection 8201 ACSE Next Spot Beam 8202 ACSE Successful Spot Beam Selection 8203 ACSE Failed To Find Spot Beam 8204 ACSE Spot Beam Selective Clear 8210 ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No ID 8211 ACSE Spot Beam Reject Mobile Call No TDM 8300 ACSE ORR 8301 ACSE Successful ORR 8302 ACSE Failed ORR 8303 ACSE No ORR 8304 ACSE ORR Tune NCRA 8305 ACSE ORR MES RR 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 8310 ACSE ORR Query Begin 8311 ACSE ORR Query Burst 8312 ACSE ORR Query Successful 8313 ACSE ORR Query Failed 8400 ACSE Fixed Begin 8401 ACSE Fixed MESRP 8402 ACSE Fixed Call Type Set 8410 ACSE Fixed Tune NCSA 8411 ACSE Fixed Channel Assignment Page 4–42 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 8420 ACSE Fixed Clearing Call 8421 ACSE Fixed Selective Clear 8480 ACSE Fixed SCPC Begin 8481 ACSE Fixed SCPC Transmitting 8482 ACSE Fixed Authentication Begin 8483 ACSE Fixed Authentication End 8484 ACSE Fixed Power Control 8485 ACSE Fixed MES Connect 8486 ACSE Fixed Ringing Begin 8500 ACSE Mobile Begin 8501 ACSE Mobile MES RQ1 8502 ACSE Mobile MES RQ2 8503 ACSE Mobile Call Type Set 8510 ACSE Mobile Tune NCSA 8511 ACSE Mobile Channel Assignment 8520 ACSE Mobile Clearing Call 8521 ACSE Mobile Selective Clear 8580 ACSE Mobile SCPC Begin 8581 ACSE Mobile SCPC Transmitting 8582 ACSE Mobile Authentication Begin 8583 ACSE Mobile Authentication End 8584 ACSE Mobile Power Control 8585 ACSE Mobile LES Connect 8586 ACSE Mobile Ringing Begin 8800 ACSE cable call begin 8801 ACSE cable call successful 8900 ACSE Logoff Begin 8901 ACSE Successful Logoff 8902 ACSE No ORR Logoff 9000 ACSE accepts call 9003 ACSE accepted 9004 ACSE rejected 9020 ACSE call waiting 9021 ACSE idle selective clear 9022 ACSE TDM not found 9080 ACSE rejected fixed call due to invalid NSR Page 4–43 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 9081 ACSE InMRSII 9082 ACSE sounder turned on 9083 ACSE sounder turned off 9084 ACSE in lock 9085 ACSE out of lock 9086 ACSE ext sounder turned on 9087 ACSE ext sounder turned off 9088 ACSE timer about to expire 9090 ACSE Smartcard activated 9091 ACSE Smartcard removed 9092 ACSE Smartcard error 90A0 EXPPORT bonding started 90A1 EXPPORT bonding ended 90A2 EXPPORT remote panel present 90A3 EXPPORT remote panel removed 90B0 ACSE MPDS mode selected 90B1 ACSE SCPC mode selected 90C0 ACSE transmit on 90C1 ACSE transmit off 90D0 ACSE spot beam handover started 90D1 ACSE spot beam termination timer started 90F0 Event log wiped 9100 Peripheral on hook 9101 Peripheral off hook 9102 Peripheral connected 9103 Peripheral ringing 9104 Peripheral ready 9105 Peripheral hanging up 9106 Peripheral hang up 9107 Peripheral not responding 9108 Peripheral dialing 9109 Peripheral abort dialing 9120 Peripheral DTMF accepted 9121 Peripheral DTMF rejected 9122 Peripheral invalid request 9123 Peripheral valid request Page 4–44 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 9124 Peripheral bonding auto 9125 Peripheral bonding slave 9126 Peripheral bonding none 9130 Peripheral STU enabled 9131 Peripheral STU disabled 9200 MSG T_AM received 9201 MSG A_AM received 9202 MSG T_HA received 9203 MMI normal 9204 MMI inert 9205 MMI programming 9206 MMI reboot 9207 MMI powerdown 9208 MMI accepted 9209 MMI rejected B000 Mod error, general B001 Mod error, tune failed B002 Mod error, mode failed B003 Mod error, mmr failed B004 Mod error, not responding B010 MOD Invalid Mode B011 MOD Command Invalid B020 Mod error, su underflow B021 MOD Su overflow B022 MOD Su not transmitted B024 MOD invalid frame no B025 MOD invalid slot no B028 MOD cannot Tx Su while tuning B030 MOD channel out of range B032 MOD cannot tune while Tx B033 MOD tuning in progress B040 MOD error watchdog B100 DEMOD error, general B101 DEMOD error, tune failed B102 DEMOD error, mode failed B110 DEMOD invalid mode Page 4–45 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition B130 DEMOD channel out of range B133 DEMOD tuning in progress B200 Generic modem error B201 RF error RX VHF B202 RF error RX Lband B204 RF error RX VHF B208 RF error TX Lband B210 RF error RF error B220 RF error Ref error B27F Mod watchdog tripped B280 Generic voice codec errors B281 TMS spurious interrupt B300 Outdoor unit failure, check connections to ODU B301 ODU error cannot set cable attenuator B310 ODU error power response missing B311 ODU error tune response missing B312 ODU error HPA control response missing B313 ODU error HPA status response missing B314 ODU error alarm response missing B315 ODU error burst timer response missing B316 ODU error HPA backoff response missing B320 ODU error alarm heat B321 ODU error alarm burst B322 ODU error alarm power B323 ODU error alarm over voltage B324 ODU error alarm reverse power B328 ODU failed due to tx power check B329 ODU error alarm timeout B330 ODU error alarm timeout no trip B400 Internal temperature of unit too high, turn off for 10 minutes B401 Internal temperature sensor failed B410 Mod error, handshake failure, power down/up and try again B500 Battery charging communication failure B501 Power supply error B580 Battery is over temperature, charging disabled B581 Battery temperature is now ok, charging enabled Page 4–46 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition FFFD ACSE end marker FFFE Status undefined FFFF Status OK 400000 CT SP bad 400000 No call pending 400001 CT SP good 400002 CT SP full 400003 CT SP access denied 400080 CT SP find 400081 CT SP enumerate 400082 CT SP no entries 400090 CT SP delete 4000A0 CT SP any 4000F0 CT Terminal ID 4000F1 CT Options 4000F2 CT config names 400100 CT SP spot beam selection 400105 CT SP MPDS 400110 CT SP ocean region registration 400111" CT SP ORR query 400112 CT SP log off 400120 CT SP cable call 400200 CT SP go idle 400201 CT SP go idle due to configuration 400202 CT SP selective clear 400208 CT SP go idle clear spot beam 400209 CT SP go idle clear NSR 400210 CT SP go inert 400211 CT SP go inert Smartcard 400212 CT SP go inert DDS poll 400900 CT SP ODU status 400901 CT SP ODU status no alarms 400902 CT SP ODU status DDS 400910 CT SP prod test 400911 CT SP prod test ODU 401000 CT SP clear spot beam Page 4–47 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–20. Fault Code Definitions Inmarsat Cause Code Code Definition 800103 Mobile AMBE 80010F Mobile 64k speech 800124 Mobile aero 64k speech 800404 Mobile data 800504 Mobile facsimile 800606 Mobile 64k UDI 800607 Mobile 56k UDI 800610 Mobile 64k audio 3k1 800622 Mobile aero 64k UDI 800623 Mobile aero 56k UDI 800625 Mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 8D0FFF Mobile MiniM 8E0FFF Mobile HSD 8F0FFF Mobile C00103 Fixed AMBE C0010F Fixed 64k speech C00124 Fixed aero 64k speech C00404 Fixed data C00504 Fixed facsimile C00606 Fixed 64k UDI C00607 Fixed 56k UDI C00610 Fixed 64k audio 3k1 C00622 Fixed aero 64k UDI C00623 Fixed aero 56k UDI C00625 Fixed aero 64k audio 3k1 CD0FFF Fixed miniM CE0FFF Fixed HSD CF0FFF Fixed E. Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures (1) General Perform all test procedures presented in this section in their entirety to test the total operational status of the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. If the unit fails any test, refer to the troubleshooting procedures to determine the faulty circuit. Conduct operational tests for all units returned to service after repair. Page 4–48 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal The procedures assume that the technical personnel are familiar with the test equipment used and can operate the equipment to produce the required inputs and obtain the required results (indications). Refer to the detailed operating procedures and descriptions of the HSD Maintenance Utility Program included in this section. CAUTION: Only Authorized Technical Personnel, trained in general aviation workmanship, that have a basic understanding of SATCOM systems, should proceed with the Operational and Diagnostic test procedures presented in this manual. CAUTION: Changes to some Menu functions may seriously degrade system operation. Note: This manual describes the basic maintenance utility program functions, menus, and reports required for the testing and fault isolation procedures presented in this section. Please consult EMS SATCOM support personnel before entering any unfamiliar menu selections not described in this manual. Note: Using a terminal emulation program, open a log file and save all test results for future reference and test records. This section includes detailed user instructions on opening and saving log files using the HSD maintenance utility program. Note: The procedures presented in this section aid the technical personnel in upgrading, maintaining, or troubleshooting an HSD system. Maintenance does not imply lubrication or adjustment activities. REFERENCE INFORMATION: Refer to the Outline and Installation drawings and the Interconnection diagrams presented in "Installation" on page 3-1 for additional information. (2) Test Setup Procedure The test setup procedure is presented in Table 4–21. Refer to "Connection Requirements" on page 4-4 for detailed connection of test equipment and operating instructions for the HSD maintenance utility program. Table 4–21. Test Setup Procedure STEP ACTION Ensure that the HSD or HSD-X transceiver is neither powered up nor connected to a power source before proceeding. If a remote access has not been installed: on the front panel of the HSD or HSD-X transceiver, remove the maintenance-port-connector cover. Connect a cable to the HSD or HSD-X front-panel or remote maintenance port connector. Connect the other end of the cable to a computer’s serial port. Open a log file to capture all test data. Page 4–49 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (3) Post Test When testing is completed: 1. Save the log file of the test results (or data) for future reference. 2. Remove power from the unit under test and all other test equipment. 3. Disconnect test equipment from the HSD or HSD-X unit. 4. Replace the maintenance-port connector cover (if previously removed during the test setup). (4) Installation and Operational Verification Tests The test procedures assume that an approved ARINC 741 compatible Antenna Subsystem has been completely installed and tested as per the manufacturer’s instructions. To facilitate and document the installation of the equipment, refer to "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. (a) Pre Power-up Checks Carry out all mechanical and electrical verification tests in the systematic order presented in this document. (b) Mechanical Verification Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed mechanical information. Table 4– 22 itemizes recommended mechanical checks. Table 4–22. HSD Mechanical Verification STEP Item Checked Verification Description Mounting Tray Physical Placement Ensure service/maintenance accessibility Fan Tray Confirm plug configuration is correct Check environmental considerations are met Cooling, air-flow, and pressure Check chassis bonding Ensure fan rotation is unobstructed and rotates freely ARINC 600 Connector Check polarized pints (c) Electrical Verification Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed electrical information. Table 4–23 itemizes the recommended electrical checks. Note: When conducting the following tests, do not rack the HSD or HSD-X. WARNING: To avoid personal injury and/or equipment damage, use extreme caution during the Voltage Levels measurements. Page 4–50 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–23. HSD Electrical Verification STEP 1.0 Item Checked Verification Description Power Model 1110-A-0001/1110-A-0080/1110-A-0160: connections 28 V dc polarity Model 1110-A-0060/1110-A-0070/1110-A-0150: 115 V ac polarity Chassis Ground @ BP8 – resistance measurement 2.0 Voltage levels CAUTION: When power is applied to the rack, the fan energizes. Check voltage levels: Model 1110-A-0001/1110-A-0080/1110-A-0160 (28 V dc): between BP2 (+ve) and BP3 (return) Model 1110-A-0060/1110-A-0070/1110-A-0150 (115 V ac): between BPI (115-H) and BP7 (115-C) 3.0 IRS Input IRS wiring: Inertial system wired to TP4J (A) and TP4K (B) IRS format: ARINC 429 Interface Table 4–24. HSD Electrical Verification STEP 1.0 Item Checked Configuration Strap Pins Verification Description SDI: Strapped for HGA, Pin TP5B to TP5D System Configuration: Strapped for System Mode, Pins TP4A, TP4B, TP4C, and/or TP4D strapped to TP7K Data I/O: User specific, default to unrestricted (ISDN only): Pins MP5H to TP7K Forward Address: User specific WOW: (Optional) 2.0 Ethernet Strapped to RJ45 distribution points Note: Optional—other service may be preferred. 3.0 ISDN Strapped to RJ45 distribution points Note: Optional—other service may be preferred. 4.0 DTE - MPDS (RS232) Strapped to DB9S distribution connector Note: Optional—other service may be preferred. Page 4–51 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–24. HSD Electrical Verification STEP Item Checked Verification Description 5.0 Remotes Remote Reset switch operation (Optional—but Maintenance Port, remote access recommended) Power and Fault LED indicators 6.0 RF Coax Rx input cable loss from DLNA to HSD at BP12 and to the RFU at TPC1 (including splitter) Tx output cable loss from HSD at MPC1 to DLNA 7.0 8.0 Antenna Connection Antenna manufacturer and model SDU HSD to SDU interconnect wiring confirmed (Non-Stand-Alone modes) Multi-Control loopbacks installed from TP3E to TP1A and TP3F to TP1B (Stand-Alone Mode) (5) Configuration Parameters Verification The system configuration parameters can now be verified. Verify and document using "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. (a) Parameter Verification Procedure For units operating control processor software versions 5.7 or earlier: 1. From Menu 3, select item ‘L’ (list EEPROM). The EEPROM listing appears on the screen. The EEPROM listing appears as shown in Figure 4–30. 2. From Menu 4, select item ‘Q’ (channel card forward IDs). Ensure the displayed Forward ID(s), for all channel cards, are correct. For units operating control processor software versions 5.7 or later: • Page 4–52 18 September 2007 From Menu 3, select item ‘O’ (list ORT). The ORT listing appears on the screen, as shown in Figure 4–31. Verify that the correct system configuration parameters are listed in the ORT. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal EEPROM LISTING: MAGIC NUMBER :OK MAGIC NUMBER :OK EEPROM VERSION NUMBER 2001 FIRMWARE VERSION 1018 SERIAL NUMBER: xxx IGNORED FAULTS: 0 HARDWARE CONFIG: 0 NUMBER OF POWERUPS (index 0) 5 HOURS OF OPERATION (index 0) 11 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS HIT 'L' for MORE HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS: 2.5 dB FORWARD ID: xxxxxx AORW LES ACCESS CODE: TERRESTRIAL NETWORK ID: HPA-CHANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS: 10.0 dB MAX HPA GAIN: 66.3 dB MIN ANTENNA GAIN: 11.0 dB HPA-ANTENNA CABLE LOSS: FORWARD ID: xxxxxx AORW LES ACCESS CODE: 2.5 dB TERR ESTRIAL NETWORK ID: HPA-CH ANNEL CARD CABLE LOSS: 10.0 dB MAX HPA GAIN: 66.3 dB MIN ANTENNA GAIN: 11.0 dB MAX EIRP: 3.5 dB MAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER: 0.0 Figure 4–30. Sample EEPROM Listing (Control Processor Software, Version 4.5) Page 4–53 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal HSD SERIAL NUMBER S/N ??? MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS HPA TO ANTENNA LOSS: 3.5 dB MANUALLY SET FORWARD ID: 000000 MANUALLY SET GPS PROTECTION ALGORITHMS: DISABLED MANUALLY SET REGISTRATION REQ'D BEFORE CALLS: DISABLED MANUALLY SET CHANNEL CARD TO HPA LOSS: 10.0 dB MANUALLY SET MAX HPA GAIN: 65.00 dB MANUALLY SET MIN ANTENNA GAIN: 8.0 dB MANUALLY SET MAX EIRP: 52.5 dBm MANUALLY SET MAX CHANNEL_CARD POWER: 0.0 dBm MANUALLY SET NUMBER OF CHANNEL CARDS : 2 MANUALLY SET HIT 'O' for MORE FRONT PANEL LEDS ENABLED: 1 MANUALLY SET MIN SECS BETWEEN CHAN CARD RESETS: 300 MANUALLY SET MAINTENANCE PORT INVERSE VIDEO: 1 MANUALLY SET MAINTENANCE PORT DEGREES SYMBOL: 0 MANUALLY SET TERMINAL CATEGORY: HW STRAPPED VALUE MANUALLY SET VIPER ANTENNA GAIN : 12 dB MANUALLY SET VIPER HPA/ANT LOSS : 2.5 dB MANUALLY SET RECEIVER CALIBRATION: 11.0 dB MANUALLY SET MAX HPA POWER: 18.0 dBw MANUALLY SET AERO POWER ALLOCATION: 16.0 dBw MANUALLY SET CHANNEL CARD STARTUP DELAY: 30 sec MANUALLY SET RX32 ACTIVE: 1 MANUALLY SET DEFAULT LATITUDE: 45 D 26' 60.0" N MANUALLY SET HIT 'O' for MORE DEFAULT LONGITUDE: 75 D 42' 0.0" W MANUALLY SET OBEY OXCO STATUS: YES MANUALLY SET CC DEBUG PORT: NONE MANUALLY SET MAX CHANNEL CARD BACKOFF: 28.5 dB MANUALLY SET CO-OP MODE BACKOFF ADJUSTMENT: 10.0 dB MANUALLY SET ALLOW CALLS DESPITE HPA ERRORS: NO (DON'T TRANSMIT IF ERRORS) MANUALLY SET CO-OP MODE DUAL CHANNEL: DISABLED MANUALLY SET MOBILE BURST TIMEOUT: 4000 msec MANUALLY SET MPDS SPOTBEAM HANDOVER: DISABLED MANUALLY SET MAX SIMULATED HPA BACKOFF: 31 dB MANUALLY SET HCM AERO/M4 PRIORITIZATION: AERO MANUALLY SET AERO 'C-CHANNEL' ALLOCATION: 19.5 MANUALLY SET HPA GAIN DROOP SLOPE: 0.10 dB/dB MANUALLY SET HIT 'O' for MORE CATEGORY B LOWER FREQUENCY LIMIT: CATEGORY B UPPER FREQUENCY LIMIT: HIT 'O' for MORE ORT OCEAN REGIONS: SAT LONG W AOR WEST (region #0) 54.0W E AOR EAST (region #1) 15.5W P POR (region #2) 178.0E I IOR (region #3) 64.0E ORT TOOL VERSION: Page 4–54 18 September 2007 1644.50 MHz 1660.50 MHz MANUALLY SET MANUALLY SET LES ID SECONDARY LES ID TNID SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal ORT ORT ORT ORT TOOL TOOL TOOL PART NAME: PART NUMBER: OEM VERSION: NUMBER: CHECKSUM (stored at offset 464) 12133 longest write cycle took 0 MSEC OK Figure 4–31. HSD ORT Sample Display (software version 5.7 or later) (6) System Power-up Checks Note: Before proceeding, ensure that all pre power-up, mechanical, and electrical verifications have been successfully performed and documented using the Installation Checklist provided in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. (a) Preparation The following tests serve primarily to confirm proper system power-up; therefore, they can be performed while the aircraft is still in the hanger. Ensure that a computer, configured as instructed on page 7, is available for testing. (b) Initial Visual LED Verification The system's Power ON and Fault LEDs provide a visual status indication on the HSD and HSD-X front panel and on the optional remote panel. 1. Verify that the LEDs (at both locations) repeatedly cycle ON/OFF when power is applied. 2. Once the cycle has completed (~5 seconds), verify that the power LED remains illuminated. (c) Initial Computer Power up Display With the computer connected and configured to accept Maintenance Port data, power-up the HSD, and verify the initial power-up screen displays as shown in the example, Figure 4–32. The example provides a display using a Stand-Alone Mode installation. Page 4–55 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal KERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002 TESTING RAM ......RAM OK. HSD APPLICATION Vx.x -- Thu Apr 24 08:02:39 2003 Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus. Other passwords provide different levels of authorization. HSD reset -- watchdog may have fired 77 seconds after powerup fault log sector 15 contains 114 entries REAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 9:42:53 Tue Jun 10, 2003 channel card forward id ABC123 STAND-ALONE MODE !!ensure that arinc test data doesn't bother sat906 powering up channel card #1 powering up channel card #2 KERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002 TESTING RAM ......RAM OK. Figure 4–32. HSD Power-up Display (7) System On-Air Checks Conduct system on-air checks to confirm voice and data call capabilities through the satellite and ground station (LES) network. Additional testing confirms that proper signal level parameters are obtained through the antenna subsystem. (a) Preparation Before attempting on-air testing procedures: 1. Complete and confirm all service provider registration and activation. 2. Complete and document all pre power-up and power-up checks. 3. Position the aircraft outside, away from all obstructions in the line-of-site to the satellite used. 4. Apply the aircraft power source. 5. Power on and wait for the IRS to align. 6. Connect a computer (with a terminal emulation program) to the HSD transceiver maintenance port. Note: Several system parameters, such as IRS data, RF signal quality, and log-on messaging, appear on the maintenance port display. Capture and save this maintenance port information to a file for later review or to serve as an historical test record. (b) On-Air Power up and Logon Procedure For this test procedure, use the Level 2, maint password to access the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. With the computer connected, powered-up, and ready to accept maintenances port data: 1. • Page 4–56 18 September 2007 Power up the HSD SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Once the power up messages appear: 2. • Enter the Level 2, password: maint 3. Press the equal sign on the keyboard (=) to access the “reports” menu, then activate report items 21 (call codes) and 23 (standard output). Remember to save these selected items by using the “S” (save to EEPROM) command. 4. In Menu 2, press Z to reset the HSD. • The system resets and displays the power up equivalent reset messages (as previously shown in Figure 4–32). After the reset messages appear, immediately type the password maint. 5. • The data from the previously selected report items 21 and 23 appears. This data refreshes on-screen every second. For easier reading of the data, capture this information in a log file for later review. Compare the output data to the sample shown in Figure 4–33. 6. • Several parameters need to be reviewed and documented for operational verification purposes. Refer to "Installation Checklist" on page D-1 for a detailed list of parameters. Verify that the following system information, as shown on the “System Initialization Display” during the test, is accurate for the HSD unit under test. 7. • Correct forward ID displayed • Correct installation mode displayed • Correct number of channel cards listed • All channel cards trigger ocean region registration The sample figure has been edited for clarity. A successful log on is confirmed when the message “ACSE Successful ORR” and valid “beam” numbers are reported, e.g. beam 4. Page 4–57 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal KERNEL V1.6 -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002 TESTING RAM ......RAM OK. HSD APPLICATION Vx.x -- Thu Oct 10 08:36:29 2002 Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus. Other passwords provide different levels of authorization. fault log sector 15 contains 116 entries REAL TIME CLOCK NOT DETECTED channel card forward id ABC123 STAND-ALONE MODE powering up channel card #1 powering up channel card #2 dop 0 ppb az 0.0 deg el 45.0 deg ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=**** ?? C call=?? CARD #2: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=**** ?? C call=?? 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knots dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knots dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=**** ?? C call=?? CARD #2: C/No=*** sig=**** ?? C call=?? 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knots dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) powering up channel card #2 powering up channel card #1 dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=**** 26 C call=?? CARD #2: C/No=*** sig=**** 24 C call=?? 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knots dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=**** 26 C call=?? CARD #2: C/No=*** sig=**** 24 C call=?? 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knots SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND !!CARD #2 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR WEST!! SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND !!CARD #1 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR WEST!! dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=**** 26 C call=?? beam=255 CARD #2: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 24 C call=?? beam=255 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knots dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 26 C call=?? beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 24 C call=?? beam=4 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knots dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=51.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.9 dB 26 C call=?? beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=51.1 dB/Hz sig=-8.0 dB 24 C call=?? beam=4 45D10'30.3"N 75D6'20.9"W PT 1.8D RL 1.6D HD 25.5D TK 1.8D 23 knots dop -28 ppb az 125.6 deg el 36.3 deg AOR WEST ant gain 11 (p/t) Figure 4–33. Log-on Sample Initialization Display Page 4–58 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (c) On-Air Voice/Data Call Verification Once the system has logged on, place a test voice and/or data call. Refer to "System Description" on page 1-1 for detailed call procedures. Verification of all aircraft communication functions is recommended. Record the test call result on the Installation Checklist provided in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. Note: For the purposes of providing a sample display, an ISDN voice call is documented. Reference the HSD User’s Guide for specific instructions on how to place voice and data calls. (d) On-Air Voice/Data Call Verification Procedure 1. Ensure the maintenance port report items 21 and 23 are activated. 2. Place a test call. Observe and verify the maintenance port messages are similar to the sample provided in Figure 4–34. Page 4–59 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 12:43:24 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz 12:43:24 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-16.4 dB 28 C IDLE IN CALL beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.2 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:25 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.4 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.0 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:26 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.8 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:26 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:27 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.4 dB/Hz sig=-15.6 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:42 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=54.1 dB/Hz sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:43 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz 12:43:43 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.8 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 12:43:55 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-10.7 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.6 dB/Hz sig=-15.3 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 18.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:56 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.1 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D 12:43:58 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D 12:43:58 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) dB 28 C in call beam=4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots cleared by terrestrial circuit 28 C Figure 4–34. HSD Call Sample Display (8) Antenna Tracking Checks As a final ground-based system check, verify the antenna tracking. This confirms proper signal reception and transmission for all aircraft headings. (a) Preparation • Page 4–60 18 September 2007 Perform all previous tests and document the results items before proceeding. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal • As directed in previous tests, connect a computer to the maintenance port and use Level 2, maint password to access the HSD maintenance utility program. • Power up all avionics and align the IRS. • Taxi or tow the aircraft to an unobstructed, line-of-site location where a complete 360° rotation is possible. (b) Antenna Tracking Verification Procedure From the “reports” menu, enable items 8, 20, and 23. 1. Note: Reports item 8 (starboard antenna status word) is ONLY required where conformal antennae are installed. 2. Position the aircraft at a baseline, start-of-test heading (0° recommended). 3. Confirm that the baseline heading, as reported by the aircraft IRS is similar to that reported from the “HD” entry in reports item 23. 4. Record the following data in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1: • Antenna selected—port or starboard (conformal only) • Antenna gain and azimuth angle • Heading • Channel Card number “1” and “2” C/No and signal level Rotate the aircraft through a full 360° circle while stopping to record data at the following heading intervals: 5. • For conformal or phased arrays—every 15° • For mechanically steered antenna—every 30° (9) Optional System Checks The following procedures are recommended—but not essential; however, they serve to confirm successful completion of all previous tests. (a) Preparation Activate report items 21 and 23 for the following checks. (b) Optional Voice/Data Calls Procedure Note: As in previous tests, open a log file to capture all maintenance port activity during aircraft taxiing, flight, and landing segments. 1. Voice/data calls – ground segment: • Place any combination of voice and/or data calls while the aircraft is taxied in a full circle and/or and figure 8 pattern. Note any voice or data anomalies. 2. Voice/data calls – in flight: • Place any combination of voice and/or data calls during any of the segments listed above. The flight pattern may include “standard rate of turn”, figure 8s, or circles. Note any voice or data anomalies. Page 4–61 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal F. Operational Mode and Configuration System Checks This section describes system checks designed for specific HSD modes of operation. (1) Verifying Cooperative Mode System Operation This section provides system operational verification procedures that are specific to Cooperative Mode installations. The following system verification procedures use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program to access system information. Note: Record all test results in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. Note: Depending on the version of software and the system configuration installed, the actual menus and screen displays appearing in “live” systems may differ slightly from the illustrations provided in this document. The illustrations also use “x.x” as a substitute for the actual firmware version. (2) Verifying Honeywell Combined Mode System Operation This section provides system operational verification procedures that are specific to Honeywell Combined Mode installations. The following system verification procedures use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program to access system information. Note: Record all test results in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. (a) Checking HPA Status To check the HPA Status: 1. With the Maintenance Port Utility program activated (MAINT password access), press the equals sign (=) to activate the “Reports”. 2. Press Ctrl+N to scroll to report 25. 3. To toggle on the HPA ARINC I/O report, type 25. Report 25 toggles ON. 4. Press Esc. The “Reports” for HPA Status appears on screen. The screen refreshes every few seconds. HPA maintenance word 600002: SSM: NORMAL OPERATION SDI: HGA HPA HPA status word 64137a: SSM: NORMAL OPERATION SDI: HGA HPA OUTPUT POWER: 28.0 dB LESS THAN 40W MAX. AVAILABLE RMS POWER: 2.0 dB GREATER THAN 40W HELD POWER LINEAR CARRIER OFF BACKOFF RANGE= 31 dB 5. Confirm that the report shows SSM as “normal operation” and that SDI appears configured as HGA HPA. (See example provided above.) 6. Toggle OFF report 25. (Press = , then type 25. Report 25 appears as “OFF”). Page 4–62 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (b) Checking EIRP power Check EIRP power values during system operation using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program. Place a number of call types and combinations while using the “reports” function of the HSD Maintenance Port Utility program and record the reported values in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. (c) Test Set-up Procedure 1. With the Maintenance Port Utility program activated (MAINT password access), press the equals sign (=) to activate the “Reports”. 2. Press Ctrl+N to scroll to report 78. 3. To toggle on the vt100 EIRP/power report, type 78. Report 78 toggles ON. Press Esc. The “Reports” for vt100 EIRP/power appears on screen. The “Reports” screen refreshes every few seconds. 4. (d) EIRP Test Procedures Place an HSD ISDN voice call using channel card one (repeat procedure placing a call using the second channel card), and then place a multi-link PPP ISDN data call (128 kbps ISDN) to confirm bonding is operational. 1. • Confirm that the EIRP/Watts value begins at approximately 20 to 22.5 W until it stabilizes to a lower power usage value of approximately 17.0 W until the end of the call. • Confirm that the HPA value is in the range of 11 W to 16 W during the call. 2. Place two simultaneous HSD Swift64 ISDN voice calls (one call from each channel card) and while both calls are connected, confirm that the EIRP/Watts value is reported similar to the values presented in Figure 4–36 and Figure 4–37. 3. Place one Aero H/H+ call. The Aero Watts value should initially increase to a value of 8 to 10 W and then stabilize to lower watt value of 1.5 to 2.5 W when the call has stabilized. Refer to Figure 4–38 and Figure 4–39. 4. Place two simultaneous Aero H/H+ calls. The Aero H/H+ Watts value should initially increase to a value of 8 to 10 W and then stabilize to lower watt value of 1.5 to 2.5 W when the call has stabilized. Refer to Figure 4–40. Keeping the two Aero H/H+ calls up, place one HSD Swift64 ISDN call. Refer to Figure 4–41. 5. Place two HSD Swift64 ISDN voice calls (one call from each channel card) and while both calls are connected, place an Aero H/H+ voice call. The Aero Watts value should initially increase to a value of 8 to 10 W and then stabilize to lower watt value of 1.5 to 2.5 W when the call has stabilized. Refer to Figure 4–42. Page 4–63 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 6. Place two HSD Swift64 ISDN voice calls (one call from each channel card) and while both calls are connected, place two Aero H/H+ voice calls. The Aero Watts value should initially increase to a value of 8 to 10 W and then stabilize to lower watt value of 1.5 to 2.5 W when the call has stabilized. Refer to Figure 4–43 and Figure 4–44. 7. Toggle OFF report 78. (Press = , then type 78. Report 78 appears as “OFF”). (e) Verifying System Operation when “In-Call” (Report 78) The values shown in the following examples of the HSD Maintenance Port Utility, Report 78, are derived from an HCM system operating with a 12 dBW gain and 2.5 dBW HPA-to-antenna-loss and assumes good beam coverage. CHANNEL CARD EIRP/WATTS #1 0.0/0 #2 17.5/6 HPA (ITS): 11.3 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 6.3 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 15:05:55 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 5.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 06 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=00 RESERVED=13 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.0 dB Figure 4–35. Stable Connection with one M4 (Swift64) call CHANNEL CARD #1 EIRP/WATTS 18.5/8 #2 22.5/20 HPA (ITS): 35.7 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 27.9 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 12:05:31 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 20 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=00 RESERVED=13 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.8 dB Figure 4–36. Initial Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls CHANNEL CARD #1 EIRP/WATTS 17.5/6 #2 17.5/6 HPA (ITS): 15.9 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 12.5 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 12:07:33 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 4.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 08 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=00 RESERVED=13 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.4 dB Figure 4–37. Stable Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls Page 4–64 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal CHANNEL CARD EIRP/WATTS #1 0.0/0 #2 0.0/0 HPA (ITS): 9.0 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 0.0 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 15:10:02 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 20 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=10 RESERVED=23 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.2 dB Figure 4–38. Call Initialization (Aero H/H+ call) CHANNEL CARD EIRP/WATTS #1 0.0/0 #2 0.0/0 HPA (ITS): 2.2 WATTS H CHANNEL CARDS: 0.0 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 15:11:24 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 20 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=02 RESERVED=14 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=61.2 dB Figure 4–39. Stable Connection with one Aero H/H+ call CHANNEL CARD EIRP/WATTS #1 0.0/0 #2 0.0/0 HPA (ITS): 4.0 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 0.0 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 15:14:09 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 20 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=04 RESERVED=16 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=61.7 dB Figure 4–40. Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls CHANNEL CARD #1 EIRP/WATTS 17.5/6 #2 0.0/0 HPA (ITS): 15.9 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 6.2 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 15:15:48 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 3.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 10 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=04 RESERVED=17 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.3 dB Figure 4–41. Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and one M4 (Swift64) call CHANNEL CARD #1 EIRP/WATTS 18.5/8 #2 18.5/8 HPA (ITS): 17.9 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 15.7 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 =04 RESERVED=17 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.6 dB 12:16:10 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 4.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 08 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=02 RESERVED=15 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.6 dB Figure 4–42. Connection with two M4 (Swift64) calls and one Aero H call Page 4–65 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal CHANNEL CARD #1 EIRP/WATTS 18.5/8 #2 17.5/6 HPA (ITS): 22.5 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 14.2 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 12:10:22 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 5.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 06 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=11 RESERVED=24 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.8 dB Figure 4–43. Initial Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and two M4 (Swift64) calls CHANNEL CARD #1 EIRP/WATTS 18.5/8 #2 17.5/6 HPA (ITS): 17.9 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 14.3 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 12:12:01 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 5.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 06 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=02 RESERVED=15 HPA=36 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.5 dB Figure 4–44. Stable Connection with two Aero H/H+ calls and two M4 (Swift64) calls If the HSD Honeywell Combined Mode system does not pass the system operational verification procedure, or if the system fails, refer to the test and fault isolation checks presented in the following table. Table 4–25. Honeywell Combined Mode Basic Fault Checks SYMPTOM CHECK System “not working” Strapping and SDI – HPA Status No communication with avionics Check multi-control wiring Unable to place an HSD Swift64 call Activate Report 38 and check for power request value. Check RF connections between the Transmit cable and the HSD DLNA Check the connection of the receive cable between the HSD and the splitter Unable to place an Aero H/H+ call Check transmit cable between the Aero H RFU and the HSD HPA If a low receive value is indicated on either the HSD or Honeywell SDU, check splitter connections (receive cable from DLNA to the splitter) Check the connection on the Aero H RFU receive cable connector Calls dropping when placing multiple calls HPA to antenna, cable loss value may not be accurate. Re-measure the HPA to antenna cable loss and re-configure the HSD system to match the revised value. Page 4–66 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (3) Verifying Multi-Channel Configuration System Operation This section provides system operational verification procedures that are specific to Multi-Channel configuration installations. The following system verification procedures use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program to access system information. Note: Record all test results in "Installation Checklist" on page D-1. The following system verification procedures use the HSD Maintenance Port Utility’s “console-mode” functionality to access system information from all of the HSD-X units in a Multi-Channel installation. (a) Activating “Console-Mode” The HSD-Xs are monitored using the ”console-mode” function of the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. To remotely access an HSD-X for monitoring purposes using the “console-mode” feature of the HSD-128 transceiver’s Maintenance Port Utility Program: 1. Connect to the HSD-128 Maintenance Port (using either the front panel or remote access connector). 2. Open a session of the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program using the password MAINT. 3. In Menu 18, press X. The application prompts you to enter the number of the HSD-X you want to monitor. 4. Type the number of the HSD-X you want to monitor, and then press Enter. 5. Enter the password: maint The reports screen appears for the selected HSD-X. Page 4–67 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MENU 18 HSD-X slave console mode list HSD-X slave cable loss N next menu O FIRMWARE Vx.x HSD-X slave cable loss get HSD-X firmware version previous menu = select reports TERMINAL: HSD-X NETWORK MODE which slave (1 thru 2 -- 0=none) ? 1 Slave #1 console mode. Press ~ to exit. MENU 1 override forward id explain hpa error status hcm RF threshold N next menu O FIRMWARE Vx.x test LEDs set hcm attenuator previous menu = select reports TERMINAL: HSD-X NETWORK MODE (b) Installation Check – Multi-Channel Conduct the following installation check to confirm proper Multi-Channel installation and configuration before performing the operational verification tests. Before beginning the system checks, connect to the HSD-128 Maintenance Port and open the HSD Maintenance Utility Program using the password MAINT. Check the Forward ID in all units. 1. • In Menu 4, press Q. Check the System Config and I/O strapping is correctly installed for all units. 2. • Activate Report 28: Press the equal sign “=”, type 28, press Enter, and then press Esc to activate the report. ID=XXXXXX config=11111000 DUART1=11101111 DUART2=10001111 DUART3=11111111 DATA I/O CONFIG=00001010 3. Check the cable loss values are in the required range. 4. Check that LES Access Codes are configured correctly in all units. • Check that the HSD-X “slaves” are recognized by the system. 5. • Page 4–68 18 September 2007 In Menu 3, press O (until the LES access codes are displayed). Activate Report 78: Press the equal sign “=”, type 78, press Enter, and then press Esc to activate the report. All installed HSD-X units should be listed on screen as shown in the 4-channel system example below. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal CHANNEL CARD EIRP/WATTS #1 0.0/0 #2 0.0/0 S1 0.0/0 S2 0.0/0 HPA (ITS): 4.0 WATTS H CHANNEL CARDS: 0.0 WATTS ANT GAIN: 14 11:33:28 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 14 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=00 HPA=60 WATTS HPA GAIN=59.9 dB (c) Operational Verification Tests – Multi-Channel The operational verification test procedures provided in this section are specific to Multi-Channel HSD systems and confirm basic system operation. All verification tests require using the HSD Maintenance Port Utility Program. Verify valid receive (Rx) signals: 1. • With the system powered up, activate Report 23. Confirm that the receive C/No signal value is greater than 50 dB/Hz as shown in the example below. 45D21'16.1"N 75D45'0.2"W PT 0.0D 11:35:55 dop 0 ppb az 330.7 deg el CARD #1: C/No=55.5 dB/Hz sig=-15.9 CARD #2: C/No=55.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.9 CARD S1: C/No=56.1 dB/Hz sig=-17.1 CARD S2: C/No=55.4 dB/Hz sig=-16.6 RL 0.0D HD 180.0D TK 0.0D 0 knots 33.5 deg AOR WEST ant gain 14 (p/t) dB 26.0 C no call beam=5 dB 26.0 C no call beam=5 dB 30.0 C no call beam=5 dB 30.5 C no call beam=5 Verify valid transmit (Tx) signals: 2. • Activate Report 78. • Place a call on the first channel of the Multi-Channel HSD system. • Confirm that the EIRP/Watts values are similar to the examples provided in Figure 4–45 and Figure 4–46. • Repeat step b. and c. for each channel installed on the system. Verify Multi-Channel Operation: 3. • Activate Report 78. • Place calls on each channel of the Multi-Channel HSD system. • Confirm that the EIRP values are similar to the examples provided in Figure 4–47. CHANNEL CARD #1 EIRP/WATTS 22.5/25 #2 0.0/0 S1 0.0/0 S2 0.0/0 HPA (ITS): 31.8 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 25.1 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 11:38:03 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 25 WATTS Figure 4–45. Initial Call, Channel #1 Page 4–69 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal CHANNEL CARD #1 EIRP/WATTS 18.5/10 #2 0.0/0 S1 0.0/0 S2 0.0/0 HPA (ITS): 14.2 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 10.1 WATTS ANT GAIN: 12 11:39:36 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 25 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=00 HPA=60 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.6 dB Figure 4–46. Stable Call, Channel #1 CHANNEL CARD #1 #2 S1 S2 EIRP/WATTS 17.5/8 18.5/10 19.5/10 20.5/16 HPA (ITS): 50.4 WATTS A CHANNEL CARDS: 43.8 WATTS ANT GAIN: 14 14:43:43 PERMITTED UNDERDRAFT: 0.0 dB ADD M4 CALL: 25 WATTS AERO WATTS: USED=00 HPA=60 WATTS HPA GAIN=62.6 dB Figure 4–47. Confirmed Operation of Multi-Channel (4 calls up) If the Multi-Channel HSD configuration does not pass the system operational verification procedure, or if the system fails, refer to the test and fault isolation checks presented in Table 4–26. Table 4–26. Multi-Channel Basic Fault Checks SYMPTOM CHECK Ocean Region Registration Fails Make sure all HSD LRUs are configured with the same default LES Access Codes (Primary and Secondary) Unable to place calls using the HSD-Xs Check System Config and I/O Config strapping System “not working” (Fault LED – Check HPA Status and FWD ID, SDI strapping ON) No communication with avionics Check multi-control wiring Unable to place an HSD Swift64 call Activate Report 38 and check for power request value. Check RF coax connections in the Transmit path to the DLNA Calls dropping when placing multiple calls HPA to antenna, cable loss value may not be accurate. Re-measure the HPA to antenna and HSD-X to HSD-128 cable losses and re-configure the HSD system to match the revised value. G. Software Load Procedures EMS SATCOM may occasionally release new software. Newly released software is loaded via a laptop or computer connected by cable to the maintenance port of the HSD system using an HSD Firmware Upgrade application (PN 1110-SW-1021 – ADT_LOAD.exe). Page 4–70 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal When loading software to HSD units in installation environments that include an SDU, disable the SDU (Power off or remove the sdu from the arinc tray) before beginning the software load procedure. Note: Refer to the applicable software release note or service bulletin for a specific list of the software files that need to be loaded. If in doubt, verify with EMS SATCOM product support that the software version being loaded is the latest release. The file formats of the software presented in this manual are examples only; refer to the applicable service bulletin for the actual files required for each specific software load. Note: When loading channel card software to HSD transceivers in installation environments where the SDU has been disabled or removed, the channel card (or cards) must be manually powered up using the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. (1) Loading Channel Card Software This section describes how to load channel card software on to HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Note: Software cannot be loaded onto an HSD-X unit using the pass-through mode function via the HSD transceiver. Software must be loaded to an HSD-X via the front connector or ARINC connections of the HSD-X unit. To load channel card software 1. Connect a computer to the Maintenance Port of the HSD transceiver. 2. Turn on the computer. 3. Save the HSD Load Program file (PN 1110-SW-1021) to a folder on your PC. (Recommended: Create a folder named HSD Load in the PC’s root directory and save the load application file to this folder.) 4. Apply power to the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. 5. If loading software in installation environments where the SDU is disabled during software loading, the channel cards must be manually powered up before proceeding with the software load. Refer to "Forcing Channel Card Power Up Procedure" on page 4-76 for detailed instructions. 6. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. 7. In the HSD folder, double-click on the ADT_LOAD.exe to launch the load application. The ADT_LOAD application opens in a DOS window and displays the “Load Target” menu. Page 4–71 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003 which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with 6 = HPA application plus 7 = HPA application plus 8 = channel card #1 boot 9 = channel card #2 boot 11 = channel card #1 pic 12 = channel card #2 pic 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT manual setup boot with manual setup boot code code code code The ADT_LOAD application prompts the user to select a “Target”. 8. From the “Which Target” menu: • To load channel card application software (for example: appl41.hex, cfig41.hex ) to channel card #1, press 1 • To load channel card application software (for example: appl41.hex, cfig41.hex) to channel card #2, press 2 9. Press Enter. The load application prompts you to type in a filename. 10. Type the appropriate filename for the software being loaded to the HSD Channel Card (for example appl41.hex or cfig41.hex), and then press Enter. The application prompts you to select a COM port. 11. Select the COM port on your computer connected to the HSD. 12. Type the appropriate COM port (1 or 2—typically 1), and then press Enter. 13. To start the load, press Enter. Communication with the HSD transceiver is established. The following screen appears. A percentage (%) progress indicator appears on the screen showing load status. Once the load is complete, a confirmation message briefly appears on the screen indicating that the file has been successfully loaded. The DOS window then closes and the HSD resets. Page 4–72 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003 which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT ?1 File name, which contains the firmware image? applxx.hex This download will require one of the PC's COM ports. (1, 2, etc) [1] ? Connect COM1 of this PC to the maintenance port of the data terminal. Hit to abort, or to proceed Establishing communication to the data terminal -- DO NOT CYCLE THE POWER !! Hit ESC to abort. DATA TERMINAL APPARENTLY READY TO ACCEPT PROGRAM switching to 57.6 kbaud loading applxx.hex 1% 5% 10% This completes the first load of the Channel Card software selected in step 10. 14. For HSD transceivers with two channel cards, repeat all required software loads to both channel cards. 15. Repeat steps 7 through 13 for all other required software loads of Channel Card Software files as specified in the applicable software service bulletin. 16. When all Channel Card Software is loaded, reset or cycle the power on the HSD transceiver. 17. If no other software loads are required, proceed to "Verifying Software Loads" on page 4-78. 18. In the event that the load fails, restart the load from the beginning of the Loading Channel Card Software procedure. If after two attempts the load still does not complete successfully, assume that the software disks or files may have been corrupted or the software is incompatible with the hardware configuration. Contact EMS SATCOM product support for assistance. (2) Loading Control Processor Software CAUTION: When loading software to the units in installation environments that include an SDU, disable the SDU (Power off or remove the sdu from the arinc tray) before beginning the software load procedure. Page 4–73 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal To load control processor software: 1. Connect a computer to the Maintenance Port of the HSD transceiver. 2. Turn on the computer. 3. Save the HSD Load Program file (PN 1110-SW-1021) to a folder on your PC. (Recommended: Create a folder named HSD Load in the PC’s root directory and save the load application file to this folder.) 4. Apply power to the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. 5. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. 6. In the HSD Load folder, double-click on the ADT_LOAD.exe file to launch the load application. The ADT_LOAD application opens in a DOS window and displays the “Load Target” menu, as displayed in the example below. The ADT_LOAD application prompts the user to select a “Target.” HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003 which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT 7. From the “Which Target” menu: • To load control processor software (for example, adt70.bin) to the control processor, press 0 8. Press Enter. The load application prompts you to type in a filename. 9. Type the appropriate filename for the software being loaded to the HSD Control Processor (for example adt70.bin), and then press Enter. The application prompts you to select the COM port that is connected to the HSD or HSD-X. Page 4–74 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 10. Type the appropriate COM port (1 or 2—typically 1), and then press Enter. 11. To proceed with the load, press Enter. Note: If you press Esc, the application aborts the software load. Only press Esc if you want to discontinue the software load procedure. Communication with the HSD or HSD-X transceiver is established. The following screen appears. As shown in the example screen, a percentage (%) progress indicator appears on the screen showing load status. Once the load is complete, a confirmation message briefly appears on the screen indicating that the file has been successfully loaded. The DOS window then closes and the HSD resets. HSD/HST LOADER V3.0 -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003 which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with manual setup 6 = HPA application plus boot with manual setup 7 = HPA application plus boot 8 = channel card #1 boot code 9 = channel card #2 boot code 11 = channel card #1 pic code 12 = channel card #2 pic code 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT ?) 0 File name, which contains the firmware image? Adt70.bin This download will require one of the PC's COM ports. (1, 2, etc) [1] ? Connect COM1 of this PC to the maintenance port of the data terminal. Hit to abort, or to proceed Establishing communication to the data terminal -- DO NOT CYCLE THE POWER !! Hit ESC to abort. DATA TERMINAL APPARENTLY READY TO ACCEPT PROGRAM switching to 57.6 kbaud loading adt70.bin 1% 5% 10% This completes the load of the Control Processor software selected in step 9. 12. When software load is finished, reset or cycle the power on the HSD of HSD-X transceiver. 13. If no other software loads are required, proceed to Verifying the Software Load. 14. In the event that the load fails, restart the load from the beginning of the Loading Control Processor Software Procedure. If after two attempts the load still does not complete successfully, assume that the software disks may have been corrupted or the software is incompatible with the hardware configuration. Contact EMS SATCOM product support for assistance. Page 4–75 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (3) Forcing Channel Card Power Up Procedure In installation environments that include an SDU, the SDU must be disabled before loading software to the HSD transceiver. With the SDU disabled (removed from the ARINC tray or powered off), the channel card(s) must be manually powered on using the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. Note: If the channel card is already powered up, the “force channel card power up” item “U” in Menu 4 is not available and will not appear as a selection option. To force channel card power up: 1. Click Start, then point to: ProgramsBAccessoriesBCommunicationsBHyperTerminal, and then click on the connection to the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. 2. At the password prompt, type MAINT and then press Enter. The Maintenance Utility Program Menu 1 appears. 3. Press Ctrl+N to scroll to Menu 4. 4. To force channel card power up, press U. 5. Wait 30 seconds for the channel card to power up before continuing with the load procedure. 6. Close HyperTerminal and all other applications running on the PC (especially programs that use the serial COM port) before continuing with the software load. The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. (4) Loading HPA Software Load HPA software as required according to the applicable software service bulletin as released by EMS Technologies. WARNING: BEFORE loading NEW hpa software, Contact EMS SATCOM product suppport to verify the unit's hpa version is compatible with field-loading of hpa software. if the HPA version is not compatible with field-loading, you must send it back to EMS Technologies for upgrading. There are four different versions of HPA—two variants for 28 V dc units and Two variants for 115 V ac units. hpa software is variant-specific— loading the wrong software version may lock the unit; therefore, Contact EMS SATCOM for assistance when loading any Hpa software to ensure that the correct hpa software and revision is loaded. To load HPA software 1. Remove power from the HSD transceiver. 2. Connect a computer to the Maintenance Port of the HSD transceiver. 3. Turn on the computer. 4. Apply power to the HSD transceiver. Page 4–76 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. Close all other applications running on the computer (especially programs that use the serial COM port, e.g. HyperTerminal). The load program may not execute successfully if other programs are running. In the HSD folder, double-click on the ADT_LOAD.exe to launch the load program. The ADT_LOAD application opens in a DOS window and displays the “Load Target” menu. HSD/HST LOADER Vx.x -- Mon Mar 24 12:12:17 2003 which target ? 0 = control processor 1 = channel card #1 2 = channel card #2 3 = HPA application 4 = data i/o card 5 = HPA application with 6 = HPA application plus 7 = HPA application plus 8 = channel card #1 boot 9 = channel card #2 boot 11 = channel card #1 pic 12 = channel card #2 pic 13 = HCM application 14 = HST ORT 15 = HSD ORT 16 = HSD-X ORT manual setup boot with manual setup boot code code code code 6. Select Menu item 7, HPA application plus boot, and then press Enter. 7. The system prompts you for a filename. (i.e. “Filename which contains the firmware image?”) Note: Use care to ensure that the correct file name is entered for the HSD transceiver’s power type. 8. Enter A1703006-V9A6.SX for a 28 V dc unit 9. Enter C0300106-V4A2.SX for a 115 V ac unit 10. Press Enter. The program prompts you to select a COM port. 11. Select the COM port on your computer connected to the HSD. 12. Type the appropriate COM port (1 or 2—typically 1), and then press Enter. 13. To start the load, press Enter. A percentage (%) progress indicator appears on the screen. A confirmation message briefly appears on the screen indicating that the file has been Page 4–77 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal successfully loaded, and then the DOS window closes. This completes HPA software load. If all software loads are finished, verify the success of the software load by following the instructions provided in "Verifying Software Loads" on page 4-78. 14. In the event that the load fails, restart the load from the beginning of "Loading HPA Software" on page 4-76. If after two attempts, the load still does not complete successfully, assume that the software disks may have been corrupted or the software is incompatible with the hardware configuration. Contact EMS SATCOM product support for assistance. (5) Verifying Software Loads After loading all software as specified in the applicable software service bulletin, released by EMS Technologies, verify that all software loaded successfully. WARNING: In systems with disabled or removed SDU, the channel card or cards must be manually powered on to enable the verification of the software load. To verify that software loaded successfully 1. Apply power to the HSD. 2. On the computer, open HyperTerminal and start the HSD Maintenance Utility Program. 3. Connect a computer to the Maintenance Port of the HSD transceiver. 4. Enter the Maintenance Utility Program password: Type maint and then press Enter. The Maintenance Utility Program, Menu 1 appears. MENU1 FIRMWARE Vx.x override forward id explain hpa error status hcm RF threshold N next menu O 5. Press Ctrl+N to scroll to MENU 2. Menu 2 appears. Page 4–78 18 September 2007 test LEDs set hcm attenuator previous menu = select reports SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MENU2 FIRMWARE Vx.x set veh-relative azimuth desired az veh-rel velocity enter time of day re-enter logon password reset HSD-128 N next menu O set veh-relative elevation resume automatic steering annotate log file get firmware versions previous menu = select reports 6. To display the versions of software loaded onto the HSD, press V. A list of Firmware Versions appears similar to the example provided below (actual versions will differ depending on the versions of software installed on the transceiver). FIRMWARE VERSIONS: KERNEL: APPLICATION: CHANNEL CARD #1: CHANNEL CARD #2: HPA: DATA I/O CARD: V1.6 -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002 V4.1 -- Thu Oct 10 08:36:29 2002 0.5.4.0 9040 -- 0.0.0.30 -- 1.8.0.A 0.5.4.0 9040 -- 0.0.0.30 -- 1.8.0.A S/W P/N: A1703706 Ver: V1B1-Unit #00043 F/W Ver: V5 -- MAY BE TYPE 1 Note: HSD units with two channel cards also list the firmware versions for Channel Card #2. 7. Verify that all software has successfully loaded. In two-channel card units verify that the software has loaded successfully to both channel cards. Verify that the software versions (Firmware Versions) shown, match the versions listed on the load disk (or files) and in the software service bulletin. 8. Close the HyperTerminal session. 9. Remove power from the HSD. 10. Turn off the computer. This completes the software load verification. The next section explains how to disconnect the software load equipment. (6) Disconnecting Load Equipment After completing all required software loads and load verification: 1. Remove power from the HSD (if applicable). 2. Turn off the computer (if applicable). 3. Disconnect the serial cable connector from the computer COM port. 4. Disconnect the serial cable connector from the HSD Maintenance Port. Page 4–79 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (7) Completing Record of Accomplishment After completing all required software loads and the load verification, fill out the Record of Accomplishment form provided in "Record of Accomplishment" on page E-1. (Retain a copy for future reference.) Page 4–80 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 3. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation This section provides troubleshooting procedures for HSD units experiencing faults during the commissioning process or previously operational units now considered as “not working”. Troubleshooting procedures require data obtained using the Maintenance Utility Program feature of the HSD units. Refer to "HSD Maintenance Utility Program" on page 4-3 for specific instructions on how to access and use the Maintenance Port and Maintenance Utility Program of the unit. A. Troubleshooting Principles (1) Non-specific Complaints When troubleshooting units with non-specific complaints, complete all system verification and functional tests in "Operational and Diagnostic Test Procedures" on page 4-48. Document whether the unit passes or fails each test. If the unit passes all tests and no fault is discovered, all associated equipment and aircraft wiring should be tested. If the unit fails a specific test, isolate the actual fault or faults by performing troubleshooting procedures provided in this section. (2) Specific Complaints When troubleshooting units with specific complaints, service personnel may choose not to complete some or all of the diagnostic tests and proceed directly to the applicable troubleshooting and fault isolation procedure provided in this section. B. Equipment Required Equipment required for troubleshooting and fault isolation is the same as the equipment required for test purposes as listed in page 2. C. Troubleshooting Aids This section presents examples of maintenance screens and troubleshooting tables to assist in troubleshooting and fault isolation activities. The exact screen display may vary depending on the version of the unit’s operational software and installation configuration mode. Note: The screens used in the figures presented in this section may have been edited for clarity and for illustrative purposes. (1) Fault Isolation Screen Displays Figure 4–48 to Figure 4–54 provide example maintenance screens for reference and illustration purposes. Page 4–81 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal KERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002 TESTING RAM ......RAM OK. HSD APPLICATION Vx.x -- Thu Apr 24 13:28:58 2003 Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus. Other passwords provide different levels of authorization. fault log sector 15 contains 1372 entries REAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 9:52:57 Tue Jun 3, 2003 channel card forward id ABC123 EEPROM forces STAND-ALONE MODE !!ensure that arinc test data doesn't bother sat906 powering up channel card #1 powering up channel card #2 SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND !!CARD #2 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!! SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND !!CARD #1 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!! 9:53:20 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 28 C 54 dB/Hz 9:53:20 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 54 dB/Hz 9:53:24 #2 ABC456 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 30 C 53 dB/Hz 9:53:24 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8306 ACSE failed retry ORR 28 C 53 dB/Hz 9:53:28 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 28 C 54 dB/Hz 9:53:33 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 28 C 53 dB/Hz Figure 4–48. Successful Ocean Region Registration: Report 21 activated CARD #1: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-16.9 dB 27 C no call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-18.2 dB 27 C no call beam=4 45D21'29.1"N 75D1'54.6"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D CARD #1: C/No=52.4.0 dB/Hz sig=-17.6 dB 27 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.4 dB/Hz sig=-18.5 dB 27 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 0 knots Figure 4–49. No call: Report 23 activated CARD #1: C/No=52.5 dB/Hz sig=-17.2 dB 28 C no call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:55 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.1 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 18.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C Figure 4–50. In Call: Reports 21 and 23 activated Page 4–82 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 12:43:55 dop**** az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 11 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-16.9 dB 27 C no call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.9 dB/Hz sig=-18.2 dB 27 C no call beam=4 ************ *********** ********* ******** ********* ******* ******* CARD #1: C/No=52.4.0 dB/Hz sig=-17.6 dB 27 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=52.4 dB/Hz sig=-18.5 dB 27 C no call beam=4 ************ *********** ********* ******** ********* ******* ******* Figure 4–51. No IRS Data: Report 23 activated Figure 4–52. No Signal: Report 23 activated 15:01:27 #2 15:01:29 #1 Registration 15:01:30 #2 Registration 15:01:35 #1 15:01:36 #2 15:01:37 #1 Registration 15:01:39 #2 Registration 15:01:43 #1 15:01:45 #2 ABC123 DEF456 2 7.0 C ABC123 2 6.0 C DEF456 ABC123 DEF456 2 7.0 C ABC123 2 6.5 C DEF456 ABC123 W5 call term 8306 26.0 C W5 call init 4000110 14.00 dbw SP Ocean Region W5 call init 4000110 14.00 dbw SP Ocean Region W5 call term 8306 27.0 C W5 call term 8306 26.5 C W5 call init 4000110 14.00 dbw SP Ocean Region W5 call init SP Ocean Region 4000110 14.00 dbw W5 call term 8302 W5 call term 8302 ACSE Failed ORR ACSE Failed ORR 27.0 C 26.5 C Figure 4–53. Failed Ocean Region Registration: Report 21 activated Page 4–83 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 10:00:35 Tue Jun 3, 2003 KERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002 TESTING RAM ......RAM OK. HSD APPLICATION Vx.x -- Thu Apr 24 13:28:58 2003 Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus. Other passwords provide different levels of authorization. fault log sector 15 contains 1384 entries REAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 10:00:55 Tue Jun 3, 2003 **** strapping identifies forward id ffffff -- not in table ***** **** eeprom forward id 0 not in table ***** EEPROM forces STAND-ALONE MODE !!ensure that arinc test data doesn't bother sat906 powering up channel card #1 powering up channel card #2 SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND !!CARD #2 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!! SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND !!CARD #1 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!! Figure 4–54. Forward ID Not Strapped: No reports activated Page 4–84 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal KERNEL Vx.x -- Mon Oct 07 13:36:26 2002 TESTING RAM ......RAM OK. HSD APPLICATION V4.6 -- Thu Apr 24 13:28:58 2003 Type "menu" to activate the maintenance port menus. Other passwords provide different levels of authorization. fault log sector 15 contains 1396 entries REAL TIME CLOCK PRESENT: 10:09:51 Tue Jun 3, 2003 channel card forward id ABC123 EEPROM forces STAND-ALONE MODE !!ensure that arinc test data doesn't bother sat906 powering up channel card #1 powering up channel card #2 SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND !!CARD #2 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!! SENDING FIRST OC_RESTART COMMAND !!CARD #1 -- CONTROL PROCESSOR TRIGGERING OCEAN REGION REG IN AOR EAST!! Log-on password entered: "Maint" MENU1 X override forward id Y explain hpa error status N next menu O HPA ERROR CODE 1800 FIRMWARE Vx.x L test LEDs previous menu = select reports Y command entered: HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA Event log messages: MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x L list EEPROM E reset EEPROM M misc. EEPROM parameter N system serial number G clear call log N next menu O HPA ERROR CODE 1800 hit '0' for complete log list event log clear event log ignored faults list call log previous menu '1' for 'special' events = select reports '-' for specific entry FAULT (ENTRY #1428): address ABC123: 30 seconds after powerup powerup #204 389 hours operation Jun 03 11:19:39 2003 ERROR CODE 40 HPA FAULT -- 0x1800 HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA Continuous Power Requests From LES, Report 21 activated: Page 4–85 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 10:51:26 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 54 dB/Hz 10:51:26 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 54 dB/Hz 10:51:27 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 10:51:27 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 10:51:27 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 0 dB/Hz 10:51:27 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 0 dB/Hz 10:51:29 #1 ABC123 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 29 C 54 dB/Hz 10:51:29 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C 54 dB/Hz 10:51:29 #2 ABC456 E5 start 400110 14.00 dBW CT SP ocean region registration 30 C Figure 4–55. No Strap on SDI Lines (open): No reports activated Page 4–86 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Log-on password entered: "Maint" MENU1 FIRMWARE Vx.x X override forward id Y explain hpa error status N next menu O HPA UNCONTROLLED test LEDs previous menu = select reports Y command entered: HPA HPA HPA HPA MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE STATUS WORD STATUS WORD WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA) NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA Event log messages: MENU 3 FIRMWARE Vx.x L list EEPROM E reset EEPROM M misc. EEPROM parameter N system serial number G clear call log N next menu O list event log clear event log ignored faults list call log previous menu = select reports FAULT (ENTRY #1422): address ABC123: 30 seconds after powerup powerup #203 389 hours operation Jun 03 11:15:07 2003 ERROR CODE 40 HPA FAULT -- 0x1c80 HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR HPA MAINTENANCE WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA) HPA STATUS WORD NOT REPORTING HGA ANTENNA Figure 4–56. Wrong Strap on SDI Lines (TP5A to GND) Page 4–87 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MENU1 FIRMWARE Vx.x X override forward id Y explain hpa error status N next menu O HPA UNCONTROLLED test LEDs previous menu = select reports Y command entered: HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTED DATA) Event log messages: MENU 3 L list EEPROM E reset EEPROM M misc. EEPROM parameter N system serial number G clear call log N next menu O FIRMWARE Vx.x list event log clear event log ignored faults list call log previous menu = select reports FAULT (ENTRY #1442): address 4ff7d4: 30 seconds after powerup powerup #207 389 hours operation Jun 03 11:33:02 2003 ERROR CODE 40 HPA FAULT -- 0x480 HPA MAINTENANCE WORD REPORTING ARINC ERROR HPA STATUS WORD REPORTING INVALID SSM 1 (NO COMPUTE Figure 4–57. Stand-Alone Mode Multi-Control Loopback (TP1A-3E & TP1B-3F) Not Wired: HSD Fault LED “ON” 11:47:43 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 30 C 50 dB/Hz 11:47:46 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 8301 ACSE successful ORR 28 C 50 dB/Hz 11:47:55 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 29 C 47 dB/Hz 11:47:57 #1 ABC123 E5 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz calling 0116135919064# 11:48:10 #1 ABC123 E5 stop 11d2 call failed, insufficient digits in service address 28 C 0 calling 0116135919064# Figure 4–58. Incorrect Dialing Format: Reports 21 and 52 Enabled Page 4–88 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Enter 1 thru 67 to toggle report on/off X turn off all reports N show next page ESC return to PREVIOUS MENU save to EEPROM 1 OFF messages to channel card #1 13 OFF messages to channel card #2 2 OFF hex output to channel card #1 14 OFF hex output to channel card #2 3 OFF responses from channel card #1 15 OFF responses from channel card #2 4 OFF hex input from channel card #1 16 OFF hex input from channel card #2 5 OFF channel #1 misc info 17 OFF channel #2 misc info 6 OFF sb antenna arinc input 18 ON port antenna arinc input 7 OFF sb antenna maintenance word 19 ON port antenna maintenance word 8 OFF sb antenna status word 20 ON port antenna status word 9 OFF channel card call status 21 OFF call codes 10 OFF channel card THA codes 22 OFF spot beam selection 11 OFF channel card errors 23 OFF OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active HGA LNA on port maintenance 0x00600003 port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port status: 0x608033 SDI: ACU SSM: NORMAL OPERATION gain: 12 OMNIDIRECTIONAL MODE open loop tracking port/top active HGA LNA on port maintenance 0x00600003 port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU port ant: status 608033 SDI=ACU gain 12 maint 600003 SDI=ACU Figure 4–59. Top/Port Antenna Status: Reports 18,19, and 20 activated 12:31:25 12:31:27 12:31:38 12:31:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C #1 ABC123 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW mobile AMBE 28 C #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 28 C 47 47 44 44 dB/Hz dB/Hz dB/Hz dB/Hz Figure 4–60. AMBE Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) MES Terminated: Report 21 activated 12:34:27 #1 12:34:29 #1 12:34:39 #1 12:35:31 #1 C 43 dB/Hz ABC123 ABC123 ABC123 ABC123 E4 E4 E4 E4 start 800103 14.00 dBW start 800103 14.00 dBW start 800103 14.00 dBW stop 1f01 call cleared mobile AMBE 28 mobile AMBE 28 mobile AMBE 28 by terrestrial C 48 dB/Hz C 48 dB/Hz C 0 dB/Hz circuit 28 Figure 4–61. AMBE Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated Page 4–89 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 12:43:24 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz 12:43:24 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-16.4 dB 28 C IDLE IN CALL beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.2 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:25 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.4 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.0 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:26 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.8 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:26 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:27 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.4 dB/Hz sig=-15.6 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:42 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=54.1 dB/Hz sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:43 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz 12:43:43 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.8 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 12:43:55 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-10.7 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.6 dB/Hz sig=-15.3 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:56 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.1 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:58 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D 12:43:58 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) dB 28 C in call beam=4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots cleared by terrestrial circuit 28 C Figure 4–62. 64 K Speech call (Mobile to Fixed) Terrestrial Termination: Reports 21 and 23 activated Page 4–90 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal .) 12:43:24 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz 12:43:24 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-16.4 dB 28 C IDLE IN CALL beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.2 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:25 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.4 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.0 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:26 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-16.8 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.3 dB/Hz sig=-15.4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:26 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:27 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.4 dB/Hz sig=-15.6 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:42 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=54.1 dB/Hz sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:43 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz 12:43:43 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=*** sig=-11.6 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.8 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 12:43:55 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-10.7 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=46.6 dB/Hz sig=-15.3 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 12:43:55 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 18.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 12:43:56 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 dB 28 C in call beam=4 CARD #2: C/No=47.1 dB/Hz sig=-15.5 dB 30 C no call beam=4 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D 12:43:58 dop 0 ppb az 285.4 deg el CARD #1: C/No=0.0 dB/Hz sig=-999.9 CARD #2: C/No=46.9 dB/Hz sig=-15.8 45D21'16.1"N 75D0'0.2"W PT -10.0D 12:43:58 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots 15.3 deg AOR EAST ant gain 12 (p/t) dB 28 C in call beam=4 dB 30 C no call beam=4 RL 0.0D HD 185.0D TK 0.2D 0 knots cleared by terrestrial circuit 28 C Figure 4–63. 64 K Speech Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Termination: Reports 21 and 23 activated Page 4–91 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 13:40:53 Tue Jun 3, 2003 13:41:22 #1 ABC123 E4 start c00124 14.00 dBW fixed aero 64k speech 28 47 dB/Hz 13:41:25 #1 ABC123 E4 start c00124 22.50 dBW fixed aero 64k speech 28 48 dB/Hz 13:41:35 #1 ABC123 E4 start c00124 18.50 dBW fixed aero 64k speech 28 53 dB/Hz 13:41:41 #1 ABC123 E4 start c00124 19.50 dBW fixed aero 64k speech 28 52 dB/Hz 13:41:45 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1f01 call cleared by terrestrial circuit C 52 dB/Hz 28 Figure 4–64. Speech Call (Fixed-to-Mobile) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated 13:31:06 #2 ABC456 30 C 48 dB/Hz 13:31:17 #2 ABC456 30 C 48 dB/Hz 13:31:28 #2 ABC456 30 C 55 dB/Hz 13:31:40 #2 ABC456 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:31:46 #2 ABC456 30 C 55 dB/Hz 13:31:52 #2 ABC456 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:31:58 #2 ABC456 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:32:04 #2 ABC456 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:32:10 #2 ABC456 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:32:17 #2 ABC456 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:32:23 #2 ABC456 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:32:29 #2 ABC456 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:32:32 #2 ABC456 C 0 dB/Hz E4 start 800625 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 start 800625 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k audio 3k1 E4 stop 1f01 call cleared by terrestrial circuit 30 Figure 4–65. FAX Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) Terrestrial Terminated: Report 21 activated Page 4–92 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 13:33:27 Tue Jun 3, 2003 13:38:22 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 47 dB/Hz 13:38:25 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 47 dB/Hz 13:38:35 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 14.00 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz 13:38:36 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 55 dB/Hz 13:38:37 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 47 dB/Hz 13:38:42 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:38:48 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 22.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 54 dB/Hz 13:38:48 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 20.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:38:54 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz 13:38:54 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:38:53 Tue Jun 3, 2003 13:39:00 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 54 dB/Hz 13:39:00 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:39:06 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz 13:39:06 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:39:12 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 55 dB/Hz 13:39:12 #2 ABC456 E4 start 800622 19.50 dBW mobile aero 64k UDI 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:39:18 #1 ABC123 E4 start 800124 21.50 dBW mobile aero 64k speech 28 C 0 dB/Hz 13:39:19 #2 ABC456 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 30 C 0 dB/Hz 13:39:20 #1 ABC123 E4 stop 1001 call cleared by MES terminal 28 C 0 dB/Hz Figure 4–66. 64 K Speech and Data Call (Mobile-to-Fixed) MES Terminated: Report 21 activated (2) Troubleshooting Table Table 4–27 provides fixes for basic HSD system faults. Before completing any fix, activate the HSD Maintenance Utility Program using the “maint” password. For detailed connection and user instructions, refer to "HSD Maintenance Utility Program" on page 4-3. Page 4–93 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault Description Maintenance Report Check RED LED • remains on • after powering up sequence HPA Uncontrolled • In Stand-Alone installations, check transmit path between RFU and HSD HPA Error Status In menu 1, press Y to • obtain an HPA not reporting status explanation of the word 143 HPA error status HPA not reporting • maintenance word 350 Check continuity on ARINC buses between HSD and antenna subsystem • • • HPA Fault View initial power-up • display of the HSD Maintenance Utility Program reporting invalid SSM • HPA maintenance word reporting ARINC error • HPA maintenance word not reporting HGA antenna • HPA maintenance word reporting VSWR error • HPA maintenance word reporting RAM error • HPA reporting ROM error • HPA maintenance word reporting power supply error • HPA maintenance word reporting temperature error Page 4–94 18 September 2007 In Stand-Alone installations, verify that the multicontrol, looped back is wired (out to in) Check continuity on ARINC buses between HSD and SDU • Verify SDI is strapped correctly (TP5B to TP5D) • Check the external power source is properly connected and meets installation requirements • Check transmit path from HSD output (MPC1) to the antenna subsystem (coax cables, splitters, relays, etc…) • Check the RFU TX output (MPC1) connection to the HSD input (TPC1) • Check installation location meets the RTCA/DO-160D environmental specifications • Check for proper fan-tray operation and air-cooling. • Verify the fan-tray plug distribution is as per the installation requirements SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault Call failure Call failure Call failure Call failure Description IRS information not available Maintenance Report Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23 (See Figure 4–51) System does not log onto the Activate broadbeam maintenance reports 21 and 23 (See Figure 4–53) Check • Check that the IRS systems are powered on and aligned. • Check that connections to the IRS systems are secured. • Check the polarity of IRS input lines. • If no IRS data is available, use Menu 10 to manually input navigational data to point the antenna to a preferred satellite location and try the call again. • Check that the IRS data is received and valid. • Ensure that a valid FWD ID is read • Verify correct antenna pointing. • Ensure LES Access codes are configured correctly. • Verify all coax connections. • System does not log onto the Activate correct Ocean Region maintenance report 21 and 23 • (See Figure 4–53) Unit is not transmitting Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23 Figure 4–52 – No Signal Check that the IRS data is received and valid. Check for antenna line-of-sight interference. • Check for a defective or loose RF cable. • Verify the Rx RF level is acceptable. • Check RF power level displayed in Maintenance Port Menu Report Item 21; signal strength should be requested at 14.00 dBW but in call should increase to 22.5 dBW. • Ensure the HSD is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray. Page 4–95 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault Call failure Description Forward ID is invalid or strapped incorrectly Page 4–96 18 September 2007 Maintenance Report Check Activate • maintenance report 21 (See Figure 4–54) To check FWD ID, in Menu 4, press Q The account registration process has not been completed. Check your account status with your service provider to ensure that the account registration has been processed into the LES databases and that your account is valid. • If in the event log, the message, “Channel card stuck in boot state” appears, check that the assigned FWD IDs are strapped correctly. • If fault code 12B1 appears in the even log, ensure FWD ID is valid for the Inmarsat Terminal Category (If you replace a Stand-Alone unit (CAT. A) with a Non-Stand-Alone unit (CAT. B), you need to get new FWD IDs assigned). SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault Call failure Call failure Description Unit is strapped to an incorrect system mode of installation Dialing sequence was incomplete or incorrect Log-on Unit is not transmitting request fails Maintenance Report In menu 3, select Item L (List EEPROM) Activate report 21 and 23 Figure 4–48 – No call Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23 (See Figure 4–53) Check • Verify the system mode strapping is correct. • Reset the system and observe the initialization display; it shows the HSD unit’s powering up, self-test results. The Initialization display lists the installation mode configuration for the unit. • If the mode displayed is not strapped or is incorrectly strapped, a temporary setting may be used—in Menu 3, select M (misc. EEPROM parameters), then select parameter 16 (Channel Card Category) and configure the HSD to the correct mode (e.g. ‘0’ for SAT-906 ,‘1’ for Stand-Alone…). Reset the unit and try the call again. • Verify the number you are calling and try the number again. • Refer to the HSD User’s Guide for detailed operating instructions. • Ensure that you end the dialing sequence by pressing # (pound key)— pressing # at the end of the dialing string signals the system to “send” the call. • Check for a defective or loose cable. • Check for HPA fault. • Ensure the HSD is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray. Page 4–97 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault Description Log-on Unit is not receiving request fails Incoming call failure Maintenance Report Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23 (See Figure 4–52) Incoming call shows as a Activate report successful connection in 21and 23 report 23, but call does not ring through to the external device (telephone, computer, fax). Page 4–98 18 September 2007 Check • Check for a defective or loose cable. • Verify that the Forward ID is valid, activated, and strapped correctly. • Ensure your account is current and active. • Check for antenna line-of-sight interference. • Ensure the HSD is secured properly to the ARINC connector in the tray. • Check the connection between the HSD and the external device. • Check configuration of external devices is correct. MSN must be configured correctly for each device connected to the system. • If MSNs are not programmed in the user devices, incoming calls will ring all devices. NOTE: Zero “0” is an invalid MSN entry. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault Description Log-on Authorization error (fault successful, code 12C4) but fails to complete call Maintenance Report Activate maintenance reports 21 and 23 (See Figure 4–53 and Figure 4–51) Check • Contact your service provider to verify that the forward ID is activated. • Check that the Forward ID is strapped correctly. • Check that IRS data is available and correct. • Check that the Veh Rel Az/EL to Satellite is correct. • Check that all coax cable connections are secure. • Check that the Rx C/No value is ≥50dB. • Check antenna status is okay. • Check that the primary and secondary LES access codes are valid. • Contact your service provider and verify that they can “see” your Tx signal. To contact the LES operator dial 33 #. • Contact service provider and request that they place an incoming call to the unit. • Check the reported HPA back-off in report 21; Signal should initialize at 14 dBW and increase after handshake to approximately 22.5 dBW – then slowly decrease (Range typically between 18.5 dBW to 21.5 dBW with a lower limit of 14.5 dBW). Page 4–99 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault Maintenance Report Description HSD is Channel card temperature fault operating outside the normal environmen tal specificatio ns Activate report 21 or 23 • Calls do not Channel Congestion (fault complete code 2024) and connection is not established No call request sent Page 4–100 18 September 2007 Check Activate report 21 and 23 Activate report 21 and 23 Check channel card temperature; temperatures of over 50° C to 60° C may cause the HSD or HSD-X to shut down. • Check that the fan tray is operational. • Verify that the tray plug distribution is the same as presented in the installation requirements. • Wait five minutes and try the call again. • Contact the LES to verify congestion. To contact the LES operator, dial 33 #. • Verify that the call dial string is correct; Pressing # at the end of the dialing string signals the system to “send” the call. • Check that the HSD or HSD-X power LED flashes on and off (1 Hz) during a call request. • Check that the ISDN cable is connected correctly and securely. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–27. Troubleshooting and Fault Isolation Fault No dial tone – heard in handset Call drops after successful connection Maintenance Report Description If the RF signal fades significantly (during a call) the connection may drop Note: A sudden, severe aircraft banking angle may obstruct the signal – Activate report 21 and 23 Check • Confirm ISDN lines are wired correctly. • Verify handset connection is secure. • Wait a few minutes for the system to warm-up, then log-on and try your call again. • Check that IRS data is available. • Verify that the unit has completed beam registration. • Check signal strength (C/No ≥ 50 dB). • Ensure there is a clear, un-obstructed, line-of-sight to the satellite. • Select an alternate satellite or beam and try your call again (Note: works if you are located where more than one beam overlaps or satellite is in-view). D. Fault Isolation and Diagnostic Procedures This section provides basic information required for technical personnel to isolate faults in HSD and HSD-X transceivers. Where needed, refer to other sections of this manual (which contain important information to aid in understanding the functionality of the unit) for additional information. Fault isolation procedures are usually conducted on equipment that falls within one of the following categories: • Units that have failed to pass operational and installation verification procedures • Units that have failed during service • Units repaired and returned to service Maintenance reports are helpful in troubleshooting the HSD system. Capturing maintenance port information from the HSD or HSD-X transceiver and forwarding the file to EMS SATCOM technical support staff will assist in troubleshooting suspected HSD system problems. Instructions on how to activate and save “reports” information is provided in the next section. Page 4–101 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Perform all fault isolation procedures provided in this section. Record and document all test results including: LEDs function and maintenance port data outputs (report items 21 and 23). Enable report items 18, 19, and 20 (Port) or items 6, 7, and 8 (Starboard) to record antenna, ACU, and DLNA related faults. Enable other report items as required. Conduct the fault isolation procedures provided in this section and record the resulting system information. Then send the system information collected to EMS SATCOM HSD product support for analysis. CAUTION: Before proceeding with fault isolation procedures, refer to the advisories paragraphs in the introduction section of this manual. (1) Activating and Saving a Diagnostic ‘Reports’ File Use the following procedure to save or “capture” a troubleshooting report for the HSD transceiver. Remember to date and save the file. Annotate the file with any system anomalies or unique operating environments that may in anyway affect system functionality (e.g., physical location of aircraft or transceiver, Land Earth Station being used, list of connected devices). In Multi-Channel systems, activate console mode and select the applicable HSD-X unit you want to monitor before proceeding with this procedure. (To activate console mode, in Menu 18, press X.) 1. Open a log file on the maintenance port, terminal program. (If you are using HyperTerminal, use the “Transfer, capture text” function.) 2. Power the system on or if applicable reset the system. 3. Enter maintenance mode on the maintenance port using maint as the password. (Access level can be changed using menu 1, L command if the system is running and the password level is menu.) 4. Press the equals sign (=) key to activate reports 21 and 23 (toggle off all other report items). 5. Press S to “SAVE” these reports as default. This enables the user to view these reports on subsequent HSD power-ups or “Reset” entries. 6. Reset the system by: cycling the power to the unit; pressing the reset button on the HSD front panel; or in menu 2, press Z to reset the system. 7. Log on to the maintenance port using the password: maint The system should restart and ocean registration will take place (approximately two minutes). 8. After the Beam Registration process completes, press Ctrl+N to display menu 2. 9. Press V to display the software versions of the system. 10. Make a call from the system or execute the procedure or sequence that causes the call failure. Make a note of the call progress. For example: Did you get dial tone? Was the call successful? 11. If applicable, attempt a call from the second channel. 12. Press = to display the current “reports” profile of the system (as noted in step 4). Page 4–102 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 13. To save an alternate “reports” configuration, activate the required items and then press S (in the “reports” menu) to save to EEPROM. 14. Using Ctrl+N, go to menu 3, and then do one of the following: • For units operating control processor software earlier than version 5.7, press L to display EEPROM parameters. (The EEPROM list displays one terminal screen of information at a time. Press L to display subsequent screens.) • For units operating control processor software later than version 5.7, press O to display the ORT List. (The ORT list displays one terminal screen of information at a time. Press O to display the next screen.) 15. In menu 3, press S (list event log) and then press zero “0” and then press the period key “.” to list the complete event log. 16. In menu 3, press F (list call log), then press F again (complete log) and then press the period key “.” to the complete event log.” For extended information, press X. 17. Close the log file on the terminal program. 18. The log file is in text format (.txt file). Open the file and add notes to the beginning of the file indicating: • System serial number (from the label on the front of the unit) • Aircraft and customer name • Any notes about the problems encountered • Contact name, telephone number, and e-mail address • E-mail the log file to EMS Technologies technical support at: hsd.help@emstechnologies.ca Page 4–103 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. Adjustment/Alignment Procedures A. General There are no adjustment/alignment procedures required for HSD or HSD-X transceivers. Page 4–104 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5. Modification History Table 4–28 lists the modification history for the HSD transceiver. This history is provided to aid the technician in understanding the reason for issuing a service bulletin and to describe the changes to the equipment. Table 4–28. Modification History Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0001/A Description of Modification Upgrades channel card software to version 3.0. Upgrades the control processor software to version 4.4. Upgrades accommodate Inmarsat system change and fix software bugs. 1110-SB-0002/A HPA Mute and ARINC 429 driver repair hardware modification. Backplane modification to the HPA wiring harness corrected the reverse biasing of the Mute lines affecting all units installed with a Ball dual-conformal-array antenna. 1110-SB-0003/A Resolves problems with Cooperative Mode operation 1110-SB-0004/A Hardware upgrade to install Data I/O Type 2 card 1110-SB-0005/B Upgrades the hardware for Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM) to include a RF detector and a variable attenuator on the Aero H path of the pre-HPA combiner and allows the reading and control of this attenuator through a serial connection to the combiner. The control processor code is upgraded to include processing of the attenuator settings in the power control algorithm and to allow setting of the attenuator as part of the combined operation. This version does not support Cooperative Mode (with SAT-906). 1110-SB-0006/A Channel card software upgrade to support MPDS 1110-SB-0007/A Upgrades the HSD-128 Control Processor software to version 6.5. This version adds the Multi-Channel capability to the HSD-128 software to support HSD-128 units integration with external HSD-X channels (PN 1110-A-0401). 1110-SB-0010/A Hardware upgrade to dual-channel for single channel card transceivers 1110-SB-0011/B Upgrades the Channel Card software to version C35 to fix Cooperative Mode bug in Channel Card software version C30. Upgrades software to recognize Cooperative Mode System Config hardware strapping. 1110-SB-0012/A Upgrades the channel card software to version C41 (6.0) which supports enhanced HSD functionality in all modes of operation, (including multi-channel configurations) and the use of Inmarsat services—including AMBE STU capability. In Cooperative Mode systems, MPDS is not supported with this version of software. Upgrades the control processor software to version 7.0, which enhances all modes of operation. Selective Mode units operating Category A Inmarsat terminals may experience GPS faults when operating this version of software (workaround: deactivate GPS protection). 1110-SB-0013/A Adds software identification label to HSD units Page 4–105 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Table 4–28. Modification History Service Bulletin 1110-SB-0014/A Description of Modification Data I/O Type 2 Software Upgrade for units with a Data I/O Type 2 card installed 1110-SB-0015/B HSD Control Process Software Enhancement 1110-SB-0401/A Upgrades software to support AMBE STU and improve system and MPDS operation 1110-SB-0402/A Adds software identification label to HSD units Page 4–106 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR 1. General This section provides the maintenance and repair information applicable for all HSD transceiver models. 2. Maintenance The HSD Transceiver does not require routine maintenance. 3. Repair All repair procedures must be completed by EMS SATCOM approved repair facilities. A. Repair Tools and Supplies No special supplies are required to repair this equipment. HSD units that require servicing must be returned to EMS Technologies, Canada or to an EMS SATCOM approved service center. Refer to "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1 for unit testing requirements and procedures. B. Repair Procedures This equipment does not require any special repair procedures. C. Removal Procedures If an HSD or HSD-X unit must be removed from service for repair, with power removed, disconnect all equipment from the unit and then remove it from the ARINC tray. If an HSD-X unit is removed for servicing, the Multi-Channel HSD system will still operate (with reduced channel capacity) as long as the HSD-X trays are populated as shown in Figure 5–1. With an HSD-X unit removed from the series, the remaining HSD-X units must be moved so that the empty tray is always the last tray in the installation series. If the RF path is not equipped with isolators (either separate or built into the combiner), cap all unused splitter outputs and combiner inputs with 50-ohm terminations. Page 5–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Figure 5–1. HSD-X Order of Removal D. Repair Facility Approvals The EMS Technologies SATCOM Division, located at 400 Maple Grove Road in Ottawa, Ontario, Canada, is a Transport Canada Approved Maintenance Organization (AMO). In accordance with the Technical Arrangement on Maintenance between Canada and the European aviation authority JAA, and due to the Bilateral Agreement between Canada and the United States aviation authority FAA, EMS SATCOM conforms to the maintenance requirements of JAR 145 and FAR 145 respectively. E. Return for Repair Information To return equipment to EMS Technologies for repair, follow the Return Materials Authorization procedure. Failure to comply with this procedure may cause shipping delays and additional charges. (1) Warranty Returns Equipment that qualifies for warranty repair can be returned to EMS SATCOM for repair or replacement at our discretion. The customer shall pay the shipping costs to EMS SATCOM and EMS SATCOM will pay for the shipping costs to return the repaired/replaced unit to the customer. (2) Non-Warranty Returns Equipment that fails to work properly because of improper or negligent use, abuse, shipping damage or any other condition can still be returned to EMS SATCOM for repair or replacement at our discretion. The customer will be notified of the cost to repair or replace the unit prior to invoicing for the repair or replacement. The customer shall pay for the shipping costs to and from EMS Technologies. (3) Repackaging Requirements An HSD returned to EMS Technologies must be returned in its original shipping container. Failure to do so may invalidate the warranty. If an HSD shipping container is unavailable, the customer must request a replacement container from EMS SATCOM or assume responsibility for the packaging and shipping. Page 5–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal (4) Return Materials Authorization (RMA) Procedure If it is determined that a unit must be returned to EMS SATCOM for repair or overhaul, please follow the Return Materials Authorization procedure as follows: 1. Have the following information ready before calling the SATCOM Product’s Customer Service Center: • Model number (e.g. HSD); • Unit part number (e.g. 1110-A-0001); • Serial number; • Description of failure; • Federal ID no. (if applicable); and, • Purchase Order number (if available). 2. Call EMS Technologies Customer Service at (1-888) 300-7415 or (613) 591-3086. 3. Request an RMA number. 4. Pack the HSD in an EMS SATCOM-approved shipping-container. 5. Write the RMA number on the outside of the shipping container and ship to: EMS Technologies 400 Maple Grove Road Ottawa, Ontario, CANADA K2V 1B8 6. Fax shipping details with Way Bill # to the attention of the EMS SATCOM R&O Coordinator at (613) 591-8951. Note: The processing of LRU returns is limited to standard business hours from 8:00 am to 4:00 pm EST. Page 5–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 4. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness, FAR 25.1529 This section presents the special instructions and maintenance requirements for continued airworthiness of the HSD High-Speed Data Transceiver. Installation of the HSD on an aircraft by supplemental type certificate (STC) or Form 337 obligates the aircraft operator to include the maintenance information supplied by this manual in the operator’s Aircraft Maintenance manual and the operator’s Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance Program. A. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness Procedures The following paragraphs describe all maintenance requirements and instructions for continued airworthiness of the HSD or HSD-X transceiver. a. This manual contains maintenance information for the HSD and HSD-X units (including system description, system operation, removal, installation, test and fault isolation, and maintenance and repair). b. Add the LRU part numbers and other necessary part numbers contained in this manual to the aircraft operator’s appropriate, aircraft illustrated parts catalog (IPC). c. Add all wiring diagram information contained in this manual to the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals. d. HSD and HSD-X transceivers are considered on-condition units. No additional or routine maintenance is required. e. If an HSD or HSD-X transceiver is inoperative, remove the unit, secure cables and wiring, collar applicable switches and circuit breakers, and placard them as “inoperative.” Before flight, revise the equipment list and weight and balance data as applicable and record the removal of the unit in the log book [refer to section 91.213 of the FAR or the aircraft’s minimum equipment list (MEL)]. f. HSD and HSD-X transceivers are not field-repairable. All units must be returned to the EMS SATCOM factory or authorized repair centers for repair. Instructions for the removal of the unit for repair are provided in this section. g. Repaired units must be re-installed on the aircraft in accordance with the instructions provided in this manual. The operation of all repaired units must be verified using the operational verification tests and procedures provided in this manual before being approved for return to service. All special tools required to test the unit for approval for return to service are listed and described in "Test and Fault Isolation" on page 4-1. Approval for return to service must be entered in the logbook as required by section 43.9 of the FAR. h. The following scheduled maintenance tasks must be added to the aircraft operator’s appropriate aircraft maintenance program: • Recommended periodic scheduled servicing tasks: None required. • Recommended periodic inspections: None required. • Recommended periodic scheduled preventative maintenance tests (tests to determine system condition and/or latent failures): None required. Page 5–4 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal APPENDIX A: INMARSAT SATELLITE BEAM COVERAGE Inmarsat operates four, strategically placed geostationary satellites. Each satellite is located over and named after an oceanic region. The four satellite ocean regions are: • Atlantic Ocean Region-East (AOR-E) • Atlantic Ocean Region-West (AOR-W) • Indian Ocean Region (IOR) • Pacific Ocean Region (POR) The diagram below represents the satellite ocean regions with approximate transfer coordinates for satellite transitions. The four satellite ocean regions are made up of smaller, spot-beam coverage areas. The following maps show the Inmarsat satellite spot-beam coverage for the four ocean regions—as well as a composite map of the four regions combined. Page A–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Page A–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Page A–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Blank Page Page A–4 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal APPENDIX B: TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST Before proceeding to the detailed testing and troubleshooting procedures provided in this manual, read the following QuickStart Troubleshooting Checklist. The QuickStart Troubleshooting Checklist provides answers to common HSD system activation questions. 1. Have you registered with a service provider to activate service? You must register with an Inmarsat-authorized service provider to activate an account to access the Satellite Communications network using an HSD Aeronautical Transceiver. Contact Inmarsat for a list of available service providers at: Inmarsat Customer Care 99 City Road, London, EC1Y 1AX Tel: +44 20 7728 1777 Fax: +44 20 7728 1142 E-mail: customer_care@inmarsat.com 2 Has your account been activated? Once registered, your HSD Transceiver is assigned terminal identification numbers called Forward IDs (FWD ID). The HSD transceiver must be strapped accordingly. Refer to "Installation" on page 3-1 for detailed strapping and installation instructions. Note: The service registration information may take a few days to be incorporated into the system databases at the Land Earth Station (LES) level. New units being commissioned are not validated by the LES until their customer database has been updated by Inmarsat to reflect the registration and activation of your unit. To verify that the service registration information has been validated at the LES, call 33 # for assistance. Confirm with the LES operator that the forward IDs assigned to your unit are valid and active. 3 Is the HSD/HSD-X transceiver seated properly? In cases where the HSD or HSD-X is not fully seated into the ARINC 600 connector (to the rear of the Fan Tray), the user may experience intermittent system operation. If intermittent system operation occurs: Check that the polarization pins are installed correctly as indicated on the applicable Outline and Installation drawing. Ensure the HSD/HSD-X is fully inserted into the tray and that the front, hold-down screws are properly tightened to secure the unit. 4 Is all cabling attached correctly and securely? Broken connections and improper cabling are the most common causes of HSD units “not working.” Before proceeding with testing and troubleshooting, complete the following checks: • Check that all cables and wiring are routed and connected correctly and securely. • Ensure the unit is installed with correct power source. • Verify that all external user and networking devices (for example: terminal adapters, routers, fax, telephones, computers) are connected and configured properly. Page B–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal 5 Have any changes to the system been made? For previously installed and functional units, make note of any changes made to the system since the last time the unit functioned without problems. • Were any new devices or systems connected to the unit? • Have any connecting devices or equipment been removed or replaced? If so, check that all new or replaced connections are attached and configured correctly. • Have you changed service providers or re-configured the system in any way? 6 Are your Primary and Secondary LES Access Codes programmed for all Ocean Regions? In Control Card software versions later than 5.7, the system default for LES access codes is set to “0” (zero), which must be configured to a valid LES access codes before operation. Refer to "System Operation" on page 2-1 for details. 7 Was the operational mode of the system strapped or configured correctly? Verify that the System Mode wiring straps match the installation configuration mode, for example Stand-Alone Mode, Honeywell Combined Mode (HCM), Cooperative Mode, Multi-Channel or Selective Mode. Page B–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal APPENDIX C: RJ-45 CABLE TERMINATION DETAILS Page C–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Page C–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal APPENDIX D: INSTALLATION CHECKLIST Aircraft Identification: HSD Installation Mode: Name: HSD Model Number: HSD Serial Number: Signature: Date: Checks completed by: Approved/witnessed by: Installation/ Mechanical Section Parameter Physical Item N/A Value Service/maintenance access Environmental considerations Fan Tray Plug configuration Chassis bonding Fan rotation ARINC 600 Connector Polarized pins Page D–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Section Parameter Power Connections Item + 28 V dc polarity 115 V ac polarity Chassis grounding Voltage Measurements + 28 V dc level 115 V ac level IRS Input IRS wiring IRS format Configuration Strap Pins SDI System configuration Data I/O Forward Address Installation/Electrical WOW (optional) Ethernet Strapped to RJ45 distribution points ISDN Strapped to RJ45 distribution points MPDS Strapped to DB9S distribution connectors Remotes Manual Reset switch operation Remotes Maintenance port (DB9S access) Power and Fault LED indicators RF Coax Rx i/p cable loss Tx o/p cable loss Antenna Connection Antenna manufacturer and type Wired as per manufacturer Multi-control loopbacks installed Configuration Access codes Channel cards Stand-Alone mode Valid beams Forward ID TEST RF i/p attenuation System Power-up Power-up computer display On-air System Log-on TEST Visual LED indications Reset messages observed Log-on verified Voice/Data Call Page D–2 18 September 2007 Voice/data aircraft all placed N/A Value SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Section Parameter Item N/A Value Tracking results checklist completed Antenna Tracking Results Heading (Deg) HSD Antenna selected Antenna Azimuth Ch 1 HSDX Ch 2 #1 #2 C/NO sig C/NO sig C/NO sig C/NO sig 15 30 45 60 75 90 Operational Test 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 240 255 270 285 300 315 330 TEST 345 360 Optional Checks Ground segment Flight segment Page D–3 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Section Parameter Item N/A Value Tracking results checklist completed Antenna Tracking Results Heading (Degrees) Antenna selected Antenna Card # 1 Azimuth C/No 15 30 45 60 75 90 Operational Test 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 240 255 270 285 300 315 330 TEST 345 360 Optional Checks Page D–4 18 September 2007 Ground segment Flight segment Card # 2 Signal C/No Signal SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal APPENDIX E: RECORD OF ACCOMPLISHMENT To record the accomplishment of a software service bulletin, complete a copy of this form for each unit (serial number) that has been upgraded. Fax or e-mail all Record of Accomplishments (one for each unit) to EMS Technologies. If you require assistance, contact EMS SATCOM Product Support. EMS SATCOM Product Support: 1.888.300.7415 (routed to a mobile after regular business hours) E-mail: hsd.help@emstechnologies.ca FAX:1.613.591.0797 HSD IDENTIFICATION Part No Serial No Hardware Revision Software Revision No. (LI revision) AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION Type Serial No Registration (Tail) No CUSTOMER INFORMATION Company Phone No Contact Name Signature DEALER Company Phone No Contact Name Signature SOFTWARE STATUS AFTER ACCOMPLISHMENT OF SERVICE BULLETIN: Application HSD Example 4.3 HSD-X Channel Cards HSD C30 HSD-X HPA HSD V9A4 HSD-X Data I/O HSD HSD-X DIOMain 1.17.elf Original Software New Software Installed Page E–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Blank Page Page E–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal APPENDIX F: RF SPLITTER Page F–1 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Blank Page Page F–2 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Notes 18 September 2007 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL eNfusion™ HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal Notes 18 September 2007
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res Author : M. Camm Create Date : 2007:09:18 14:37:42Z Keywords : eNfusion HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual Modify Date : 2010:04:07 15:44:17-07:00 Has XFA : No Tagged PDF : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.2 Metadata Date : 2010:04:07 15:44:17-07:00 Format : application/pdf Title : MN-1110-10113.pdf Creator : M. Camm Description : MN-1110-10113.pdf Subject : eNfusion HSD-128 High-speed Data Terminal System Description, Installation, and Maintenance Manual Document ID : uuid:e9032356-1b5d-4ee1-94d5-192eebb5a4e8 Instance ID : uuid:405572a5-638c-43ac-b4e7-7dab0728e346 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 366EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools